Only when we understand the Immortal Being that we really are, exists the possibility of escaping the fishbowl. And once we discover who we are as divine beings, we will also understand the purpose for our journey in this world of illusion: of duality and time. Playing the Master Game reveals that almost all humans live their lives in a sleeping state from which few will ever escape. Playing the Master Game provides the opportunity for freeing our self from this ‘waking-sleep’ by making us aware that our lower self consciousness is not the highest level of consciousness possible

Only when we understand the Immortal Being that we really are, exists the possibility of escaping the fishbowl. And once we discover who we are as divine beings, we will also understand the purpose for our journey in this world of illusion: of duality and time. Playing the Master Game reveals that almost all humans live their lives in a sleeping state from which few will ever escape. Playing the Master Game provides the opportunity for freeing our self from this ‘waking-sleep’ by making us aware that our lower self consciousness is not the highest level of consciousness possible

Transformation of the Human-Animal’ will clarify what it means to be Awake or asleep and why many modern human-animals still life in a collective herd or group consciousness. That evolving to ever higher states of consciousness is the Divine Plan for all of mankind.

Higher Self consciousness is the next evolutionary goal for the present modern day Homo Sapient Man.The matured Higher Self is known as Cosmic Consciousness, Universal Consciousness or Supra Consciousness (Supermind).

Transformation’ also describes, why and how the New Man must learn to reintegrate back into the old lower self world to which He no longer belongs but must continue to live in. How He must constantly learn to integrate and adapt to the ongoing and shifting biological transformation, which in the beginning stages keep Him in a constant state of turmoil. It explains why the New Man must find a renewed and energizing purpose in order to regain a desire for remaining in His old lower self-conscious world.

Transformational Psychology is a method and the inner power fuels and accelerates our transformation, from the human-animal that we are, to that of a more spiritualized being called the Higher Self. Transformative stages occur when our lower self’s vibrational frequency is slowly purified until it is attuned to the vibrational frequency of the Hiigher Self consciousness.

This Higher Self is the next stage in our spiritual evolutionary growth. It is through an intense self-examination of our psyche that we gain a new and broader understanding of who this lower self conscious human, that we believe ourselves to be, really is. Through an increasing awareness that grows in conjunction with the transformation we also pin knowledge of some of the higher states of consciousness that exist.

Once our physical body has adjusted itself to higher vibrational frequencies we can then have access to die raise frequency realms that our body can tolerate and sustain itself in; at least for short durations. Through our widening understanding we learn what actions are necessary in order to transcend our lower self consciousness—a consciousness that presendy keeps us confined within a fishbowl of darkness and ignorance.

This fishbowl is a world in which we have only a dim awareness and where our reality is that of a somnambulistic and robotic being.

The state of fear is state of existence and not life, because we do not know what it means to be fully alive and living to the fullest of our capabilities. In order for us to understand this world and the other beings who live in it with us, we must first be able to understand our self: who we are, why we are, where we came from and where we are going.

Only when we understand the Immortal Being that we really are, exists the possibility of escaping the fishbowl. And once we discover who we are as divine beings, we will also understand the purpose for our journey in this world of illusion: of duality and time.

Then the desire to free our self from our confinement in the fishbowl begins to grow into a hunger that cannot be denied.This powerful desire for freedom will stir us into taking whatever actions are necessary to make possible our escape from the dark limitations of our present sleeping state.

There it only one way to escape from the fishbowl and that is by transcending our lower self consciousness by our meumorphosis into a higher state of consciousness. Once our awareness has been broadened by experiencing a higher state of consciousness. we come to recognize that this lower self conscious person who we believed ourselves to be. is not who we are!

And, that there are worlds beyond the fishbowl; worlds that hold more reality and more meaning then we could ever have imagined. We embark on our journey of discovery and transformation in order to awaken and to become aware of the magnificence of our potential. It is only through our awakening that we become aware of the Glory that is us-in-the-making!

Before we awaken, we have no idea that we are more than our personality and the roles that we are “playing” on the stage of this life. We do not recognize that we are an unfinished being in-the-making. We do not know that we have the potential to become an autonomous Immortal mortal Being of Light and Love. Nor do we know that the transformation needed to make this possible can only be done while in a physical body within this realm of duality.

This is why our life here in this world is so important. Most of us move up the ladder of Consciousness automatically and unknowingly. a process spanning countless centuries and innumerable life tines.

All of us have the potential to move up the ladder of Consciousness at an accelerated pace but of those who know this, few choose to do so. The fear of the unknown, the fear of change and the fear of personal repercussions from those we know and from society at large, keep most of us rooted within our comfort-zones, even if our existence is meaningless. full of misery and strife.

However, our spiritual evolution can be accelerated through the methods used and practiced by Transformational Psychology. Spiritual growth and the attainment of a Higher Consciousness and more awareness can be accomplished in a much shorter period. However, this can only occur if our personality willingly participates in the destruction of its old physical, emotional and intellectual programming.

We have to conquer our fear of venturing into our inner world in order to discover and examine the many false selves that lurk within us. We are all a house divided, because there is no Master present. We are all a conglomerate of many selves, all competing for being ‘top dog’ and running the show! It is only after surrendering all that we thought we were, that we will be able to realize who we actually are.

We must surrender our ego and our will and follow the call of our Higher Self but this can only happen once we discover who the Master of our House is. And. in order to find and solidify the Master, we must first discover which one of our selves is actually our authentic self. During our stay in this material world we are composed of three separate components: a lower self, a Higher Self and the immortal nortal spark of the Divine. It is this immortal spark of the Divine within us that ‘lives’ us.

This Divine spark is our Essence—our Immortality. It is this Essence spark that enters and resides in each new life that we conic to dwell in. We arc a living spark of Divinity that belongs to our Soul; to which we return after each lifetime in another realm. The lower self conscious Homo sapiens human-animal that we are, is only an actor on the stage of a temporary and illusory life.

We are only mortal personalities composed of an ego and a mind in a physical body. Our lower self personality is totally oblivious to anything outside of the fishbowl existence.This lower being that we are is enslaved by the human-animal body, which is under the control of the law of Mother Nature.

Therefore, we ale motivated by and mechanically follow the body´s animal traits and instincts. Until we awaken from this animalistic state we will remain confined and bound to our sleeping fishbowl existence.

Our Higher Self knows us better than we know our self, for our Higher Self is closer to us than we are to our own Beingness. Some intuitively call the lfigher Self their guardian angel—and they are right. it is! We are unaware of our Higher Self until our awareness becomes connected and tuned in to ‘Its vibrations.

Only then do we sense It as a living and intimate presence that is above and beyond our personality level. And then we understand that we are always connected, because we are an integral part of this Higher Self. It is only when we lose awareness of our Higher Self that we feel aimless and alone; when in actuality we are never disconnected from our Higher Self. Our Higher Self is always with us, watches over us and heart and responds to our every call that we send out.

Our Higher Self is the bridge that connects us to our mortality and immortality, for It has access to both the lower self realm and the transcendent realm of our Soul.Our Higher Self is in pursuit of acquiring more growth of essence. This it does through the physical senses of its intermediary. which is the personality. When we. the lower self personality. become connected and aware of our Higher Self. only then is it possible for the personality to actively participate in the acceleration of the transformation process.

We all need to find a game worth playing; for without an aim-game that makes us feel like getting nut of bed each morning with purpose and enthusiasm. we cannot have a creative or useful life. Without a pine worth playing we cannot experience an authentic life—only a meaningless, bleak and robotic existence.

This is a life of accidie; a life utter boredom, flat, joyless and without any hope that there will conic a changed and brighter tomorrow.This is the only type of life that billions of our fellow human beings ever experience. Everyone, knowingly or unknowingly plays a game.

Most of us from the time of our birth have been cast into a particular game; a game that contains the aims for our life.The majority of us never feel a need to stop and examine our life because we do not recognize that we are role-playing within a particular game.

We believe that the roles we act out are actually who we are. But all our roles are only make-believe masks belonging to our personality. It is only when we no longer find any meaning in our life or we are overcome with suffering or feel a persistent yearning for ‘a something’ that we cannot define, that we pause and question what our life is all about. It is this pause. this suspension in dine, which gives us the opportunity for changing the direction of our life.

We can either alter our old game or choose an entirely new game to play. But, only after having fully awakened to our fishbowl existence are we able to wisely choose a new game to play. And the game we choose defines the aim of our aspirations and spiritual maturity. Most may not think it necessary or even possible to change their present life-game; but any game, once we realize it’s only a game, can be altered for the better.

This is what Transformational Psychology is able to do.Through an intense and truthful examination of our inner self, we can uncover the illusions and falsehoods we harbour that keep us from leading a more productive and happier life. As we become more aware of who and why we are, we see the people in our life from a higher and more insightful perspective.

Through our continual transformation, a wider awareness and a more receptive understanding will develop. We will discover a new meaning in all that we do and this will greatly increase the quality of our daily life.

As we spiritually mature we develop a more positive and discerning outlook. We become more sensitive to our actions and words when we interact and co llllll unicate with others. We are able to accept more easily what we cannot change and be more daring in changing what we can.

There are two types of games: Meta games and object games. Object games are played strictly for acquiring the things of this world: wealth, fame, power and control over others. For many, life’s aim is simply to squeeze as much out of this material life by acquiring and consu g at much at possible.

Some of the more common games that people play are: the misery and suffering game, the wealth game. the fame and prestige game and the glory and power gante.The most co llllll on oral’ is the householder game: to eat and be merry. to procreate and raise a family. this is the aim for the majority of people.

Object games come instinctively to human beings and therefore require little effort to play. Then there are those who have no aim-game at all. It is better to play any game than to have no game at all. for without a pme, there is no aim and no direction to one’s life.

Aimlessness can only lead to misery and spiritual regression and the waste of one’s precious lifetime in the body. Meta games are played for experiencing altered realities, for spiritual enlightenment, acquiring knowledge. creating artistic works and deliverance from bondage to the darkness and ignorance of our fishbowl existence.’ he most difficult of all the Meta games to play is the Master Game*.

This game is played by few, for it demands all that a person has to give. It is played mainly within one’s inner world. It is played to sprout the seeds of all our highest potentials. To uncover all the powers that are normally hidden and locked up within our psyche and our physical body.

Playing the Master Game reveals that almost all humans live their lives in a sleeping state from which few will ever escape. Playing the Master Game provides the opportunity for freeing our self from this ‘waking-sleep’ by making us aware that our lower self consciousness is not the highest level of consciousness possible.

By playing the Master Came. it becomes possible to get a caste of various states of altered consciousness. including that of our Higher Self. And when we are transported for a moment out of our normal waking-sleep, we get for the first time a taste of freedom. The Higher Self consciousness awareness is a realm of complete objectivity. for in that condition we exist in a state of complete detachment.

Yet included within this gate of detachment are blended in the elements of Total Satisfaction and Fullness. In this super-aware state. we are for the first titre in harmonious balance, experiencing and feeling ourTrue Self. Through the method and practice of Transformational Psychology our life can be transformed. thereby accelerating our spiritual growth.

Self-awareness develops through an intense in-depth exploration and examination of our psyche. This inner self includes not only our personality but also our Essence.This Essence is our immortal mortal Beingnets. It is the core of who we actually are. This it the immortal core that migrates with us from one life-time to another.

A method used to achieve more self-awareness is learning how to direct all our attention not only to the outer actions occurring around us. but at the same time. directing our awareness to the movements within our inner self. Through this balanced two-way attention our Watcher is activated. This Watcher is an objective, detached Observer who simply views all actions. emotions. thoughts and responses of our personality without making judgments. Our Watcher is also aware of the motivations behind all that we do and say.

This Objective Observer, this Watcher. is our Higher Self. Growth of sell-awareness is acquired by a constant observation of our thoughts and actions. It takes time and practice to develop this delicately held two-way awareness. mainly because of our easily distracted and fluctuating mind. Rapid movements and actions and the noise of outer activities surrounding us pull us magnetically outwardand plunge us back into our lower awareness.

Within a nanosecond our dual awareness is extinguished. Through this nvo-way self-awarenett we also become keenly alert to the actions of our ego and its ‘hidden motives and agendas. This two-way awareness places us outside of the ego and therefore we are able to observe it as an objective observer.

This finely tuned dual awareness attracts the Light of our Higher Self. which will penetrate deep into all the dark corners of our ignorance, revealing all our egoistic desires animal traits and illusions.

Only after the root causes of our imperfections have been revealed can we analyze the basis for their existence. Through this cleansing process of our psyche–our emotions/intellect and physical body—we begin to transcend our lower consciousness by moving ever further into the consciousness of our Higher Self.

This purification is accelerated each ‘ we make the choice to opt for Higher Self value instead of a lower self one. Whenever we choose a Higher Self value and reject the lower animal trait valu especially when aware that this will create difficulties for us. we decrease the power of our ego-driven personality and speed up our transformation.

In order to advance on our journey we must have the heart and determination of a warrior, for the struggle to overcome Mother Natures’ spell is a long and difficult one.

It will be a fierce battle and in order to succeed, we must be spiritual warriors with a strong aspiration to free ourselves from our animal heritage. She will fight us by activating and bringing to the surface all the influences of our animal instincts and traits that are as yet lodged in our physical body and our psyche.

Through the practice of Transformational Psychology we embark on a new path, a vertical path that takes us higher up the ladder of evolution into the transcendent realms. Moving vertically, we will begin to disconnect from the horizontal path of time, duality and matter that is the producer and sustainer of our lower self consciousness. This vertical course is the beginning of the acceleration of our transformation out of the Human-Animal consciousness into that of our Higher Self consciousness.

Through the gradual disintegration of our lower self consciousness, the connection with our Higher Self will deepen until we experience a rebirth into a new and higher state of consciousness. This Higher Self conscious state is programmed to be the next step in our spiritual evolution—a transmutation into a new species called Cosmic Man.

We will be transformed from being slaves to the laws of our ego, mind and programmed personalities of our fishbowl reality, into new beings who are inner directed by the guidance and calls of our Higher Self.

It will be from the purity of our inner life where our aims, aspirations and actions originate and not from our robotic, egoistic outer self personalities. It is not ‘up there’ in the transcendent realms that our transformation is to be accomplished but right here in this physical body. But in order to transform, we must listen and surrender to the promptings and calls of our Higher Self. Only then will our Higher Self send us the circumstances that we need in order to keep us moving on the Path to our eventual Glory.

After birth into Self-Realization we do not automatically become a perfect Being. We are now glaringly Aware of our own ignorance and imperfections. We can no longer escape our defects by ignoring or hiding from our motives. We are now noticing the disparity between our intentions and our actions.

With this new birth has also come a heightened sensitivity, making us more susceptible to pain and suffering. Fortunately, we have also acquired a deeper depth of endurance and faster recuperative powers, which shorten emotional and mental distress. We must find and walk the middle path between the old man and the New Man, charting a new course ofAwareness and balance between the two—the one, who is being left behind, and the New One, who we are being absorbed into. Gaps occur between the two worlds, when each one is distinctly felt and in conflict with the other; but mostly there are varying degrees of over-lapping.

Each step out of the old is taking one step further into the New Retreat back into the old is no longer an option. Our roots are now embedded within the New Consciousness. To acquire ever more freedom from the old world of duality, we must continue to make ever deeper inroads into the New and this is done by bringing the Higher Consciousness down into the coarser vibrations of the lours self.

Through this meeting and merging the finer vibrations will absorb and transmute the lower. heavier ones. This transformation can only occur within the realm of the lower self. To prevent the lower self front being obliterated or incurring damage to the physical body, the transmutation must proceed at a slow and steady pace. For a permanent change in consciousness to occur. the lower nun must actively—and in full Awareness—participate in his transformation. 1t must bring the Higher Consciousness into his daily life.

The New Values must be lived in order to deepen into maturity.There are stages, stepping-stones that have to be touched and crossed. Periods for fermentation, a ‘Isnot] and adjustment for the construction of a new cohesive State of Being are needed. The physical body is the medium through which the lower self makes its transformation. A new physiology is required for residing in the Realm of Cosmic Consciousness.

The dense cellular structure of the matter-bound body of the old man acts as a barrier between the old and the New.The old body must be cleansed of its denseness and new circuits opened and established so that it can sustain the finer frequency vibrations of the Higher Realm.

Only after the old physiology has been completely transformed does it become possible to ‘slip over’ for permanent existence within Cosmic Consciousness. Till this transformation is complete, each entry into Cosmic Consciousness takes a toll on the physical body. When we return from there, the body feels drained of energy; a lassitude is felt and normally it will take a few hours to recover.

This is why, in the beginning, a lengthy stay is not possible; the body needs to attune itself in stages. The oscillating states that occur between the two worlds provide the opportunity for this adjustment.

While having our Awareness in Cosmic Consciousness we arc unaware of the physical body. It moves and functions under its own volition. This disconnection poses a threat to the safety of the body because we are now unaware of its needs and most dangerous of all—we don’t care!

We are now living in Total-Perfection-And-Satisfaction. Fear and desire do not exist. We glide in an Ocean-Of-Invulnerability in which Acceptance and Surrender are integral elements. Another danger for the lower nun is that Cosmic Consciousness tips him of the personality-ego: it hones and bares him down to his Essence. This leaves hint open and vulnerable. He must not allow himself to be swept away and be obliterated by the Transcendent Bliss nor become addicted to Its sire” call of sensuousness.

If he is to attain to being an autonomous and self directed Being, he matt keep a firm hold on his Am-Ness. He remain in full Awareness of his Selfhood. Just like two lovers who feel as one, yet, at the same time, both remain Aware of their individuality. Intuition is the language of the New Man and it is the transitional language, the bridge between thinking and Direct Knowing. Direct Knowing is the matured language of Cosmic Man. Cogitation will no longer be needed and it will drop away.

This Direct Knowing is the Stillness-Of-Pure-Awareness. This Pure-Consciousness is our real Immortal-Beingness. The New Man is only a transitional Beingness. He is the last and Highest Form of Man existing in a gross physical body within the realm of mind and matter.The Realm of Cosmic Consciousness is the bridge between the world of matter and the Transfinite Beyond. Even Connie Man, when His evolutionary moment arrives, will continue on—on the Great Journey into the All of the All.

Transformation will come to all. It will come whenever our ripeness reaches its peak. We are all One—we are all on the same Great Journey—we all breathe the same breath and our Hearts throb with the same Heartbeat. We are all longing to reunite with our Completeness.

All steps led towards one great purpose—to leap out of bondage and leap into Freedom. Our life on this Earth is a journey of exploration—a journey into the unknown of our Self, where we rediscover that we are a Spark-Of-The-One, a wave within The-Great-Ocean-of-Beingness.

Fear had a much different purpose before. It actually was created as a function, not a state of being. This state of fear is been controlled by the ego. . The very moment we create any illusory thought of separation from God, we then, at that moment, create a dichotomy, and this is been controlled by the ego. The ego is also the vel of ignorance. And the ego has become the god of this world. “The goal of gnostic striving is the release of the “inner man” from the bonds of the world and his return to his native realm of light.” “Man must finish the work which Nature has left incomplete,” said the Alchemists, and transform the leaden consciouness into gold consciousness of enlighment.

The Book of Genesis, the Garden of Eden is actually a metaphor for the Supernal Triangle, or Divine Consciousness. The Creation of Adam and Eve is the creation of Duality. When Adam and Eve were expelled from the Garden of Eden, it is a symbolic depiction of Man’s falling from Divine consciousness into the Ego consciousness, the mind of Duality, where we are separated from the eternal bliss of the Unity of God.

To return to the Garden of Eden they must destroy their individuality, their Ego, their sense of self. Duality must be eliminated; all consciousness of polar opposites must be gone. Only then can one Cross the Abyss back to the Supernal Triangle, the Garden of Eden, and become One with God again.

The state of ego-duality can´t exist in a state of Oneness, so the ego can´t eixst in higher levels of consciousness.

We have left behind the Heaven reality, simply because we have created this altered-ego mentality. The result of this unconscious action has always been, and continues to be, that we fail to embrace the Kingdom.

As we have stated, this “forgetting” of our Truth, was with divine purpose. That purpose was so that God, through each and every piece of himself, could “experience” the all knowing of himself. This being in multitudes of new, different, and unique ways for the expansion of the Universal mind of God. So, with the creation of this “forgetfulness”, we embarked on the true purpose of our being in this experience. That purpose, has always been for the Soul, (God within), to embrace the fullness of that all knowing, and re-member, or mentally re-connect with the Whole of the One.

This is the purpose for the manifestation of our experiences. In essence, the experience of God, re-membering God, through each and every piece of God. This, in and of itself, has been our divine “process” of life through these created experiences. A divine process indeed. In our journey, through the strength and depth of this collective creation, we have manifested our experiences with great power. So great, and so deep, that we have allowed ourselves to get “lost” within it’s very constructs. This happened when the fear of the separation that we perceived from the One, became so great, that it lead us into a survival mode, if you will.

That is to say that we became so entrenched in the thought of survival, we began to forget our core truth. The reality that our oneness with Source, makes us the very creators of this illusory process that we mistake for life itself. We, through the illusions, and the consequences of those illusions, started the process of “believing”. We started to believe, falsely believe, that we are the sum of our own outer creations. That what we consist of, is limited to a mind and a body.

A mind that thinks the thoughts, and a body that carries out those thoughts and bodily functions. That we are just this vehicle that carries us through this “mode” of surviving. So, what this altered-ego would have us to forget most of all, is the truest aspect of ourselves. The soul that is the God within us. This soul is what Jesus was speaking of when he said that the Kingdom is within you. This is what lead to the thought of separateness from that which we are. It is important to note here that we All have egos.

It is what we would consider to be our unique, or personality aspect self. However, this very thought of separation, or dividedness, is what led to the ego being altered to begin with. We, through our “forgetting”, have only attempted to convince ourselves, that the truest part of ourselves, resides somewhere “outside” of ourselves. Now, we have seen that the birth of this false sense of self that we call the altered-ego, was the beginning of the illusion of what is perceived as separation or division. It is our intention, through these writings, to reveal that what we perceive to be negative, painful, or indifferent in any form, are all the direct result of the belief in these altered-ego manifestations.

That is to say, that we believe in, or latch onto what the altered-ego has produced, in order to sustain itself. We do this, instead of embracing the True Creative Essence, and reflecting it’s reality.

The truth is, that our connection to God can never be severed. The very moment we create any illusory thought of separation from God, we then, at that moment, create a dichotomy. A dichotomy is: division into two, usually contradictory parts or opinions, such as; good or bad, right or wrong, strong or weak, pretty or ugly, black or white, superior or inferior. The result of this formulation is that we remove the way of God from the given scenario. Which is to say, that we have attempted to take One and make it two.

The Archons created two worlds out of one, and this world is ruled by an artificial intelligence of the ego, this is also the matrix or the mind prison. The ego´s purpose is to control the state of duality, so no one can leave this three dimensional reality, the matrix or the mind prison and progress to fifth dimension.

Its much easier to stay in the three dimensional reality and accept all the concepts of ego and duality as real.

All of what we humans experience is a direct result of our minds or mentality. That is to say, the thoughts that we manifest and bring forth are the very creators of what we experience. Since our minds are unconsciously filtered through the false sense of self, many of the resulting creations are what we deem to be “negative”.

The most common of these negative states are the illusions of fear, disease, and death. All of which the falsely trained mind has led us to perceive to be very real or solid states. When the truth is expressed through the mind/mentality, then we see these false states for exactly what they are. False states. As it is said, what we resist persists, and what we look at through the eyes of Truth disappears. What we resist, we create more of.

Our mental focus being on the resistance, inevitably will bring forth, or create more of what we are focusing on. When we see through the eyes of Truth, we see the reality of what we are creating. We then see the illusions for what they truly are… illusions, and thus, they cease to be. This, because we now can make the conscious choice to stop the creation of it.

The false state of fear, through the misaligned mind, will create, experience by experience, an inevitable mental confrontation with the Light of Truth. Once at that place, the Light of Truth will only transform the Fear back to it’s original state, which is that Oneness, that alignment with All things, which is the Light itself.

With this being said, we can now understand why Fear can only bring us to the door of understanding, but not carry us through. In our most primitive form of our “human” creation, Fear had a much different purpose. It actually was created as a function, not a state of being.

With this being said, we can now understand why Fear can only bring us to the door of understanding, but not carry us through. In our most primitive form of our “human” creation, Fear had a much different purpose. It actually was created as a function, not a state of being.

Our most primal fear was created for the purpose of “fight or flight”. To this day, it still indeed serves us in that purpose. It can detour us, or stop us in a moment of danger. For example, if I am walking close to the edge of a cliff, what is it that stops me from getting to close to the edge, or even walking over it? Fear serves us to keep the body safe and in tact. If we destroy it, as many of us continually do, whether in a moment, or slowly over time, then the soul must move into another vessel in which to experience this human physicality.

The unfortunate reality of moving into a new vessel however, is that the new vessel does not accept the memories of the previous form. This, with the exception of momentary remembrances. These, we have in our dream state or in other instances that we have come to refer to as deja vu.

So, indeed, for the protection and continuation of the physical self, the creation of fear serves us well. The “problem” if you will, with the state of Fear, is that we have continually chosen to utilize it beyond this most primal function. We have used it, to the extremes of our mentalities, to confirm our greatest doubts.

Our Fear is only a misalignment with our inherent knowing of our God Consciousness, and we cannot have true faith in the Truth of God when our fear only confirms doubt. What is it that we are doubting? If All is God, is it this fact that we are doubting? Does God Fear God? Again, if All is God, what exactly is it that we are fearing?

The creation of fear that we all experience, will always be felt because of the false sense of loss. This combined with the threat of losing that which we deem as valuable and dear to our hearts. The cause for this emotional distress, is due to the multitude of “loss-producing-thoughts” occurring in our minds. It also has to do with the mental perception we use concerning what these valuable items, (people, places, and things), mean to us. We deem these things to be, what makes us a visible being within Creation. Without them, we think that our magnitude of “being” is either diminished or non-existent. In essence, we think that these things of our perceived outer world, are the holders of our identification.

Many of the establishments of power that we have come to know, have gained their power through the promotion of fear. The reality is that we have willingly given to them our own power, as the result of our embracement of fear. They have convinced us of this false sense of our own identification, and we have more than willingly obliged them.

We give them the freedom to manipulate our minds into believing that without their guidance, we will lose the opportunity, individually, to have a successful life. That without our formulations of government, education, and forms of religion, etc., we will only create for ourselves harsh consequences of failure.

Consequences that they would have us believe could not be avoided or endured individually. This being necessary for them to maintain this control for our best interests. With a bit of inner common sense investigation, you will come to understand the reason why most of our “power structures” have become so good at what it is they do. It is because they themselves are in a constant state of fear. The question we should be asking ourselves at this point of awareness is, why are we giving our power away to these “entities of control”, when they are not the sovereign saving gods we think them to be?

And why is it that we have had such a high level of faith in these “outwardly” constructed entities to begin with?”

The reason is that they know that as long as we can remain oblivious to our divine nature, they can continue to feed off of our energy. This being primarily for the benefit of a few. This is an obvious indicator that their own personal perception of themselves is of a powerless one.

This power structure pulls energy from those of us oblivious to the fact that we are relinquishing.

These all promote a sense of need that only serves to intensify the fear of incompleteness. Positioning us for directional placement within these systems. These forms of enslaving systems promote a false sense within us that we must somehow work to obtain our inherent wholeness. This is how the governments govern their people, instead of serving them. Keeping us loyal to their selfish cause.

We are lead to believe that these actions are for God. So that we will “believe” that they are actually the desires of God. The reality is that they are actually for the benefit of themselves. These are people who have become lost in their titles and their ability to attain attention from the masses. This in turn has caused the ego part of themselves to become falsely inflated. Now, having completely immersed themselves within it, that is, it’s alteration, they are completely driven by this false force. This is the very process, as we have described, that takes the True form of ego away from its True purpose. One of the main factors that pulls them away from their reason for taking on this position, is the collection of money. This action should have been to serve the whole, but has only served to be one of our all time greatest vices.

Fear has become the dominate energy projected through the mass consciousness, and fear is the primary momentum creating events on the global stage. The Golden Age will unfold naturally as the mass consciousness shifts from fear-based into love and trust-based ascendancy.

When people are truly in tune with their hearts there will be a paradigm shift in mass consciousness. The collective heart will be activated and it will influence reality. At present collective fear, pulsating and active, is weaving the tapestry of reality. The personal fears of individuals on both sides of the fence, across borders, feed the collective fear.

The rise in consciousness of one individual has a direct effect on the mass consciousness of humanity, thus causing a chain reaction that positively alters the fate of the world.

As we expand our awareness within the three-dimensional world of space (length, breadth, depth) and time (past, present, future), we start to appreciate the tapestry of life in which we live. We reconnect to higher vibrations that wind though and around the linear life, characterized by cycles or patterns which naturally repeat themselves and are reflected in the cycles of the body and the seasons of nature.

It’s critical for our wellbeing and our path to the Living Light Body to understand and recognize the aspects of the third-dimensional box that we have been living in. Duality, reactionary present-time and the rational mind are all intricately woven into the fabric of the third-dimensional matrix. By becoming aware of these underlying templates upon which the third dimension operates, you begin to have the choice to step out of it. You can reconstruct and remember a significant part of yourself, thereby becoming free to move beyond the limits of the third dimension and experience the possibilities of the fourth dimension, the fifth and beyond. Multidimensionality can be available to you.

The goal of gnostic striving is the release of the “inner man” from the bonds of the world and his return to his native realm of light. “Man must finish the work which Nature has left incomplete,” said the Alchemists; which means that we have to live our life in such a way as to blend (the “sacred marriage” of Alchemy) the consciousness of our outer self with the consciousness of our inner self and create a consciousness of one harmonious self. The two strands are not mutually exclusive; turning lead into gold, or creating the philosopher’s stone (which bestows eternal life), may also be seen as metaphors for spiritual, as well as physical, transformation. Many alchemists believed that personal transformation and spiritual purity were required before the physical processes would be successful.

Man, the main object of these vast dispositions, is composed of flesh, soul, and spirit. But reduced to ultimate principles, his origin is twofold: mundane and extra-mundane. Not only the body but also the “soul” is a product of the cosmic powers, which shaped the body in the image of the divine Primal (or Archetypal) Man and animated it with their own psychical forces: these are the appetites and passions of natural man, each of which stems from and corre-sponds to one of the cosmic spheres and all of which together make up the astral soul of man, his “psyche!’

Through his body and his soul man is a part of the world and subjected to the heimarmene. Enclosed in the soul is the spirit, or “pneuma” (called also the “spark”), a portion of the divine substance from beyond which has fallen into the world; and the Archons created man for the express purpose of keeping it captive there.

Thus, as in the macrocosm man is enclosed by the seven spheres, so in the human microcosm again the pneuma is enclosed by the seven soul-vestments originating from them. In its unredeemed state the pneuma thus immersed in soul and flesh is unconscious of itself, benumbed, asleep, or intoxicated by the poison of the world: in brief, it is “ignorant.” Its awakening and liberation is effected through “knowledge.”

“The goal of gnostic striving is the release of the “inner man” from the bonds of the world and his return to his native realm of light.”

The radical nature of the dualism determines that of the doctrine of salvation. As alien as the transcendent God is to “this world” is the pneumatic self in the midst of it. The goal of gnostic striving is the release of the “inner man” from the bonds of the world and his return to his native realm of light. The necessary condition for this is that he knows about the transinundane God and about himself, that is, about his divine origin as well as his present situation, and accordingly also about the nature of the world which determines this situation.

“What liberates is the knowledge of who we were, what we became; where we were, whereinto we have been thrown; whereto we speed, wherefrom we are redeemed; what birth is, and what rebirth.”

This knowledge, however, is withheld from him by his very situation, since “ignorance” is the essence of mundane existence, just as it was the principle of the world’s coming into existence. In particular, the transcendent God is unknown in the world and cannot be discovered from it; therefore revelation is needed.

The necessity for it is grounded in the nature of the cosmic situation; and its occurrence alters this situation in its decisive respect, that of “ignorance,” and is thus itself already a part of salvation. Its bearer is a messenger from the world of light who penetrates the barriers of the spheres, outwits the Archons, awakens the spirit from its earthly slumber, and imparts to it the saving knowledge “from without.”

The mission of this transcendent savior begins even before the creation of the world (since the fall of the divine element preceded the creation) and runs parallel to its history. The knowl-edge thus revealed, even though called simply “the knowledge of God,” comprises the whole content of the gnostic myth, with everything it has to teach about God, man, and world; that is, it contains the elements of a theoretical system.

On the practical side, however, it is more particularly “knowledge of the way,” namely, of the soul’s way out of the world, comprising the sacramental and magical preparations for its future ascent and the secret names and formulas that force the passage through each sphere. Equipped with this gnosis, the soul after death travels upwards, leaving behind at each sphere the psychical “vestment” contributed by it: thus the spirit stripped of all foreign accretions reaches the God beyond the world and becomes reunited with the divine substance.

On the scale of the total divine drama, this process is part of the restoration of the deity’s own wholeness, which in pre-cosmic times has become impaired by the loss of portions of the divine substance. It is through these alone that the deity became involved in the destiny of the world, and it is to retrieve them that its messenger intervenes in cosmic history. With the completion of this process of gathering in (according to some systems), the cosmos, deprived of its elements of light, will come to an end.

“Man must finish the work which Nature has left incomplete,” said the Alchemists

The pearl of great price is the individuated consciousness of our divine self; but to realize our divine self we have to become our divine self with relentless conscious effort, which is what makes it so difficult to realize. “Man must finish the work which Nature has left incomplete,” said the Alchemists; which means that we have to live our life in such a way as to blend (the “sacred marriage” of Alchemy) the consciousness of our outer self with the consciousness of our inner self and create a consciousness of one harmonious self.

Many people are already engaged in this work as we work to heal the wounds in our lives and in our society. The alchemists found that the Philosopher’s Stone, the divine essence within each person, was born of the chaos of the prima materia. This prima materia had to be distilled, and burnt to ashes, and separated and worked, until it yielded up two essences, which were symbolic of the King and the Queen, Sol and Luna, the Masculine and the Feminine, Yang and Yin. It was only after the separation and discrimination of the elements that a new union was possible. This was achieved in the hieros gamos, or sacred marriage, which produced the Philosopher’s Stone, or in Jung’s terminology, the Self.

We understand the Macrocosm to be the entire warp and woof of creation, known and unknown, visible and invisible. We understand the microcosm to be man himself—the epitome of the creation confined within a framework of individuality. Each microcosmic world is a cell in the Macrocosm, a crystal fragment of the Greater Crystal, reflecting a portion of His glory.

The key to infinity is won through the mastery of the lesser self (the microcosm) by the power of the Greater Self (the Macrocosm). Through man’s correct use of the sacred gifts of Life, including free will, his consciousness in the microcosm can identify with the fullness of God’s consciousness in the Macrocosm. But first, it is essential that he learn how to make the contact, how to establish and maintain his relationship with the Superconscious Ego. The figure-eight pattern is used to illustrate the principle of exchange between the Macrocosmic world Above and the microcosmic world below.

At the nexus, the point where the lines in the figure eight cross, the virtues of the Greater Reality of oneself, of the Superconscious Ego, flow downward into the microcosm, and the aspirations of the lesser reality of oneself, of the ego, flow upward into the Macrocosm.

This exchange is accomplished through the consciousness of the Christ, the Super Ego, who, positioned in the center of the cross, is the agent of the alchemical transformation that takes place between the energies of God and man.

The path of liberation is rooted in the genuine attitude of renunciation, while the four mind-changings are the method that engenders this attitude. The path of the Great Vehicle is rooted in the precious mind of awakening, while the four immeasurables are the method that engenders this mindset.

The power of obstruction and discovery of new potential are related to the journey from known to unknown. The known is on obstruction which should be crossed over to reach realm of unknown. This energy is also regarded as illusion to be transient position Every illusion has underlying light of consciousness darkness of ignorance prevent from seeing basic reality.

“Be still and know that I am God”. This Divine force which enables you to tap the power of stillness also divest you from all confusing transitory identification. This stillness destroys negativity. It has a power to stop the functionary of the mind. Infact, destroys false mind construction and the stillness of speech thought and prana is one of the way of transcending known. It is the power of attraction to centre of stillness. It confers mystery all inner energies to go beyond influence is to become unidentified. This is a process of observation whether we are disturbed or at peace. Mind remains as an observer. We are no longer hypnotised by externals but there is an inner spell of hypnotic influence towards core of our being.

It is a power of metamorphosis of sorrow into hidden joy. Of death into the life of failure into success, and of speech into silence. Creation dissolve back into a created absolute. The third eye and heart Chakara are primary centres of this power. The radiance of knowledge, a bright clinching energy sweeps away negative speech patterns. Stillness is the meditation posture arrest the movement of prana and one gets ability to stop the energy at will and attention and will is focused at the self from the externals. Self-awareness remains steady. One becomes rooted and still in the heart.

Meditations activate your higher Chakras and expand your light quotient. A person’s vibration or frequency level is indicative of their inner light capacity. The lower your vibration or frequency the less light capacity you can hold in your system. The higher vibration levels allow you to expand your inner circuitry to receive the higher capacity electrons, which expand your inner light quotient.

This creates awareness of you as a Spiritual being and expands your limited beliefs, releasing your stuck pain, suppressed emotions and stress, empowering your thought process, overcoming fearful issues like worry, and anxiety. By expanding your heart this new energy fills you with greater flow of Love and compassion to gain more confidence, self control, focus and direction which opens up your Spiritual body: Aura, the Chakras, and higher energy channels. You then can develop clarity of vision for your Life path with greater creativity using the creative GOD force, giving you a more open and direct relationship to your higher GOD source.

Through our inner awakening we receive the answers and begin to teach, and help others directly opens up the processes that raises consciousness to higher levels which allows higher dimensional frequencies to assemble into their DNA.

This journey to self-awareness and the Soul awakening requires that your intentions are in line with what your life’s purpose is. You must expand you existing Spiritual beliefs with a deeper hunger to perseverance to know the Universal Truth. You must open your mind to receive teachings and healings from the heart without interference from the Ego-Mind.

As you become more aware you leant to let go of your negative ego your wealth, status, job title, these are all illusions. It’s NOT YOU. You open up and are able to bring more Love in your system. This sometimes creates humility which provides a higher perspective to life. This is understanding your Self as a being of energy existing with multiple subtle body layers, and that you create with your thought forms and feelings.

Positive thought forms create positive energies and negative thought forms create blockages in your system. Clearing all blockages from all your subtle bodies opens you up to the higher frequency energies. The higher frequency energies speed up your development. Expanding your pillar of Light.

Once you open up your sacred Spiritual heart you allow yourself to open up to the pure love GOD consciousness energy and develop your direct connection to the GOD source. As you expand your awareness you activate your higher DNA strands.

Develop your life to this 5th Dimensional Plane is the beginning process of creating Heaven on Earth. The ultimate goal of awakening your Soul is to open up to the higher dimension realities and to truly know your true self. This phenomenon of Self-transformation is a process that has been available to every living Soul on this planet through our advanced Spiritual masters, to aid us in expanding our consciousness.

As you begin to receive a deeper understanding of your Whole Self, the energies within and its relation to vibrations, frequency, and density and varies dimension you begin to align with your higher self, the part of you that is your Soul.

We Are Living in an Artificial System That Doesn’t Suit Our Consciousnesses.

You are currently living in a system on earth that does not suit your true nature – which is love. You are in a low vibrational situation in the fourth dimension, which has been hijacked by malevolent beings who control your people into thinking of themselves as far, far less than who you truly are.

A bird in a guilded cage is still a prisoner,and whether your lives on earth are to your liking or not, you are still living as far less than your birthright allows for. You are trapped.

What is an ego?

It’s the unawareness of the true nature as Spirit.

What Is Human Metamorphosis?

Metamorphosis is a biological process. bv which an animal physically develops into a new form or structure. after its birth through cell growth and differentiation. It is not widely known that human metamorphosis is possible, because it is only beginning to happen to some people today.

Human metamorphosis is a biological process that reorganizes the structure of the brain and nervous system, subsequently causing a new cell growth in the body to reflect the new organization of the brain. The process is triggered by certain DNA switches activating owing to increased vibration in the body. This increased vibration is synonymous with a high level of self-realization.

A new brain and nervous system is built in the existing body, breaking down the old structure and using this released energy as fuel to make the new body based on the new genetic instructions activated when the process triggered. After this completes the person is a new more advanced being than before.

Once the consciousness level is high enough in the form, it has enough energy to flip the latent DNA switches on to trigger the old form to morph into the new form. All instructions for this new form have always been present in our DNA; they are only not activated. It is known that the DNA of most species has the same genetic instructions, what differentiates species is which parts of the DNA are activated. All life on Earth is growing toward expression as a human being. When the trigger point is reached in a human being, the old brain reorganizes. This reorganization releases energy, which is used to metamorphosis into a new species, with a new brain organization in the same body.

Metamorphosis Happens When We Are Quiet

The process of metamorphosis accelerates when we do not use our energy to animate the personality. When we are not using our mind, we can use our energy to reorganize our mind. The mind cannot be changed if we are busy using it. When we are quiet and non-reactive, our higher-self is present and can reorganize our brain.

This transformation happens to a lesser degree in the night while we sleep. When we fall asleep, our higher-self goes to work to change the organization of the brain in the same way. It is not coincidental that dreams occur in various sleep states. Dreams are a symptom of brain reorganization. When we willing quiet our mind, transformation happens and our energetic vibration increases. Increased energetic vibration is evidence of brain reorganization and of self-realization.

It is like slowly creating a new organization in our brain and later when new cells are replaced in the body, the body and mind reflect this new and more efficient organization. It is almost like making a change to the epigenome.

⦁ Reality is the metamorohosis of God in humanity.
⦁ Earth is where the divine metamorphosis takes place.
⦁ The accomplishment of the divine metamorphosis implies the evolution of humanity.

Rising Awareness Is A Biological Process

Imagine a consciousness not limited by the conditions of sense perception. Such a consciousness can rise above the plane on which we move; it can see far beyond the bounds of the circle illumined by our ordinary consciousness; it can see that not only does the line along which we move exist, but also all the other lines perpendicular to it which we cross. Rising above the plane, this consciousness will be able to see the plane, make sure that it actually is a plane and not only a line; then it will be able to see the past and the future living side by side and existing simultaneously.

Our conscious awareness is privy only to a limited and partial scope of the overall information dynamics available and operative in different dimensions of psyche, soma as well as nonhuman and even “non-live” activities. Transducive metamorphosis occurs throughout our bodies and minds, catalyzing a constant interchange and communication with the earth and cosmos of which we are integral parts.

As we acquire knowledge of this mysterious intermediate realm, we are empowered in the ways of healing and bringing new life to an old world. “

The masters of alchemy consider the mineral Adam to be the reflection of the Universe and of Man in the mirror of nature. Having mastered knowledge of the conditions governing the transformation of the Metallic Microcosm, man is able to discover and to understand analogically the rules of his proper metamorphoses. Purifying and making more perfect the Subject of Wisdom, capturing and absorbing energy which comes from other worlds, com-pressed by this mysterious Magnet (Aimant), human being has the way of sowing the Light in the depth of his body and of his consciousness.

Again, the notion of purification brings together human beings and the various realms of their activity. And again the basic reality of the metallic (under)world points towards the original unity and the universal telos of gold. As a famous mythic alchemist puts it: “All metallic seed is the seed of gold: for gold is the intention of Nature with regard to all metals. If the base metals are not gold, it is only through some accidental hindrance: they are all potentially gold.

The possibility ol metamorphosis or transmutation, of crossing the boundaries of everyday reality, is what marks the alchemical or magical view the truly poetic — view of the world.

“You will find as your metamorphosis proceeds that your energy level will increase dramatically. New circuits or spiritual gifts are presently being installed or developed around your chakras that will allow for the safe handling of higher voltages of energy. When a soul is being aligned with the Higher Self new telecommunications circuits are also installed/developed in the brain. The telecommunications circuits allow for increased sensitivity to telepathic messages.”

Once you have completed your metamorphosis you will be able to comprehend many of the spiritual texts that talk about transformation. The study of alchemy, for example, reveals the secrets of spiritual metamorphosis. The true alchemists, such as Paracelsus (1493-1541), discovered that it was possible to transform the body and soul through special spiritual practices. Carl Jung (1875-1961) wrote about the transformation of the self in his book entitled Psychology and Alchemy. He understood that true alchemy is the process whereby the human ego is transformed by the energies of the spirit. He perceived this transformation as a series of psychological transitions that allowed the individual to become cognizant of the true self.

As a symbol, a butterfly represents the state of conscience of change, the powerful alchemy of metamorphosis. During the course of our evolution, we go through a great number of cycles comparable to those of a butterfly. Through the multiple situations and events life exposes us to, as much on the inside as on the outside, we can experience the stage of the fragile, vulnerable, clumsy, greedy caterpillar, still far, far from the ethereal beauty of the final product. Then, during our initiatic trials and ordeals, we find ourselves in the chrysalis stage, where great transformations take place on the subtle levels of our being. And finally, once our metamorphosis has been completed, we reveal ourselves in our true splendor, just like the butterfly.

At the heart of alchemy is the Hermeticist understanding of all matter as alive and in dynamic relation. Alchemy seeks to harness the principle of transformation at the centre of life towards the perfecting of all things. The two strands are not mutually exclusive; turning lead into gold, or creating the philosopher’s stone (which bestows eternal life), may also be seen as metaphors for spiritual, as well as physical, transformation. Many alchemists believed that personal transformation and spiritual purity were required before the physical processes would be successful.

Employing hermetic texts composed of symbols whose meaning was hidden to laymen, true alchemists were interested in the metamorphosis of the soul. The quest of the alchemist was to study matter in order to understand his own being, thereby transcending it. The practice of alchemy constituted an inner journey, a path to supreme wisdom. Only humility and righteousness practiced over time enabled the student to walk this path, discover the philosopher’s stone, and achieve metamorphosis.

The mental transmutation, the true alchemy, is achieved by altering step by step the crude metal (low wavelength) in gold (high wavelength). The rude of the Being achieved metamorphosis in Cosmic Gold by vibration, which enhances you step to step, waggle to wiggle up to the top of the Pyramid of the Ascension, towards planes of consciousness higher.The mental transmutation is the art of changing the conditions of the Universe, because the sky is mental, as is the harder rock and the steam of the clouds. Everything can be transform mentally, does not depend on the greater or lesser density of what you want to transfigure, but also to greater or lesser subtlety, skill and wisdom of the alchemist.

When the path transforms itself: the world of appearances stops being a veil of separation and becomes a veil of revelation. People know there is more to this life than meets the eye. They refuse to go along with the program and are singled out as potential roadblocks for the archon agenda. What do the Archons want? To maintain the world of control. To keep us preoccupied with fear, separation. When we awaken to the illusion of the mind-prison world, then we are no longer at its mercy. It will no longer control us, we will have control over it. When we realise that this world is an illusion, we transcend its limitations and become co-creators of it.

What do the Archons want? To maintain the world of control. To keep us preoccupied with fear, separation. Fear creates separation from the Divine and sepration from the Divine power within feeding fear, and this controls the low vibrational and perception, and perception is the ego on Earth. The ego has become the god of this world because of fear, domintaion and separation, and this creates a veil of ignorance the archons controls and feeding.

People know there is more to this life than meets the eye. They refuse to go along with the program and are singled out as potential roadblocks for the archon agenda. The method used for dealing with these “mavericks” is through the hive mind. They usually are attacked and discouraged by those around them who are largely unconscious and have become archon tools.

There are many levels to this control but they all work towards the same end – preventing us from alignment with the universe. This is why archons prefer hierarchical structures, because they make it easier for the few to control the many. Of course the talking points come from the highest levels of the religious, government and media hierarchy which are then filtered down into the masses. At that point we pretty much take over and control one another. This is the hive mind in action.

By raising our vibration, any anger or hive mind attacks that surround us will necessarily disappear since, again, a low vibrational energy cannot co-exist with high vibrational energy. This is such an important concept it is worth repeating a hundred times until we grasp it.

Fear is also a huge factor in the suppression of our vibrational state. Governments use fear as a tactic to keep people in line. Archons rule by dividing, and this they always did. Archons using mind control and humankind has becoming the food for the archons. They also make people obedient which benefits the archons who want no rebels.

As long as we allow the archon-controlled governments and religions to suppress our vibration using fear tactics, we will have great difficulty progressing as a people. Fear is a sure fire way to shut down our vortex of creation and turn us into impotent spirits that can be easily manipulated in mass. As long as our vibration is kept low we will be docile pawns in the hands of the new world order desired by the archons.

Of course the answer to fear is to raise our vibration by not being afraid of anything, what good will that do anyway? Once we align with our vortex of creation and see our power as infinite consciousness, all fear (and the archons promoting it) will dissipate and the world will change.

Human beings are its prisoners. The predator is our lord and master. It has rendered us docile and helpless. If we want to protest, it suppresses our protest. If we want to act independently, it demands that we don’t do so:’ The archons infect our imagination and use the power of make-believe illusions for deception and confusion. Their pleasure is in deceit for its own sake, seemingly without a particular aim or purpose. They are robotic in nature and incapable of independent thought or choice. They do as they are told. And until now, we’ve been doing what we’ve been told. The only way to overcome their power over us is to become activated in spirit, body and mind.

We are controlled by the archons because they control the false reality we are living in. However, the archons are effectively powerless, and their power over us exists only to the extent that they can deceive us into thinking that the false reality is actually real. This dream world is “real” as long as it lasts. We need to awaken from this sleep of death.

When we awaken to the illusion of the prison world, then we are no longer at its mercy. It will no longer control us, we will have control over it. When we realise that this world is an illusion, we transcend its limitations and become co-creators of it.

The essence of the universe is information. it is not three-dimensional, it is outside space and time altogether. Our world is a mere phantasm, a fallen world, in which space and time are part of the delusion. we have been thrown into this world, and enslaved by an evil entity that projects information which we have been deluded into interpreting as our so-called reality. This world is nothing more than the misinterpretation of an underlying reality of which the essence is simply information.

Ego consciousness is so fragile, and is designed for this world of shadows, for this dimension of duality. It cannot contain a dimension of light upon light, love upon love, a oneness in which there is no semblance of duality.

Meditation is an important technique to enable us to transcend the ego and the mind. Stilling the mind, we begin to have access to a different dimension. Initially we feel the invisible presence and effect of the beyond. But as our meditation deepens we can develop a of what is beyond the ego. Then we come to know the illusory nature of the ego.

As we progress along the path we develop a psychological strength and quality of consciousness that can contain these very different realities: our everyday ego-self and a deeper dimension that is featureless and formless, unlimited and undefined. We are freed from the prison of our ego-self and yet still able to function in an outer reality that requires that we think we exist as a separate person.

The world that had hidden the face of our Beloved begins to reveal Him to us. No longer caught in the limited vision of the ego, the lover begins to see with the single eye of the heart. When our consciousness is ruled by the ego, we see through the eyes of the ego. We experience a world in which we are present and He is absent. The world seems a playground of illusions, or a desert filled only with our longing for Him. But when the ego surrenders its power, then the eye of the heart opens and reveals the hidden face of creation. The eye of the heart is an organ of spiritual consciousness that belongs to the Self. Through this eye we see things as they really are, as a reflection of our Beloved. We cannot know Him in His essential non-being, but we come to know Him reflected in His creation.

When the ego has been merged into the Self it ceases to be the dominant factor. A quality of being emerges from within the heart to become the focal point of life. This quality of being does not belong to the ego but to the Self. It is a reflection of His being: “God is, and nothing is with Him.” Initially experienced in meditation or at the moment of emerging from meditation, the consciousness of being gradually becomes present in everyday life. This consciousness is the consciousness of divine presence, the consciousness of oneness which we carry with us in our daily life.

Something real is present in a world full of illusions. At the beginning these veils of illusion prevent us from seeing our Beloved. Knowing this outer world is not real, we seek what our restless heart longs for. We are drawn by this primal need, to look within, to go deeper and deeper, to return to the “root of the root of our own self.” But once we have touched the hem of His garment, the ancient secret of lovers, then the path transforms itself: the world of appearances stops being a veil of separation and becomes a veil of revelation.

The Spirit of revelation removes the veil. Christ has opening the veil of separation which kept men out and has opened a new and living way by which all are invited to approach. “The Ego is a veil between humans and God’.”

What had appeared an impenetrable wall of unreality begins to be permeated with His divine light. This transition is not a single moment of revelation. Like many processes it reflects the spiral nature of the path in which we repeat a similar experience at different levels of intensity, as we awaken more and more fully to the higher consciousness of the Self.

At first imperceptibly, a quality of “being” is born with-in us through which we sense a reality hidden within this world. There may be powerful experiences that accompany this awakening, moments of illumination or oneness, but often it is a gradual transition which only later do we realize has taken place.

As our consciousness begins to change, as an inner perception opens, the inner reality of oneness begins to manifest through the outer world. This opening is different for each of us. Each wayfarer makes his own journey behind the veils and then realizes with-in himself and within the world the qualities of his Belowed.

As our divine qualities come closer to conscious-ness we begin to experience life not just through the limited vision of the ego, but through the circle of the Self in which our divine nature is born. As our divine child opens its eyes the true nature of life is seen.

The mystical journey is from separation back to union, and then returning from union to a state of servanthood. The first part of this journey is “the journey back to God” in which we turn our attention away from the veils of separation, seeking the truth that can only be found within the heart.

“The Ego is a veil between humans and God’.”

The aim of yoga Sadhana is to eliminate ignorance, so the Yogi must remove the veil of ignorance by pierce the veil of ignorance.

After the removal of the veil of ego, the removal of the veil of Nature and her inferior modes that govern our mind, life and body. As soon as the limits of the ego begin to fade, we see how that veil is constituted and detect the action of cosmic Nature in us, and in or behind cosmic Nature

This realization does not, therefore, entail the transformation of the human into the Divine since the human has in essence been the Divine all along and does not change: divinity lies hidden in man by the veil of ignorance which, when drawn, enables man to realize his identity with and as the Divine

That men do not realize their divinity is only due to the fact that they have not yet removed the great veil of ignorance which shrouds the vision of the Infinite.

As long as the ego-consciousness is dominating in an individual, the connection to his consciousness is impassable. Ego-cons takes over the true consciousness, and pretends itself to be the True Self or consciousness. In reality, it is an ego-consciousness or ego self.

The, ego, is threatened by any form of change in the illusionary context. Higher consciousness is a movement toward the true meaning and purpose of life that is governed by the natural energy of Creation. Ever since the ego separated from the truth of existence it has served as a unified unconscious entity that cannot see beyond anything that is not real within itself. The ego must remain in control of the physical realm of existence because that is all that it knows. The ego is threatened by confrontation of consciousness.

The ego has become the “God” of the collective awareness among energy systems within the mass of collective energy. The dividing factor of separation from spiritual energy and God’s energy was when the ego entered and took over the unconsciousness of the energy system. As long as the ego remains in control of the energy system, the truth of knowing God is inhibited. Spiritual energy and God’s energy must converge to allow total connection to the higher levels of consciousness. The ego suppresses spirituality and God’s energy, thereby, disconnecting the energy system from believing in anything greater than itself.

The ego therefore disconnects higher divine concepts and promotes its own concepts of duality and concepts that stimuates low vibrational frequencies. Therefore the ego will prevent any real spiritual progress. Then the ego has become God of this world we vibrate through our general low vibrational concepts of this world.

The perception and control of changes in states of consciousness, we can change our vibration into any quality by the quality of thought, our body expresses the quality of a vibration, the higher quality of thought produces the higher vibration, when we vibrate, we vibrate through our general concept, therefore the result cannot be greater than our concept. By reaching up for the greater consciousness we gradually come to realize it. The concept, that on the background of one Great Consciousness we live, move, and have our being, is one of the grandest concepts in this world. When our Ideal inspires our action we act as divine beings.

Earth is a vibrational mind prison and humans is kept within a full-scale vibratory imprisonment or enslavement of this world

The archons has pushed human race into a “an ever-depening spiritual sleep.” David Icke has written in The Veil of Tears that certain frequencies can be used to block receipt of radio information, and that certain frequencies can be used to block receipt of radio information.

Through technologies they can create a “vibratory prison.” He asserts that all we need to do is extend this concept to the planet as a whole to get an idea of how spiritual information is being perceptually blocked from the 4th dimension, creating a material prison. He writes:

The complete takeover of the Earth by extraterrestrial expressions of the Luciferic Consciousness was accomplished by creating a vibratory prison. We are multidimensional beings, naturally able to experience many frequencies and dimensions at the same time. However, when the imprisoning vibration an imposed blocking ‘frequency net’- was thrown around this planet long ago, it prevented us from accessing the higher levels of our consciousness and potenpotential – or, the higher dimensions. It caused us to cease to be ‘whole’ or tial we became disconnected from ‘the Father.’

According to Icke, the full-scale vibratory imprisonment of Earth humans may also have been effectuated by closing down crucial Earth vortexes linking the physical (3-D) world with other space/time dimensions. Some of these important windows, however, are still open, and, as well, certain rituals are said to be able to re-open them. Icke speculates that these interdimensional portals may have been closed to prevent negative entities from entering this space/time reality. Thus, this may have been a necessity to minimize chaos and disorder. However, it left Earth humans detached from higher levels of being and cut off our “eternal memory” of who we are. This is essentially the story of the “Fall of Man.”

He writes, “we forgot who we were and where we came from.” Icke explains:

The human race has for ages been living out its existence inside a kind of meta-physical box with the lid held down. We sit in the dark, believing that our potential, and Creation in general, is limited to what is within that box, within that vibratory prison. Over the ages since the vibratory net was cast around the Earth, we have been a people working at a fraction of our full and infinite potential. Life on Earth was changed dramatically by our extraterrestrial jailors, and this also affected the animal kingdom.

Luciferic consciousness works through human consciousness to manipulate human nature and our understanding of reality. It stimulates us to perform inhumane acts by awakening negative emotions.

The finitude of the individual is not due to its bodily existence, but to the presence of the ego. So long as the ego remains, fiditude, in the sense of limitations of personality, remains. Liberation is liberation from the ego and its limitations. The individual is liberated by transcending the ego.

Thus, liberation is not primarily a permanent relief from all types of suffering, not even the realization of an abstract undifferentiated con-sciousness, but rather the transcendence beyond the ego and its restrictions. By cutting the knot of the ego, consciousness ceases to be personal; it is spread out infinitely, and becomes identical with the universe. The universe is then seen to be identical with the transcendental consciousness, arising from it and again with-drawing into it.

So long as consciousness is egocentric, all thoughts, feelings, and actions are directed towards furthering the interests of the ego. But when consciousness is universe-centric, thoughts and actions no longer serve the interests of a single individual; they become disinterested. As there can be no sense of want in that state, there is no longer any feeling of pleasure or pain; there is only a sense of fullness, unvarying and undying. There is nothing outside this transcendental consciousness, there is nothing to be attained; all actions and thoughts are unmotivated, completely free, not even restricted or governed by the laws of logic. Therefore, there is no reason why thoughts and actions are there; they are there, simply because the free transcendental consciousness freely wills them.

The underlying root of all delusions is the fundamental ignorance mis-apprehending the nature of reality. This ignorance is a state of misconception. Since it misapprehends the nature of reality, it has no valid grounding in our experience or in reality. In fact, it apprehends reality in a manner contradictory to the way things actually are. Hence, it is an erroneous and distorted state of mind. As this is so, it opens up for us the real possibility of eradicating it.

The ordinary man is ruled by this ignorance. But in the state of uplifted divine consciousness, ignorance is dethroned and wisdom rules in its stead.

The merging of the ego and consciousness is known from the beginning of human consciousness and played a significant role in the evolution of human consciousness. That means to recognize and organize the experiences based on ego to transform into ego-consciousness. Ego-consciousness is present in the waking state, dreaming, and sleeping states of an individual.

It pretends to be the real self where as in reality it is not. Since ego-consciousness is composed of mind, intellect, and body, it can be recognized based on its distinct form and qualities. It is modified with the mind. It envelops the soul with thoughts, events, and memories and prevents it from shining. The ego-consciousness suffers as it influenced by the objective world. It enters a state of objectivity by identifying itself with various objects. It remains there and gets attached to the materialistic world and does not want to come out even in extreme circumstances. It extends itself into the illusionary world (Maya) through the mind and the senses.

Ego-consciousness is contaminated with desires, instincts, emotions, thoughts, impressions, and memories. It is like a mirror covered with dust.

Some drastic experiences of the ego-consciousness leave latent impressions and accompany the soul to the next birth. As per Vedanta, the ego-cons is subject to the five limitations of space, time, knowledge, power, and happiness. As long as the ego-cons lives in its natural form, there is no escape for the soul from its physical existence. The bodily consciousness is held as prisoner and is influenced by the mind with all kinds of mental formations and objective knowledge.

The ego then becomes the god of this world, and the ego becomes mass consciousness, and mass consciousness becomes organized gang stalking. The savage of the ego was to become the saint of the soul.

While the mental level is dominated by ego, the integral level is ego-free, which means our identities are not committed to serve that initial ego set by others in society. It is an ego, which fuels excessive pride. Understanding the self and the nature of our ego will be necessary to become ego-free. The self can choose to serve the self, others, or God.

To be ego-free is a choice to move beyond the self-referencing frame of science and that of most individuals. At this integral level, the self is able to reach out to that source, which precedes all the levels of consciousness.

This leads to the rise of God- knowledge in the self, which marks the freedom from ego-consciousness. The removal of ego-consciousness does not mean the removal of the self itself.

The source of dichotomy is the condition of man’s consciousness. Mankind was made caretaker and co-creator of the Earth. We have chosen to build our world on beliefs in darkness, separation, and Fear. We have created a reality that falls far short of God’s magnificent vision for us. Because any whole can only rise as high as the vibrational frequency of the sum of its parts, all beings, all things in this reality are held back and prevented from manifesting their true potential on this material plane by the belief constructs contained in mass consciousness.

A few men behind the scenes with power which most citizens don’t know about carefully plan ethnic cleansing, chaos, and disaster for their own purposes. They are behind all the myths, lies, organized belief system, social engineering, conditioning, and brainwashing of society. This also includes organized gang stalking, organized bullying, or organized collective gaslighting.

Many believe in these belief systems and many are lies of concepts that you were trained, conditioned, and brainwashed into believing. Society is ruled by their televisions, which are designed to train citizens to conform to a pre-planned group consensus and reject what is really true.

The media diverts the public’s attention from what’s really going on. All positive groups throughout history have been infiltrated to cause destruction within the groups themselves through conflicts and murders. The only way to win a spiritual war is through education. Everyone vibrates on certain life energy frequencies.

The human condition we live under is the result of us believing lies, causing us to vibrate on a low energy level. The forces of maya controls the three dimensional reality and world, and with it follows illusions, deceptions and distortions of mind and reality.

The common energy level of society will rise when people wake up. Educate yourself, do your own research, look for the truth, be open-minded to new information, and build your own opinion. The ego is a design with its belief system to block new information to enter because new information or new higher frequencies will open the doors to other dimensions.

Organized belief systems was created by the elite to make it hard for people to find the truth. Society is controlled by religious belief systems, which are huge bodies of lies with small bits of truth. People are so occupied with their religions that they don’t know what’s really going on. All religions cause conflicts by causing division through one religious belief system against another. There is only a small amount of truth in each

The Elite mold you along correct lines through the social engineering of your consciousness by using mass programming instituted through the avenues of television,

The world has been indoctrinated to change their way of thinking so that bad becomes good and good becomes bad. The majority doesn’t notice this due to their gradual indoctrination. The powers that be rely on fear, stupidity, and ignorance to accomplish their goals.

The world of maya, or illusion is really a very sophisticated form of indoctrination and mind control.

The effect of habitual television is powerful because the mass mind control operates on the deepest level of human response. The programming is unconscious, which is how media manipulators can make us feel how they want us to feel (if we keep watching TV). The reptile brain allows us to survive as biological beings, but leaves us open to propaganda techniques. Television activates the reptile mind (activity in the lower brain regions), leaving one open to the manipulations of television programmers. The manipulators behind the media tap into your emotions and use them to control you. The news distorts information to move you in certain directions. The mass mind control through network television is usually undetected and takes place in the subconscious.

Television images define the terms of people’s understanding, the boundaries of human awareness. Without an offsetting system of imagery in people’s lives, television images take on a quality of reality that they do not deserve. The political consequences of such a situation, where a population becomes isolated within an artificial information environment, has been a favorite subject of many science-fiction writers over the years. George Onve11’s 1984 describes an information environment so monolithic and aggressive that it became the total source and absolute limit of human knowledge. … The effect of the total control of imagery was to unify mass consciousness within a single-media version of reality. With all information coming disembodied via the telescreen, and with the whole population receiving this monolithic information at the same time, and with no verifiable points of comparison, how was one to know what was true and real and what was not? Television has become the primary world we relate to.

When television elevates illusion to the status of virtual reality and truth, the telegenic becomes virtually real and compellingly true. Tragically, nothing is less telegenic than that which can not be said or seen. God, in any serious sense, makes for lousy television; nature, on the other hand, makes for superb television even if the images are routinely accelerated and selective, just as nature may be slow and collective. (First Nations storytelling traditions would probably escape television)

⦁ The effect of the total control of imagery was to unify mass consciousness within a single-media version of reality.
⦁ The effect of low vibrational frequencies creates a one dimension reality, were all other dimensions and higher levels of consciousness is not accessible
⦁ The effect of computers creates one dimenison by left brain dominace. Computers eliminate all right-side brain activity. The right side is the side that produces creativity, innovation, intuition, imagination, and insight, and these aspects go hand in hand with consciousness, creating, and the essence of your soul.

The more they can keep you coming from the left side of the brain, the more easily you can be controlled and manipulated, and the easier it is to distract you from finding out who you truly are and what you are truly doing here. The leaft brain is also the core that is using fear to stay in control and power, and fear is also the component that opens up the channels for mental negative programming of the mind. The powers that are using computers to dumb down the masses and the next generation. Computers eliminate all right-side brain activity. The right side is the side that produces creativity, innovation, intuition, imagination, and insight, and these aspects go hand in hand with consciousness, creating, and the essence of your soul.

The limbic system controls the emotions, feelings, and moods of the brain. Fear-based television stimulates the reptilian response of “fight or flight,” in turn creating a mental state wherein we may overestimate the threat of fear.

The process of spiritual evolution to become a spiritual master requires us to reverse this by undoing all the mass-consciousness programming. We must get complete control of the subconscious mind and not let it run us; we must totally become the computer programmer of the subconscious mind.

We get caught up in working with our five senses, usually to the extent that they are being modeled around us. Blocking out our MULTI AND META-SENSORY POTENTIALS AND ABILITIES, we are often unable to tune back into our Soul Consciousness and our inner knowledge, thus learning to depend on external forces to show us how to live an Earthly life. Through the cycles of time, a mass consciousness has developed which does not incorporate the knowledge, wisdom, and truth of the Soul. MASS CONSCIOUSNESS is the prevailing human view of life usually based on misbeliefs and disbeliefs that have been handed down from centuries of restricted human programming. To break the cycle of operating under mass consciousness, we must find a way to return to SOUL CONSCIOUSNESS. That’s what living as a human on Earth is really about.

Humanity is under a mass “negative hypnosis”

The world is living in a mass negative hypnosis of separation that does not exist in reality. It only exists in our minds.

The problem is that the negative ego tells us that all we are is the body. In … Awakening from the Spell of Matter In this new millennium humanity as a whole will wake up from the spell of matter.

This is illusion and spiritual teaching contaminated by negative ego programming

Mind can be purified by meditation, but meditation is impossible if the brain is not calm. One has to practice many centering and visualization exercises before one achieves a proper balance in body chemistry. Meditation exercises that start with concentration change the body’s metabolism and increase melatonin. Concentration solves problems that create emotional complications and puts anxiety, anger, and pessimism to a stop. It purifies the nervous system and tames the wandering mind. It creates freedom to rise above the worldly desires generated by the stimuli around us. It makes one centered.

Unfortunately, meditation is becoming more and more difficult in today’s world because of the network of artificial electrical fields that influence our own electromagnetic fields. The hole in the ozone layer, which lets in dangerous amounts of radiation, and even the bombardment of media-generated desires make meditation more difficult. Because of this, it is necessary for us to meditate more than did our ancestors, who lived in a world less polluted by both radiation and technology-driven desires.

All tear in your mind, whether conscious or unconscious, distorts your thinking, feeling, and perceiving, and casts its dark shadow across your entire life. The lifting of this dark shadow permits happiness to return and take its place.

Now is the only time there is. The present is independent of the sequencing which you impose on time; it is not limited by time unless you impose limits upon it. Now is where you meet God, for He is always present. In the present, the Truth reveals Itself as your Mind, and only then can your mind live again as Truth. Whatever you may do, whatever you may believe, has no meaning unless it arises from the Truth of your Mind. All else, whatever it may be, is the continuation of the meaningless patterning of the ego.

As long as the past continues to dominate your mind, the present cannot be revealed to you. In the present you live, move, and have your Being. You learn and transform only in the present. To fully enter and abide in the present, the past must be released, forgotten, even for a little while. The present blossoms in a mind that is empty, receptive, and quiet. Like Truth, it cannot come until the mind makes room for it and meets its conditions.

Orwell stated; “Who controls the past controls the future. Who controls the present controls the past.”

When you are constantly busy in your mind, reliving the past or projecting a future, the present is covered up by the constant flow of thoughts and images, none of which have their origin in the now. Truth enters a quiet mind in which the meaningless activity of constant thought has ceased, and stillness prevails. Truth will never force Its entry but can only respond to sincere invitation. When the continuous busyness of mind and body characterizes your life, Truth is not welcome and will be missing from your experience.

The only thing you need do for Truth to return to your awareness, is be willing to receive It. This is not as simple as it sounds for your mind is split into many parts, and contains conflicting wishes, desires, and even goals. Your mind must be integrated in its entirety, inner conflict resolved, and a condition of, at least, relative peace restored. To attain this integration and stability in which willingness can meaningfully develop, is the goal of spiritual practice.

Spiritual vision takes perception beyond the “seeing” of the body’s eyes, and shows you Truth’s reflection in the dream. The Vision of Christ is still illusion, for all states of perception must be illusory. Yet is It a unified perception, Whose Wholeness is like unto the Unity of direct knowledge that j the Kingdom of God. In the mirror of Christ’s Vision is Truth reflected, and are you brought close enough that It can flow across the little gap between perception and the knowledge of Truth, and restore you to Heaven. When this occurs, is the journey through time brought to a close, as there is no more need for a body or a world. This will happen of itself when you are ready. Until then, you must maintain the commitment to Truth and the spiritual discipline and practice that heal the mind and restore it to Wholeness.

The aim of spiritual practice is to bring you to the place where you go beyond the mind as you know it, and enter the realm of spiritual experience. Even there however, the need for spiritual focus and practice continues until the mind is completely healed, and restored to its natural state of resting in God.

This world prevents anyone to go beyond the mind or concept of the ego, and it prevents the old evolutionary brain to heal from a state of duality into oneness, and therefore also prevents anyone from knowing their inner higher divne self, and thsi creates a loop and past-consciousness that dominates reality and forms it view of it. This world prevents anyone from opening their third of eye intuition.

The definition of intimidation: Intimidation is the art of deterring someone through fear. The ultra ego wants to deter you from new ideas, new visions and new territories. That is why he is alarming you, frightening you and warding you off.

Fear keep humankind trapped and imprisoned within the leaden consciousness, so they can´t tramsform their minds into the higher gold consciousness, This is the meaning of alchemy; transforming lead to gold, or transform the old brain concept of the ego to the divine higher self. This world keeps humankind trapped and imprsioned within a concept and loop of past consciousness.

The ego is the definition of the old brain concept and the ego is the definition of the past-consciousness, and then the ego want´s control the mind, life and world it must control the past-consciousness and prevent it from transforming or dissolving the ego into higher levels of consciousness were the ego will lose some its control.

Orwell stated; “Who controls the past controls the future. Who controls the present controls the past.”

Fear is the lowest energetic vibration we can experience in either reality. Fear is paralyzing. Fear prevents us from moving forward with our dreams, goals and desires. Fear blocks the heart from expanding, loving fully and feeling pure joy. Fear brings discomfort into the cellular structure of our bodies and minds. Fear control lower vibrations, fear prevents dna activation of higher dna strands, fear blocks new information, fear blocks visions, fear blocks learning, fear blocks mental alchemical transformation, fear controls the aging process, Anxiety is poison to consciousness. Anxiety is a combination of many illusions including fear, insecurity, mistrust, and doubt. When all of these illusions take over, inner turmoil disrupts the stream of consciousness, inner turmoil results. The ego feeds off the chaos, promoting a heightened awareness of the false reality belief system. Fear disconnects humankind from the divine source of light through the veil of ignorance, and the ego is this veil and all fears comes from the ego. Through knowledge one can overcome this fear when one understand how they using fear to control the masses thorugh the ego-mass consciousness

The old world paradigms of separation, egotistical power and control through fear. The heavy density of these lowest vibrations has had a stronghold in our world for centuries. Fear vibrates at a low density frequency. Third density understanding keeps humans in a low vibration and cages them into the physical world. The ensuing ‘chaos’ ensures humanity is kept in a space of limitation, suffering, and illusion (veil of ignorance).

Fear is also an enemy of God and also of our divine destination. Fear distracts your focus and hinders spiritual growth. Fear scuttles your spiritual potential and powers.

When fear blocks the ability of visions, it prevents us from seeing reality as it is. and make true learning, or real change. It blocks and creates major restrictions to knowing the real Higher Self and creates an illusions one is living in a comfort zone, and when one start to leaving the comfort zone the ego reacts with negativity, fear, stress, anxiety or panic, and if one continues to progress against these emotions and thoughts, then the mass consciousness will start organized gang stalking actions (spiritual and psychological warfare to prevent one from make any changes and leaving the matrix).

When fear blocks visions, it blocks us from seeing reality as it is, and this blocks new input of information, and when this input of new information is blocked, this then blocks the process of learning, and when the learning process is blocked, then the ability to change is blocked, and when the ability of changed is blocked humankind is imprisoned in the looping matrix of old concepts of duality. Freedom is the ability evolving and freedom is the ability to be able to change. And this controls the 2 dna strands from progressing.

Fear not just blocks the flow of energy, visions, it blocks the pathways and it blocks the source of information. Fear makes the alpha bridge to dissapear, and the alpha bridge carries the codes that the theta divine brain waves need to start healing the old evolutionary brain. When the alpha bridge is re-builded one get access to divine theta information of bliss, and through this new information; humankind can reprogram the whole brain and evolving new spiritual gifts.

When fear blocks visions its blocks the third eye of intuition. The power of intuition dissolves ego and duality. Insights and visions reveals the path to salvation and fear hindering this process and the archons prevent the soul from ascending and obstructing the pathway to higher consciousness, and therefore using all forms of negative, fear mongering, stress inducing, senstizing methods create harm by using harmful covert and overt methods of spiritual and psychological warfare (organized gang stalking).

Energy is information, and information is history. Its like the key and lock together. Ancient text then reveals there is three knots of ignorance and these blocks the natural flow of energy in the human body-system, and then energy is information, and information is the “history” humankind is trapped in and living in the state of ignorance or the slumbring state.

The ultimtate result of visionary insights is when duality becomes oneness and the principle is; the further backward you look, the further you can see forward. In the state of Oneness everything is experienced in present time (past and future becomes now). When humans abilities slowly disconnects from her roots of evolutionary history and evolutionary reference, in combination with lost of ability to self-reflection, and lowered levels of Consciousness it will be more difficult to see further in the plans of future. The logic is easy; to see forward you must have ability to see backwards. When they disconnected 10 of humans spiritial dna strand they disconnected their evolutionary references and their intuition, and therefore lost the abilty to see beyond the veil of ignorance, and this gives them the advantage to control and make humankind manageable and easier to keep them enslaved in the Matrix.

The Ego as Belief

Whatever arises in your mind as thought or feeling comes from one of two sources: the ego or the Holy Spirit. There are no others. The ego speaks to you through a constant stream of thoughts, feelings, and impulses, whose purpose is to dominate the conscious mind, control its attention faculty, and keep it busy reacting to and acting out egoic content. The conscious mind is a kind of receptor, or receptive level of awareness, that receives impulses from the unconscious and acts upon them. Action or behavior follows thought, which is why your thought system is so important.

Virtually all behavior and perception are determined by your thinking. Whenever you act upon thoughts and impulses received from the egoic levels of the unconscious, you are responding mechanically, automatically, uncreatively. This is the nature of the ego: a static core that is the belief in separation, and a set of repetitive, habitual patterns of thought, feeling, and behavior. The ego is unloving, having been made in fear and as a response to fear. All it can ever offer you is the continuation of that moment of fear and separation in which it originated. Love is not a part of its repertoire, although the ego will never allow that to be revealed.

This must be kept hidden along with the malice it bears towards you, for it regards you as guilty, and deserving of punishment and death. This will never change for the ego itself is beyond redemption, being the denial of redemption and the constant attack upon it. There is only one way to respond to the ego sanely: to withdraw your allegiance and identification with it. The ego is not you. although it would have you believe that it is.

The ego does not have your best interest as its purpose. and in fact, just the opposite is true. although this is disguised and kept from your awareness, or you would renounce the ego immediately. The ego is the belief you are separate from your Creator and your Self, and are a bodily identity in a world of form. Thus is it a belief about yourself, about reality; and the ego’s thought system is the crystallization and expression of that belief in many different ways.

The ego is in your mind, a part of your mind, and through the act of forgetting, is experienced as you. This was a profound error of identification, and you have suffered from it ever since. Through your identification with the ego, its seeming reality has been established. Because the ego identifies itself with the body, you have seemingly become a body, and the world of separation is made real to you.

The mind believes in what it makes; and this power of belief gives the world you have made the effects it has on you and the limitations it seems to impose. The world could have no effect on you at all, if you did not assign to it the power to do so. You can withdraw that power at any time, but first you must recognize your responsibility for the world and everything in it. Your mind is cause, and what you sec and experience is its effect.

The ego is not the real divine self, and in same way the ego of mass consciousness is not the real divine self either.

Mass consciousness is the Kingdom of The Ego. When man functions from the external energy of the ego, he does not relate to the consciousnesses within the inner self and the higher self. This man, in effect, does not know who he is. Therefore, man will search for his identity within the external energy forces of life. He is functioning within the external ego world so it is logical for him to create support for that ego self from that external world. External identity consciousness creates an external support system for man and his ego. Maintaining the collective unconsciousness of the mass of collective energy in a negative state of mind will only give more power to the ego making reconnection of the spiritual and God’s energy impossible. This “game” can be reversed by alchemy, meditation and spiritual knowledge.

Humankind has been teached, conditioned and trained to belive the powers is outside him and not within, and this is to give away the inner power to the outer external ego and mass consciousnesss.

This creates concepts of the ego and fear concepts;

⦁ Fear of death
⦁ Fear of exclusion from the group (mass consciousness)
⦁ Fear to not be accepted
⦁ Fear to not be something or somebody
⦁ Fear for not fit in

These fear makes people to confirm to this world of the ego and then everyone make same thing this become mass consciousness and the creation of it was based on fears and it will then continue to live a life based on fear and follow the this negative mass programming of the mind.

How does this control-matrix called “corporate thinking” work? We all desire to be accepted. Every one of us has an inherent need for the approbation and acknowledgment of others. Because the enemy knows this, as soon as he gets control of a group, he brings all who may object to his will under control using the fear of not being accepted. It is called the “fear of exclusion.” This type of fear is an intimidating fear.

Some people live in what is called “people bondage.” People bondage is when people cannot separate their personal lives from other people’s thoughts and opinions about them. Because they cannot separate the two, they are perpetually governed by the opinions of others.

Fear and intimidation controls mass consciousness, and producing a “corporate thought pattern”, that keep people in bondage and separation, and subconsciously this creates a fear of exclusion. This state of fear and intimidation is been affected through the “tribal consciousness” that is part of the lower matrix (ultra ego) and this mind-prison.

For eons, human will has been controlled by the collective will. For example, the will of the tribe has dictated the will of its tribe members, i.e., “my will and tribal will are one.” However, the individualization process requires that we develop a sense of our own will. Only when we can make decisions based on our inner guidance can we liberate ourselves from the dictates of the collective will, external authorities, as well as the manipulative and exploitative political and economic systems.

From an energetic perspective, when our electromagnetic field and psyche are merged with mass consciousness, the tribal mind controls our mind and emotions. We are at the mercy of the directives of our tribe. We thus make ourselves available to be manipulated and exploited by the prevailing social and economic system. In fact, we are not only dependent upon external authorities, we are open targets for their abuse. If we are a slave to external forces, our will is not free. Our individualization process and separation from group consciousness requires that we focus on ourselves and become masters of our own energy.

Fortunately, we can participate in shifting the global paradigm by extricating ourselves from the prevailing matrix and by reclaiming our will. Connecting with the power and truth of universal forces within is the only way to reclaim our authentic will. When we embody the strength of the Divine and our soul, we can be released from the web of mass consciousness. Our tribal affiliation is replaced by our oneness with universal Spirit. The right use of will is then possible. As we become able and willing to listen to and follow our inner guidance, we cease to listen to and follow the directives of social, religious, parental, and other authority figures. Ultimately, we experience that our will and Divine Will are one.

Corporate thinking, people bondage, fear of exclusion, tribal consciousness, mass consciousness creates a advanced system of control mechanism, and these methods can be seen in today´s organized gang stalking. Negativity, stress, fear, anxiety, pain, mind terror is what keeps humankind trapped in the matrix.

The definition of intimidation: Intimidation is the art of deterring someone through fear. The ultra ego wants to deter you from new ideas, new visions and new territories. That is why he is alarming you, frightening you and warding you off.

Revealing their true self causes ridicule, persecution, and never ending insults of projections of being labeled as delusional or heretics against the false reality belief system within the mass of collective energy.

The process of spiritual evolution to become a spiritual master requires us to reverse this by undoing all the mass-consciousness programming.

Negative ego/fear-based/separative consciousness, imbalanced thinking and limited lens seeing from mass consciousness earthly programming, it will contaminate your Spiritual channeling, teaching, healing, psychic work, scientific teachings, and earthly service work.

As we discover each new thought, belief and emotion that you have consciously hidden away, we are going to set some recodes deep within your mind.

You have been programmed to run with the herd and to do as they do, but you can break free from this small mindset.

A Paradigm is a set of thoughts which form the basis of a belief system. When we define who we are and look clearly at our beliefs we either live in love or fear, in poverty or prosperity, in disease or wellness. One’s inner paradigm is his or her belief system that has been placed there from years of programming sometimes before birth. The “Collective Consciousness Paradigm” is a set of beliefs shared by the masses.

Unhook from Aging Right now we are facing a “programming” of mass which causes aging to occur. You can reverse the causes and ideas for aging by unhooking from beliefs about aging. Do yourself a favor and do everything you can to reclaim your divine mastery in all areas. You can empower your cells to pull their from another healthy version of you! In fact, you can work with your divine blueprint and set your ideal age. Keep the wisdom, and unhook from aging!

When masses of people believe something for centuries, it has a huge impact on Mass Mind Consciousness and can easily become part of our programming, without our awareness.

The critical faculty is an “energy barrier” between the conscious and subconscious mind. It has the job of preventing anything from reaching your subconscious unless it agrees with what is ahrarbi programmed. This is another reason why change is so difficult. Besides having an “operating system” that says you’re not supposed to change, you have a non-physical barrier in your mind that’s as hard to penetrate as steel that prevents anything new from getting into your subconscious.

Fortunately, you can break through the barrier and reject what the masses accept, and accept what the masses reject

Man is no more conscious of communication than a fish would be conscious of the waters of the sea. A tidal wave of television programing has covered our land during the past twenty years.

Fear comes from the base of the human ego, whose data emerges as self-created illusions, and is one of the greatest blocks to your flow and progressive movement on your earth dimension. It is that which keeps you from fully realizing and experiencingyour potential power and from going to the top of the tree and to the outer limbs. It is that which imprisons your mind and gives power to others, to governments, and rulers of this world.

The real issue we must come to terms with is that, for millennia, we have been programmed to be powerless and, consequently, dependent upon others for our survival, especially in the areas of spirituality and health. Of course, fees were involved, and this exchange has significantly contributed to our current global crises. Yet there is an easy way out of our self-imposed matrix: we can simply reprogram our lives. By acquiring and acting upon new awareness, we afford ourselves an opportunity to rewrite the programs of cultural limitations. The first step in reprogramming is deprogramming. We do this by examining the program from outside the matrix.

We have felt powerless because we have been TOLD we were powerless! .

We program our lives through our positive or negative thought patterns. Tracking our thoughts makes us aware of our program cycles. If it is difficult to track all the thoughts that enter our mind, we can pay attention to the ones we dwell upon most frequently. These repeated thought patterns determine whether we are in a positive or negative program cycle. Positive program cycles boost our ‘will’ power, while negative program cycles give a fillip to our ‘won’t’ power. The good news is that these program cycles can be reset by giving new instructions to our conscious mind. Our mind is a tool we can use in any which way. We are not its helpless victim but its master because in any given moment we have control over our current thought. We relinquish this power because of our herd mentality. We have been told what to think for so long that we have forgotten how to think. We blindly follow others, do as they do and think as they think. We feel afraid of thinking or behaving differently. We believe whatever our social, political, religious, media and other authority figures say.

The controllers want humans to be enslaved followers and to not find their higher self and become a master of their own energies.

The Global Elite, are simply a group of people who realized what the true nature of our Universe was, eliminated everyone else who knew this information, and used the information to harness the power (chi, ability to do) of the uninformed masses. The global elites know the truth about the Universe. They know that we create and the power of thought. Therefore, mainstream news channels and media are doing the work for the global elites, which promotes fear, ego, negative public opinion, competition, hate, separation, and lower vibration mental states. They don’t want us to know this information, because if we did, we would walk through the prison bars (the low vibrational state of ego and break through the veil of ignorance) and free ourselves from the prison – the matrix. The archon system is designed to keep us enthralled in their system and ignorant of how the universe actually works.

The Global Elite, are simply a group of people who realized what the true nature of our Universe was, eliminated everyone else who knew this information, and used the information to harness the power (chi, ability to do) of the uninformed masses. Their methodology is very mechanical in nature. They use sacred geometry, power points on the Earth, as well as mind control via the media and chemicals. Plus a continuing elimination of those individuals as well as native people and cultures who hold the sacred knowledge of creation.

Their bread and butter is FEAR. When we are fearful, we are weak and a low frequency or vibration. The lower state of the ego is more fixed in the vibration of what we call ‘negativity’. As you are born into a physical body and learn how to control it with your physical brain, you automatically become absorbed into Mass Mind. The three dimensional world and reality is disconnected from the divine source becaus elow vibrations not vibrate fast enought to be in touch wither higher levels of consciousness. The ego waves of fear has come into every center of consciousness. These dark masses of energy bring our vibration down and keep us heavy in the lower frequencies of the physical world and reality.

The mind, the intellect, the lower mind (not the soul or the higher mind or intelligence) thus arises from a basic fear reaction to this state of unknowingness. This basic fear polarizes as desire and crystallizes as the ego, not the pure I of the conscious Self.

Fear keeping separation in place and prevent all forms of spiritual progress. They inducing negativity, stress, fear, woriies, anxiety and panic into the mass consciousness to keep the state od duality in action. Beyond the veil of ignorance is the Higher Self and in the state of Oneness there is no fear, so to prevent humankind from transforming themselves from the ego-identity (of fear) to the state of Oneness (state where there is no fear). Fear feeding eth ego-diality state on Earth. In the three dimensional reality/world “Matter mentality” suppresses “Spirit mentality”, in this state it is Matter over Spirit, but when one has transform from ego to spirit its “Consciousness over Matter”. At this state one can create with Consciousness. This new state can not just create it can also heal, and one will have access to unlimited knowledge about life and existence, and living in present reality of here and now. One will also be able to see into the future. In this new state of mind there is no past or future. just present and one will be able to live in present time of reality. FEAR keeps these spiritual asleep and affects the free will to do want others want you to do and think.

The Elite are presently working very hard at cultivating FEAR among the masses. They do this by staging, or broadcasting, natural or man made disasters, wars and pestilence around the world at regular intervals. FEAR keeps people ASLEEP. Someone who is ASLEEP has no FREE WILL. They are enslaved. FREE WILL is one of the fundamental laws of this universe. The Elite have broken that law by taking away the FREE WILL of billions of living beings in this planet.

Fear and illusion are synonymous. Fear has no reality whatsoever. Fear is that component of the illusion that says you can be destroyed somehow, or you can be harm or you can experience pain which is perceived to be all very real to the ego. The large part of the illusion lies in who you believe you are. In the perceptions of many lifetimes you believe you have a physical body that can be destroyed or can be hurt. You believe that you can be controlled. You believe that you can control others. There are a lot of beliefs that you have. Now, these beliefs say that you are in danger, and so the beliefs d say you are in danger translates to fear. Fear started expressing through emotions. Now fear began to express itself emotionally in many ways as the ego reacted to its perception of its experiences. Fear reacts in the emotion of happiness.

The illusion is the ego’s limited belief of who you are. The illusion is that little tiny pie-shape of your total consciousness, when reality is the totality of who you are. If you knew your reality, you would have no reason for fear, because there would not be anything that would take place that would create the reactions that you are having in this limited state of illusion. “Fear and illusion” versus “Divine Love and Reality”. Fear expresses as an emotion, a part of the ego system, a belief system of this limited part of your knowing of your consciousness. Fear expresses as the ego belief you are separated from your soul’s

Many experts in the field of metaphysics would like for you to believe their way is the only correct way, their insights are grander, and their channels are more real. This is metaphysical dogma. At some point you will be expected to see, feel and think for yourself, for confidence, creating a firm basis of your own understanding, connection to source and disconnection from being a “sheeple” (sheep + people). Creating a solid foundation is beneficial for grounding.

The more automatic, mechanized, monotonous and routine-oriented humans become the more they lose their ability to transform, or change or progress in self-realization. The more they lose this ability the more enslaved they become. Freedom is the ability to be able to change and transform. This world keeps human tuned into one dimensions or one low vibrational state of frequency. Then the ego can´t exist in higher state of consciousness without being dissolved the real freedom and liberation is to find beyond ego-duality-preception.

The more automatic, mechanized, monotonous and routine-oriented and predictable humans life becomes the easier they can be programmed to not change or tuned itheir life nto higher levels of consciousness.

Mental alchemy is the process of transmuting your thoughts to improve your life and expand your mind, while spiritual alchemy is the never-ending process of transmuting a soul personality from a less refined one into a more refined one. As we know, everything is energy—everything vibrates. The difference between one substance and another is based on its rate of vibration. Thoughts, feelings and beliefs also vibrate. As a spiritual being, you also vibrate and exist on many levels.

Alchemy is the process of replacing or transmuting lower, negative vibrational energies with higher, positive ones—at every level of your existence—body, mind and spirit.

Every decision you make is based either on your ego or your higher self. Spiritual alchemy is therefore the process of incorporating more and more of your higher self into your life decisions. When you align with your higher self, your energy and the power of your intent increases. This is a positive, self-reinforcing cycle that leads to mastery and self-realization.

In the three dimensional world and reality humankind is disconnected from the higher state of vibrations because of the actions and dominated ego. Low vibrational enviroment keeps humankind disconnected from Divine knowledge and light because the don´t vibrate fast enough to be in touch with higher realms.

When less part of the brain capacity is needed you are not even exerting your conscious awareness enough to even be aware of what you are even doing at the moment you are doing it. This is in combination by making make everything so predictable as possible reality and life becomes mechanized and robotized. This make it even easier for the controllers to control the mass consciousness and control everybody destiny.

Fear is an energetic threshold that will hold you back until you finally find the courage to break through it. It actually truly creates a metaphysical barrier.

The ego is the lower Self It is the negative and fearful, and lives in constant comparison to others.

The false belief system of illusion is in its’ glory because the more you are frightened the more it validates that the ego exists.

The more you release and transmute these lower vibrational energies from your personal signature, the more you allow your vibration to expand and elevate!

This was to control masses and place fear in place for the mind, body and spirit. This resulted in humans pushing love away. If humans feel fear, then they can be controlled.

From then until now, your Earth has been at a low vibration. … They could not comprehend a world without fear, control and domination.

When you begin to expand your consciousness beyond duality, your energy vibrations rise to a level where those who remain governed by duality beliefs are simply not a part of your world anymore. When you trust the process of letting go of your controls, your fears, belief in good and bad, even your belief in death, you will find your world becoming happier, healthier, and much more abundant. This is the indication that you are crossing the barrier from a 3-D world of duality to higher dimensions.

The reason for the fall into fear rested with the new overlords of the earth. The overlords who had gained control of earth were of a mind to control the humans by instilling fear. They did not want the human beings to remember their God given gifts because the overlords were mostly interested in mining Mother Earth and using the humans to do the work.

You have created a global drama that is rather diverse, uncertain, not very stable, and in a time when things can seem chaotic. This a period when you think you are sailing in one direction and suddenly the course changes on you, the seas may seem stormy, recognize this is the epitome of frightened ego drama worldwide. The false belief system of illusion is in its’ glory because the more you are frightened the more it validates that the ego exists. The ego truly has a great stake in continuing its’ existence and its’ drama believing it is keeping you safe. The ego is never validated by a sense of peace, calm or love. The ego is only validated by fear. Keeping spiritual as the ‘knowing’ of your reality, let us look at how you may choose to live in the physical during these times.

Precarious Times All around the world there are emotions, perceptions, opinions, and fears that show a great fear of helplessness. It is the feeling of helplessness of the masses that is disturbing because it shows the ego is so encased that individuals feel they are powerless. There are individuals who try to express those opinions, whatever they are but are not acknowledged. Humanity has become so driven and so limited by the ego system that they feel they have no power. It has been a globalization of bringing out that feeling. If your judgment, your perception has been a positive of what is taking place, then you are feeling empowered by the experience.

Humans are still asleep to their own divinity. Low vibrations keeps humankind in sleep to their own divinity. Then the ego has become god of this world, it does not want anyone to awaken to higher divine vibrations than the ego itself because the ego want´s control and have power over all other beings.

Ego, mass consciounsess, negative fear programming, the human body bio-computer, FEAR keeps people ASLEEP, predictable lifestyle, transhumanism and technoracy creates mechanized and automatized beings more like predictable machines that can be programmed to do want the global controllers want´s, the more the computers thinking for humans the less brain awareness humans need to use and this is loss of free willpower and creativity, The autopilot state of the mind is what prevents the third eye of intuition from be activated. The ego and intellect is the opposite to intuition, and may even be the enemy within because it prevents anything from be changed and evolved. The ego, intellect and autopilot prevents the third eye of intuition from opening. Low vibrational frequencies controls all this progress of the human mind and humans even welcome this reallity.

Mass consciousness will not work for nothing else than carnal desires of man or the desire consciousness.

The human being is considered to be nothing but a bio-computer made up of organic matter. And computers do not have a free will. They are meant to be manipulated and programmed.

Mass consciousness is a programming mentality program to become like all the others that also is programmed to be like all the others. And if one not follow this programmed progamming one will be excluded or the ego needs the collective cobsciousness to be able to exist. Humans can still decide how this influence us. We cannot change others. We can only change ourselves. One cannot change others or their programming to become like the others to fit in, one can only change the own programming to not become like programmed machine. When others understand how this programming is working through the mass consciousness they will be anle to free themselves from the enslavement-matrix-programming.

By changing ourselves, we also change the world because we are constituent parts of the world. Consciousness is the essential determinant and the instrument of free will. Therefore, in manipulation the `lever’ is first positioned on people’s consciousness.

Making people believe only what you want them to believe by continually telling them it is true and preventing any other information from reaching them. Pressuring someone into adopting radically different beliefs by using systematic and often forcible means. Persuading by means of propaganda or salesmanship.

What is crucial for the globalists in order to keep the pubic unaware is by keeping information from entering the conscious mind, and the corpus callosum is the alpha bridge between left and right brain hemisphere. Negative programming and fears makes the alpha bridge to dissapear.

The power elite continue to bombard the collective unconscious with fearful programming and fear-concepts in order to hold your wandering minds at bay.

When the corpus callosum is shut off it just not block new information, fear blocks ones visions, it blocks new ideas, it blocks new concepts, fear blocks the third eye of intuition, and this blocks and prevents hyper-communication, and blocks new dna strands from be activated. Fear, stress, worry, or hyperactive intellect prevents successful hyper-communication or the information will be totally distorted and useless. In nature, hyper-communication has been successfully applied for millions of years. Fear is the autopilot thinking pattern and the autopilot of the mind is the controlled mind and is the opposite to intuition (third eye).

Escape from this war within the matrix on Earth is through consciousness, not the mind. The great awareness we call consciousness liberates you. Mind traps you in the third-dimensional ego states of being, but consciousness is larger than the ego, and expands to include a multi-dimensional self-awareness.

This new era, has already started with the forced reengineering of our planet and us humans. ChemTrails are not only changing the environment we live in, but are changing us from the inside out. Planetary re-engineering goes beyond controlling the weather. The people behind geo-engineering are after the human race. Transhumanism.

Transhumanist intend to replace all natural laws with their own set of rules which will make it easier to control it all. It is nothing more than an agenda to destroy humanity and human nature. It seeks to devolve and enslave humans in a way that will be irreversible.

If transhumanism can destroy humanity and the human nature, this mean that ‘AI’ may even be more dangerous than nuclear weapons.

By denying you access to particular knowledge, the enemy tries to keep that power for itself, and keep you in a state of ignorance. Yet, what it has ignored is than it is severely ignorant itself, as evident by its erratic approach to power.

As the ego or the egoic mind is the matrix composed by all the thoughts, beliefs, concepts, ideas, biases and assumptions that you picked up along the way, are not yours and that create within you a false sense of self and a false notion of who you are, the “Higher Mind” is, in fact, your real mind, made of your true essence and it contains your most pure sense of self.

Since emotional processes can work faster than the mind, it takes a power stronger than the mind to bend perception, override emotional circuitry, and provide us with intuitive feeling instead. It takes the power of the heart. Meditation removes that obstacle. That, which is, is the nectar of immortality. When one obtains nectar, the fear of death is removed. To separate the vision from the view is to awaken from the delirium of transitory, material pleasure. As the sight moves towards the viewer, the delirium lifts, and when the sight is fully turned upon the viewer, the two become immersed in each other. This is the ultimate stage of internal awakening, upon reaching which it becomes possible to be fully human. This process is the shift from the view of ego perspective to the divine higher self (lens of the soul perspective) and its wholeness.

Removing tear is one of our greatest tasks to overcome that illusion of separation.

The source of most evolved fear is the human being’s disconnection — or perception of a lack of something. The result of this lack down through the ages has been to take control over, take power from, deceive, and repress oneself and others, in a multitude of ways.

We can create the illusion of power over others by the use of fear — and it is fear that actually motivates someone to want to overpower others. We have become unconscious of the fear propaganda that saturates us, and the blind paralysis we have adopted by believing or complying with so much of it. In other words, we have given up and turned over much of our own personal power to someone or something else. We have looked outside of ourselves to validate our goodness and find acceptance, and we have looked outside of ourselves in search of purpose and happiness. We should be looking within to discover our personal truth, our own personal power. We cannot gain by taking from another. We can only become powerful and free by empowering ourselves and then support others in freely doing the same.

We have been teached to believe the powers is outside and not within, and the outer outside is the external ego, and ego is mass consciousness.

Become a seeker of personal truth by choosing to search within, to determine whether that which comes to us from the outside passes the test of our never-failing inner spiritual relationship to our truth with God. Realizing that we have free will to be powerful individual beings who can move away from fear, the greatest illusion, becomes our greatest power, and can bring us into a more wondrous way of being — perhaps a true human “becoming”.

“Since emotional processes can work faster than the mind, it takes a power stronger than the mind to bend perception, override emotional circuitry, and provide us with intuitive feeling instead. It takes the power of the heart.”

Destruction of Fear

Meditation is that act which will remove the broken needle from the finger, and neutralise the poison in the stomach. Meditation not only uncovers the hidden poison, it can also destroy it. When the mind is totally uncovered, one’s life ascends to a level where all wants and deficiencies melt away, and it becomes possible to live in that pure universal consciousness which is beyond all emotion. That which is not real becomes an obstacle in the path of achieving that which is. Meditation removes that obstacle. That, which is, is the nectar of immortality. When one obtains nectar, the fear of death is removed. The destruction of fear is the manifestation of love, and only when love appears can life touch fulfilment, because love rises above all alienations and differences.

The awakening of love causes the heart to bloom like a flower, spreading its sweet fragrance of generosity and magnanimity. The veena (lute) of life begins to play and divine wisdom prevails. It becomes possible to build a flawless, unbroken identity because love can put together the bits and pieces of life, after rendering them fault-free. The personality is unified and mental weakness destroyed. One’s consciousness rises above all types of hypocrisy and pretensions, and life becomes meaningful and healthy. The grip of circumstances is loosened and it becomes easy to mould them favourably.

Meditation Destroys Ignorance

Unbiased viewing of the self is meditation. Through meditation we can know our lack of knowledge. This leads to destruction of ignorance. Thus meditation is a tool devised for the destruction of ignorance. Through the medium of meditation we become aware of our ignorance about the gross body. The material differences of black and white, high and low, vanish.

Perception of our unfamiliarity with the subtle body destroys those beliefs which are based on esteem and contempt, and which keep feeding the idea of “me and mine” while destroying others. The flow of ideas based on “me and mine” is stilled. Ideas vanish into non—ideas. Coming into the non—thinking state one becomes aware of the causal body, which in turn causes the destruction of ego. In the state of sleep man reaches the causal body.

Meditation can free us from such senselessness. To separate the vision from the view is to awaken from the delirium of transitory, material pleasure. As the sight moves towards the viewer, the delirium lifts, and when the sight is fully turned upon the viewer, the two become immersed in each other. This is the ultimate stage of internal awakening, upon reaching which it becomes possible to be fully human. To be established in the Self is real bliss. This is mukti (salvation), the experience of Truth.

Meditation is the means for making life meaningful. Meditation gives life the firm foundation of truth. The same foundation may be used to build a unified human being and an undivided identity. Such a complete human being leads an outwardly active life while remaining inwardly tranquil.

Concentration Vs Meditation

Often, people confuse mental concentration for meditation This is a grave mistake. Mental concentration is not meditation. Meditation means full perceiving the mind. When full perception of the mind is accomplished, the mind’s supremacy over one’s life is destroyed, and the rule of Atma (Self) is established. Then life is managed not by the mind, but by the Self. When the mind cannot indulge its fancies, instead of being unconsciously controlled, ou actions and reactions are conscious and aware. When meditation is successful the manager of life remains ever wakeful and alert, and internal vigilance prevails. Then nothing we do is done coercively. All our actions are perceive and undertaken in the light of divine wisdom. Presently, our vision is engaged with the view. The practice of liberates the vision from the view, while merging it with the viewer. That which remains when the act of merging is completed is Parmatma.

Two primary forces work within the universe—the Knowledge and the Ignorance (Vidya and Avidya). Ignorance works through our subconscious compulsions, dispersing the light of knowledge into the external world, where we lose our true being. This ignorance is based on a belief in an external reality, a bodily identity and a self that is separate from other selves. It is not simply personal but a cosmic force creating mate-riality, density and inertia.

Knowledge is the inner light that reveals the self-sufficient reality of being. We all sense this deeper knowledge in our intrinsic yearning for the eternal, the pure and the real. This higher knowledge is self-knowledge, which is not personal iden-tity, but the perception of the entire universe within our own hearts. It is a cosmic force of awareness, freedom and creativity. We must learn to move from the Ignorance to the Knowledge, which, to use an ancient Vedic prayer, is to cross over from non-being to being, from darkness to light, from death to immortality.

This is the path of discrimination, which takes us beyond illusion to truth. Our false identity or separate self is discarded. Our eternal nature or true Self is revealed, like the sun that shines forth after an eclipse. To find the truth we must negate the falsehood that obscures it, which is the main method of the yogic path of knowledge. However, this is not to leave us in a state of negativity but to remove the veils so that our inner light, which is self-effulgent, perfectly pure and full, will no longer be obscured.

The world is the unlimited under apparent limitation. If we look superficially we see the limited. If we look deeply we perceive the unlimited. The unlimited abides in the state of seeing, our own awakened consciousness, not in any object seen. Thought focuses on the limited and pronounces it to be real. In this way we limit our own reality. Awareness reveals the unlim-ited, not as a theory but as the fact of perception. Which of these two directions in consciousness we choose determines our own reality, and our happiness or sorrow.

The Divine Powers of Spiritual Man and Intuition. By perfectly concentrated Meditation on the heart, the interior being, comes the knowledge of consciousness. By perfectly concentrated Meditation on experience for the sake of the Self, comes a knowledge of the spiritual man. Through mastery of the upward-life comes freedom from the dangers of water, morass, and thorny places, and the power of ascension is gained. This is possible because the spirit world builds into it the organ of intuition, just as the physical body builds for it the sense organs. The senses transmit sensations by means of the soul body, and the spirit transmits to it intuitions through the organ of intuition. According to the Alchemists, the key to understanding our universe is meditation

By perfectly concentrated Meditation on the heart, the interior being, comes the knowledge of consciousness.

The heart here seems to mean, as it so often. does in the Upanishads, the interior, spiritual nature, the consciousness of the spiritual man, which is related to the heart, and to the wisdom of the heart. By steadily seeking after, and finding, the consciousness of the spiritual man, by coming to consciousness as the spiritual man, a perfect knowledge of consciousness will be attained. For the consciousness of the spiritual man has this divine quality: while being and remaining a truly individual consciousness, it at the same time flows over, as it were, and blends with the Divine Consciousness above and about it, the consciousness of the great Companions; and by showing itself to be one with the Divine Consciousness, it reveals the nature of all consciousness, the secret that all consciousness is One and Divine.

By perfectly concentrated Meditation on experience for the sake of the Self, comes a knowledge of the spiritual man.

Spiritual man begins to see, to hear, to touch, to taste. And, besides the senses of the spiritual man, there awakes his mind, that divine counterpart of the mind of the physical man, the power of direct and immediate knowledge, the power of spiritual intuition, of divination. This power, as we have seen, owes its virtue to the unity, the continuity, of consciousness, whereby whatever is known to any consciousness, is knowable by any other consciousness. Thus the consciousness of the spiritual man, who lives above our narrow barriers of separateness, is in intimate touch with the consciousness of the great Companions, and can draw on that vast reservoir for all real needs. Thus arises within the spiritual man that certain knowledge which is called intuition, divination, illumination.

The divine man is destined to supersede the spiritual man, as the spiritual man supersedes the natural man. Then the disciple becomes a Master. The opened powers of tile spiritual man, spiritual vision, hearing, and touch, stand, therefore, in contradistinction to the higher divine power above them, and must in no wise be regarded as the end of the way, for the path has no end, but rises ever to higher and higher glories; the soul’s growth and splendour have no limit. So that, if the spiritual powers we have been considering are regarded as in any sense final, they are a hindrance, a barrier to the far higher powers of the divine man. But viewed from below, from the standpoint of normal physical experience, they are powers truly magical; as the powers natural to a four-dimensional being will appear magical to a three-dimensional being.

Through the weakening of the causes of bondage, and by learning the method of sassing, the consciousness is transferred to the other body.

In due time, after the spiritual man has been formed and grown stable through the forces and virtues already enumerated, and after the senses of the spiritual man have awaked, there comes the transfer of the dominant consciousness, the sense of individuality, from the physical to the spiritual man.

Thereafter the physical man is felt to be a secondary, a subordinate, an instrument through whom the spiritual man works; and the spiritual man is felt to be the real individuality. This is, in a sense, the attainment to full salvation and immortal life; yet it is not the final goal or resting place, but only the beginning of the greater way.

The means for this transfer are described as the weakening of the causes of bondage, and an understanding of the method of passing from the one consciousness to the other. The first may also be described as detach meet, and comes from the conquest of the delusion that the personal self is the real man.

When that delusion abates and is held in check, the finer consciousness of the spiritual man begins to shine in the background of the mind. The transfer of the sense of individuality to this finer consciousness, and thus to the spiritual man, then becomes a matter of recollection, of attention; primarily, a matter of taking a deeper interest in the life and doings of the spiritual man, than in the pleasures or occupations of the personality.

Therefore it is said: ‘Lay not up for yourselves treasures upon earth, where moth and rust cloth corrupt, and where thieves break through and steal: but lay up for yourselves treasures in heaven, where neither moth nor rust cloth corrupt, and where thieves do not break through nor steal: for where your treasure is, there will your heart be also.’

Through mastery of the upward-life comes freedom from the dangers of water, morass, and thorny places, and the power of ascension is gained.

Here is one of the sentences, so characteristic of this author, and, indeed, of the Eastern spirit, in which there is an obvious exterior meaning, and, within this, a clear interior meaning, not quite so obvious, but far more vital.

The surface meaning is, that by mastery of a certain power, called here the upward-life, and akin to levitation, there comes the ability to walk on water, or to pass over thorny places without wounding the feet.

But there is a deeper meaning. When we speak of the disciple’s path as a path of thorns, we use a symbol; and the same symbol is used here. The upward-life means something more than the power, often manifested in abnormal psychical experiences, of levitating the physical body, or near-by physical objects. It means the strong power of aspiration, of upward will, which first builds, and then awakes the spiritual man, and finally transfers the conscious individuality to him; for it is he who passes safely over the waters of death and rebirth, and is not pierced by the thorns in the path. Therefore it is said that he who would tread the path of power must look for a home in the air, and afterwards in the ether.

When that condition of consciousness s reached, which is far-reaching and not confined to the body, which is outside the body and not conditioned by it, then the veil which conceals the light is worn away.

The condition is, briefly, that of the awakened spiritual man, who sees and hears beyond the veil. Mastery of the elements comes from perfectly concentrated Meditation on their five forms: the gross, the elemental, the subtle, the inherent, the purposive.

Thereupon will come the manifestation of the atomic and other powers, which are the endowment of the body, together with its unassailable force.

The body in question is, of course, the etheric body of the spiritual man. He is said to possess eight powers: the atomic, the power of assimilating himself with the nature of the atom, which will, perhaps, involve the power to disintegrate material forms; the power of levitation; the power of limitless extension; the power of boundless reach, so that, as the commentator says, ‘he can touch the moon with the tip of his finger; the power to accomplish his will; the power of gravitation, the correlative of levitation; the power of command; the power of creative will. These are the endowments of the spiritual man. Further, the spiritual body is unassailable. Fire burns it not, water wets it not, the sword cleaves it not, dry winds parch it not. And, it is said, the spiritual man can impart something of this quality and temper to his bodily vesture.

Thereupon will come the manifestation of the atomic and other powers, which are the endowment of the body, together with its unassailable force.

The body in question is, of course, the etheric body of the spiritual man. He is said to possess eight powers: the atomic, the power of assimilating himself with the nature of the atom, which will, perhaps, involve the power to disintegrate material forms; the power of levitation; the power of limitless extension; the power of boundless reach, so that, as the commentator says, ‘he can touch the moon with the tip of his finger; the power to accomplish his will; the power of gravitation, the correlative of levitation; the power of command; the power of creative will. These are the endowments of the spiritual man. Further, the spiritual body is unassailable. Fire burns it not, water wets it not, the sword cleaves it not, dry winds parch it not. And, it is said, the spiritual man can impart something of this quality and temper to his bodily vesture.

We communicate with the material world through the body. We communicate with the spiritual world through the spirit. This communication with the spiritual is not carried on by means of the mind or emotion but through the spirit or its intuitive faculty. It is easy for us to understand the nature of the communion between God and man if we have seen the operation of our intuition. In order to worship and fellowship with God man must possess a nature similar to His. “God is spirit, and those who worship him must worship in spirit and truth” (John 4.24).

There can be no communication between different natures; hence both the unregenerate whose spirit obviously has not been quickened and the regenerate who does not use his spirit to worship are equally unqualified to have genuine fellowship with God. Lofty sentiments and noble feelings do not bring people into spiritual reality nor do they forge personal communion with God.

Our fellowship with Him is experienced in the deepest place of our entire being, deeper than our thought, feeling and will, even in the intuition of our spirit. A close scrutiny of 1 Corinthians 2.9-3.2 can provide a very clear view of how man communes with God and how man knows the realities of God through the spirit’s intuition. “What no eye has seen, nor ear heard, nor the heart of man conceived, what God has prepared for those who love him” (v.9).

The larger context of this one verse speaks of God and the things of God. What He has prepared can neither be seen or heard by man’s outward body nor conceived by his inward heart. The “heart of man” includes among other facets man’s understanding, mind and intellect. Man’s thought cannot envisage God’s work, for the latter transcends the former. It is therefore evident that he who desires to know and commune with God cannot depend solely upon his thought.

The body builds itself up out of the world of physical matter in such a way that this structure is adapted to the requirements of the thinking ego. It is permeated with life force and becomes thereby the etheric or life body. As such it opens itself through the sense organs towards the outer world and becomes the soul body.

The sentient soul permeates this and becomes a unity with it. The sentient soul does not merely receive the impacts of the outer world as sensations. It has its own inner life, fertilized through thinking on the one hand and through sensations on the other. The sentient soul thus becomes the intellectual soul. It is able to do this by opening itself to the intuitions from above as it does to sensations from below. Thus it becomes the consciousness soul.

This is possible because the spirit world builds into it the organ of intuition, just as the physical body builds for it the sense organs. The senses transmit sensations by means of the soul body, and the spirit transmits to it intuitions through the organ of intuition.

The spiritual human being is thereby linked into a unity with the consciousness soul, just as the physical body is linked with the sentient soul in the soul body. Consciousness soul and spirit self form a unity. In this unity the spirit man lives as life spirit in the same way that the ether body forms the bodily life basis for the soul body. Thus, as the physical body is enclosed in the physical skin, so is the spirit man in the spirit sheath.

Intuition begins expand at the 5th level of consciousness and being when man has activated his intuition, awakened his spiritual consciousness and is thus truly able to unite human effort with divine grace.

How to Develop Our Intuition

“The (alien) group” of rulers requires that we don’t develop our natural psychic senses (open the third eye and learn yoga science of liberation), because this would give us the ability to see beyond “the veil of ignorance” that’s been set in place around us for eons and thousends of years. With our natural psychic senses fully developed, we would begin to intuitively become aware of their presence and the lies that have distorted our perceptions of ourselves and our world for so long. Recognizing and developing our psychic abilities would free us from the clutches of any deceptions that they have used against us for most of our history. It has been deeply ingrained into the social fabric to doubt and even ridicule anyone who purports to have psychic powers. The commonly held belief that we don’t have these abilities is by itself the greatest impediment to our being able to develop and use them. The heart center is surrounded by what has been called the “veil of tears,” and it is the last veil to be cleared on the path of enlightenment. We learn then to see beyond the illusion and limitations of ordinary reality.

The Earthly Life Mind is immersed in the maya-hypnotized existence, remains in ignorance, deeming himself to be a physical being. The maya-hypnotized ego creates the distortions of reality or distortions of the powers within. The first distortion-error that man has made is believing that power is outside him, the second distortion-error is made through believing in the dying nature of man, and not the undying nature of the real Self/Soul. The third error-distortion of man´s mind is not limited by his physical body, although he usually thinks it is. But it is the intellect and the ego that bind him there. The human body system and chakra system has “three knots”. These knots are found within the energetic interior of our psychic system. They are problematic because they bind us in a state of ignorance, distort everything we experience, and lock up our wisdom. These mind-errors is the mind-illusions that distorts reality. Another term for illusions is “maya” and the “dream state” of the mind is the maya-hypnotized mind.

This world don´t people to have access to their third eye abilities and they don´t want people to have connection with divine wisdom of the existence. Humankind is been conditioned into a dream state or maya illusiionary hypnotic state of mind control and brainwashing through media and television and low vibrational technology.

Fear is the frequency they using or the psychology of fear. Fear is the component that keeps the subconsciousness mind susceptible for negative fear programming. Fear is been produced by the left brain hemisphere.

The more they can keep you coming from the left side of the brain, the more easily you can be controlled and manipulated, and the easier it is to distract you from finding out who you truly are and what you are truly doing here. The leaft brain is also the core that is using fear to stay in control and power, and fear is also the component that opens up the channels for mental negative programming of the mind. The powers that are using computers to dumb down the masses and the next generation. Computers eliminate all right-side brain activity. The right side is the side that produces creativity, innovation, intuition, imagination, and insight, and these aspects go hand in hand with consciousness, creating, and the essence of your soul.

There is a veil of ignorance in place to disconnect humankind from their divine higher self. Fear disconnects the right side brain activity and computers eliminate all right-side brain activity. Fear is also the component that prevent the spiritual heart from opening and fear is the component that also prevent the third eye of inuition from opening.

The ego has become the god of this world and the ego is the veil of ignorance, and ego is mass consciousness. The ego is author of fear.

The Spirit has placed divine intuition within everyone. This divine intuition is the gateway through which the inspiration of the Almighty enters the mind. This is why the Psalms tell us to “lift up our gates.” That is, lift up the intuition and permit the divine light to enter.

When it comes to alignment, meditation is the key that opens the door to the universe. Mystic seeks, through meditation, to empty his mind so that higher knowledge can be revealed to him.

According to the Alchemists, the key to understanding our universe is meditation, and to be able to understand universe one need to activate the sixth sense and intuition. If a meditation brings you inspiration or moves you into action, follow your intuition. Meditation creates access to intuition. Intuition is energy. Lights come on as the cloud of ego is lifted. Intuition is energy that makes us whole.

This higher spiritual consciousness and power which is the source of the Illumined Mind is Intuition.

The five senses can´t go beyond the physical reality, so one can´t use the five senes to understand what is above, and one can´t use the ego because it represent duality and therefore can´t access the state of Oneness.

You cannot access the realm of spirit if your brain remains consumed in physical experiences, physical objects and physical distractions. Meditation unifies and expands our brain wave energy to create an intermingling with Source.

Meditation stills the thinking mind and at the same time allows the spirit mind to expand and experience more. Meditation allows the electromagnetic frequency of the spirit mind to expand and more strongly link with the electromagnetic vibration of Source.

So if you want to go anywhere, the first thing is to accept where you really are right now. Right now, your experience is limited only to the five sense organs. The five sense organs can experience only that which is physical, nothing more than the physical. Anything that is beyond the physical, your sense organs cannot perceive. The only thing that you have known is the physical dimension of life. Everything else is imagination.

We have seen that any logical, analytical or physical process leads to scientific activity and similar phenomenon should occur at disciplined mental level too which we can call intuitive science. A trained yogi attains this intuition because in yoga the effort is to rise above the senses and intellect to intuition. This super-consciousness comes from beyond the circle of reason, it comes from somewhere beyond ourselves. Yoga maintains that the mind itself has a higher state of existence beyond reason, a super-conscious state and when the mind gets to that higher state, truth beyond reasoning comes to man. While there have been cases of men who have attained that state sporadically yoga enables man to rise to that level systematically and consequently without adverse effects. In order to gain the super- conscious state in a scientific manner, it is necessary to pass through the various stages of concentration.

If mind can first concentrate upon an object, and then is able to continue in that concentration for length of time, and then, by continued concentration, to dwell only on the internal part of perception of which the object was the effect, everything comes under the control of such a mind. Man has this in his faculty, the power, of transcending his intellect even, and that power is in everything. By the grace of yoga, that power is aroused, and then man transcends the ordinary limits of reason and directly perceives things, which are all beyond reason.

Within the system are two streams of energy: one that longs to develop the self, expand its consciousness, raise its vibration, and manifest its magnificence; and another part that resists the truth that it carries negative feelings, attitudes, and beliefs.

The energy movement of the soul destroys the old negative structure in order that it can be rebuilt in a purer form. The flow of life cannot be extinguished on its evolutionary path to union. This means the outer manifestation of life changes dramatically.

The master cell held in the pineal gland, upon receiving the higher frequency information, activates all other cellular behaviors. As we move through our transformational work and are able to receive and metabolize the higher frequencies, this also changes our physical DNA.

It is possible for us to do this work ourselves and activate the dormant information; the original blueprint before conditioning, energetic imprinting, and genetic meddling during our evolutionary process can be restored. It is not necessary to wait for mainstream science to catch up, and neither do we need any special equipment.

We have the means within our own energetic system to activate these dormant codes, providing us with radiant health and abundance, halting and reversing the aging process, and accelerating the return to our original harmonized blueprint, synchronous with higher will.

We are in the process of changing from a carbon-based human to a more refined physical matter: a silica liquid crystalline being. Clearing more and more discordant energy from our DNA and our energy field enables the higher frequencies to alchemize the substance of the physical and energy bodies, increasing the spin and the frequency vibration of the atoms so that each level of our energy field becomes finer and finer. This includes the physical body. We literally transfigure. We achieve this through our intention, action, thought mastery, and energy work.

At present most humans only have about 3-5% of their DNA turned on, as the rest lies dormant. By activating our DNA we gain greater access to our full potential.

We have 12 strands of DNA and according to contemporary science most of us only have 2 connected, the other 10 often referred to as “junk DNA”. It is stated that some of these strands are being reconnected and activated at this time as part of ascension and frequency elevating. Which then brings in more gifts of the sixth sense so to speak, being able manifest, communicate telepathically, greater activation of all of our 6th senses, greater utilization of our brain etc. It had been stated that we use only 10% of our brain capacity that the other 90% lays dormant. The activation of the other 10 strands could in theory maximize our ability to use the other 90% of our brains potential.

Humanity has carried the codes for our awakening process for eons of time. Science has confirmed that 98.8 percent of our DNA is not currently being used here in 3d reality. When we marry this with principles of evolution we get a sense of how meaningful this DNA might be. Evolutionary theory states and shows again and again that anything that is not ideal or functional is replaced by something of a more efficient or better functionality. Yet our unused DNA persists.. and persists.. and persists.. much like our brain matter .. that for some reason we continue to carry.

DNA in the 3rd dimensional world stands for deoxyribonucleic acid. As we know it today in our physical bodies, it’s a bit like the physical frame of the physical frame that makes up a person. Yet as we move more fully into the 4th and 5th dimensions our DNA takes on a new role and significance. The light that “shines” through our DNA is intelligent and carries information. Simultaneously as we get acclimated to the energies of higher dimensions and are able to spend more time there, our DNA activates within these dimensions.

This process involves us awakening to our true light, unlimited power, inner knowing and magical abilities. This process invites us to release our attachments and fears within the 3rd dimensional world; it also invites us to stay in our physical bodies and in this physical reality. It is very much an internal transformation that affects and expands and lights up our external world.

There’s nothing more important to understand than this: everything comes from within you. We have to ground these new understandings and higher energies down into the world we live in. That is the work and the joy of this lifetime! Your intention and awareness are so powerful and you are the source and creator of everything!

Humankind have been learned to believing that power is outside him and not within, and then the ego is this outer external they searching for support from the outer world.

The logical brain will cancel out the intuitive information because it is illogical and inconsistent with the preconceived notion.

Mass consciousness is the Kingdom of The Ego. When man functions from the external energy of the ego, he does not relate to the consciousnesses within the inner self and the higher self. This man, in effect, does not know who he is. Therefore, man will search for his identity within the external energy forces of life. He is functioning within the external ego world so it is logical for him to create support for that ego self from that external world. External identity consciousness creates an external support system for man and his ego. Maintaining the collective unconsciousness of the mass of collective energy in a negative state of mind will only give more power to the ego making reconnection of the spiritual and God’s energy impossible. This “game” can be reversed by alchemy, meditation and spiritual knowledge.

⦁ The ego, logical brain and intellect will cancel out the intuitive information
⦁ The ego prevents humankind from raising their inner vibrations to higher levels of consciousness by using fear
⦁ The ego deny humankind from knowing their inner higher divne self and prevents them from knowing their higher divine realm
⦁ The ego blocks other dimensions by keeping humankind tuned into a fear-based low vibrational frequency
⦁ The Ego bends every effort to quicken vibration. Man’s ego-perception and vision has lately been reduced to a single dimension; he now thinks of his activity as limited to on the surface of the earth.
⦁ Man´s mind is not limited by his physical body, although he usually thinks it is. But it is the intellect and the ego that bind him there.
⦁ The ego has become the god of this world

Once we let go of ego attachment, we become our own guru and miracle maker. The kingdom of heaven is within us.

Here, then, in all of these different wisdom traditions, the underlying view is that we cannot make any spiritual progress unless we can overcome the selfish ego, which prioritizes its own particular goals and ambitions, for this ego makes it so much harder to connect with the greater reality that we all belong to.

The ego-self with its feelings of dualism is really the biggest obstacle to our spiritual progress, but we can also be grateful for it and for this human experience with it, for we need time with our human selves in order to become aware of our real fulfillment. We just need to keep the ultimate goal in sight and remember that our Self is our true identity, and the bright light of oneness is our goal.

JUST AS WE HAVE AN “EVERYDAY SELF (the ego-self)” that activates our body and lives life here on Earth, so too we have a “Higher Self” that inhabits the spiritual realm. This Higher Self is the eternal, immaterial part of our being: our divine essence, the seat of our higher consciousness, our spiritual being. It has many names: the self, the spirit, the god-within, the causal self, being just a few. (This can be confusing as the same terminology can cover different parts of our being according to the context and belief system to which it is applied.) Our Higher Self is more than our ego, our individuality. It is another vibratory dimension. It is “higher” because it is the part of our being that is vibrating fast enough to be in touch with the spiritual realm.

he more we can contact, and embody, our Higher Self, the more we will raise our spiritual awareness, increase our vibratory level, and improve our protection in both the physical and the spiritual realms. This embodying of the Higher Self is important and may be the next evolutionary step for us humans. It means bringing our spiritual being into our physical being, into our life on Earth. For so many people, spiritual development means “transcending” the body—in other words, leaving it behind. While we are on Earth, we are meant to be living a physical life: we would not be here if we did not still have lessons to learn and tasks to do on this plane. When we have completed our lessons and our tasks, our soul and spirit are freed from the physical body to move onto another level of experience. Until this happens, we are not really free to leave the earth plane.

It is possible to develop our contact with our Higher Self through meditation, chanting, ritual and pathworking, etc. But this must be grounded. We must literally embody the Higher Self by being in our body. We strengthen our ties with our physical body, purifying that body so that it can receive the raised vibrations of our spiritual self. We receive those vibra-tions only when we can encompass all the facets of our being: the “dark” as well as the “light,” the unconscious as well as the superconscious. Like the yin and yang, we must have the balance.

We do not embody our Higher Self by running away from the physical side of life into the spiritual. This results in some-one who has, at most, a toehold on earth—a very tenuous link through which the spiritual can manifest. Nor do we embody it by becoming a saccharin sweet “goody-goody” who talks of light and love, and totally represses half of their being. A half which will, inevitably, surface later with great force, tearing them, and anyone around them, asunder in the process. Only when stable and integrated on the physical, emotional/psycho-logical, mental, and spiritual levels of our being can we truly bring our higher spiritual energies into play. However, the more we reach up to our Higher Self, the more we can hear that voice within, and the greater strength we will have.

If we can raise our vibrations to their highest level, then we can reach out to our Higher Self, that part of us that is at its highest vibration.

In same way physical exercise improve a higher oxygen uptake for the whole body systems of cells energy transportions, so does meditation practice improve a higher uptake of light in the whole body system. Through meditation exercise/practice one is learning and instruction the cells to hold more light or a higher state of vibrations.

The goal of this shamanic wisdom seems to be the attainment of a luminous body of light.

The ego leads us to believe that exploring our depths leads to the destruction of our self, when in truth, alchemical work actually develops and strengthens the greater Self while redirecting the influence of the ego to become more of an ally instead of an adversary. It awakens us to the light within as we move through the alchemical stages in which we can discover the gold within us.

Your Inner Gold define the seven basic stages of alchemical transformation, followed by chapters that help you apply the principles in each stage. We’ll begin with Calcination, in which the ego’s defenses are reduced to ashes in the crucible of Spirit. For those just starling a process of inner work, this maybe the most difficult stage of all since it involves intensification of feelings the ego had protected us against experiencing.

In the second stage, Dissolution, watery emotions mix with the ashes from Calcination to offer us a new perception of our feelings as valuable and necessary. This stage transforms rigid. ego-bound beliefs that were burned in the Calcination stage into water, or tears, which flow when we realize the ego has loosened its control, which for some may be disturbing. We may feel lost or insecure without the ego’s direction and restrictive rules to follow.

In Separation, we dissect various pairs of opposite ego-influenced aspects within us, such as good and bad, generous and selfish, honest and dishonest, etc., in order to become more conscious of them and how they affect us. In this stage we begin to see more clearly what we processed in the first two stages and are more conscious of the light within us. This opens a space for a new unification, a sacred marriage, within.

This fourth stage, Conjunction, balances and integrates opposites and helps us open to heart-based consciousness. As in the Separation stage, we meet new pairs of opposites this time, such as masculine and feminine, and discover their unity when the heart, rather than the ego, directs them.

The fifth alchemical stage, Putrefaction-Fermentation, like Calcination, throws us again into the fire. Here, fear-based inner material is burned and rotted away to make space for the development of what has been fermenting in consciousness. In laboratory alchemy, this process involves the decomposition of elements that eventually are reabsorbed as something totally new and beneficial. In spiritual alchemy, this process leads us through our darkness so we can discover our life-affirming, effervescent nature. Sometimes in this fifth stage, a very powerful, yet lesser known, operation called Mortification occurs when the materials being putrefied seem to have died but actually herald the onset of a new consciousness—one that brings us closer to the shining light within us, and one that is no longer driven by the ego-protector or old fears. But Mortification involves being humbled—humiliated, in some cases. But, as you will learn from my own mortificatlio experience that I describe in a later chapter, this challenging experience is more than worth what we go through as it transforms us on deep levels of consciousness.

Distillation, the sixth stage of alchemical transformation, is a deli-cate yet powerful refinement of the work done in the previous stages. Here, the consciousness has been boiled down to its true essence, no longer directed by ego but rather by the Soul. It is an entirely differ-ent state of consciousness, made of the golden light within us. Our distilled essence is far more like Spirit than only the physical aspect of being.

The seventh stage of alchemical transformation, Coagulation, is where the alchemist may discover the Philosopher’s Stone, the spiri-tual essence that we have been seeking and that is made manifest as a self-realized consciousness. It brings the seeker full circle, back to Divine Essence where it began—it coagulates it, but now with full conscious awareness of the mystery of being—which, in alchemical terms, would mean the transformation from lead to gold has been completed. All that we have processed within ourselves in the seven stages have now been solidified into a new, transformed being and an authentic representation of our essence originally created by the Divine Spirit.

The golden key to becoming conscious rather than merely maintaining horizontal growth is the willingness to open our hearts, no matter what it takes or what we may have to sacrifice. We may have to face fearsome tasks as we dig deep into ourselves. But through the use of alchemical tools, we can free ourselves from fear, and the result is that our hearts will open to our very own shining Philosopher’s Stone!

The future of humanity is enlightenment, The Superconsciousness of the Future, The Future Man, The Future Humankind, “Homo luminous” THE BIRTH OF THE LIGHT BODY, the fountain of youth or the philosopher’s stone. Superconsciousness is, in fact, the Second Birth, Self-realization, the Christ consciousness! Homo luminous to describe the next level of humanity’s advancement on this planet. We are in the very process of the evolution of our species from Homo sapiens to Homo luminous.’

Authors speaks of a possible break between Homo sapiens and what he refers to as an emerging new species, Homo luminous. Perhaps the path toward the apocalypse and the path toward spiritual liberation are the same.

The path toward collective ego to collective soul is very likely also the path toward a more wider enlightened state of consciousness. As a species begins to collectively realize that it is dying out, an inner mechanism, possibly built into the blueprint of the DNA, begins to create the next level of being, a new species.

Alchemy and the secret of esoteric philosophy are the pathways to Homo luminous. Alchemy is nothing less than the science of how our species evolves.

The unconscious energy is evolving each second, into more refine consciousness, and is a endless journey of evolution into more refine forms of life and species, and the unconscious energy take a turn a twisted into human beans which is the only forms species where the unconscious energy as the possibility to become turn into consciousness, that we know up to our day the only forms of lip were the unconscious become turn twisted into consciousness is the human bean, but is only a opportunity man as to decisive about it make a afford about it for the divine alchemy into consciousness to happen.

In the history of humanity few are the case where a human bean become turn twisted into a conscious bean, the illuminated one, few are the case. At the source at the origin the energy is unconscious and it goes through a long journey of propulsion of pulsation towards a total refinement into consciousness, eventually into the illuminate bean the journey end up the unconscious energy refine totally itself into absolute consciousness and return melt annihilate into the same source from where one day originate totally refine , it create a perfect circulation like a zero, and start to be intrinsic to the source of non bean eternity for eternity to wine begin less endless.

Now in this long journey of evolution from unconscious to consciousness it goes through many different realm layers of forms from rocks to water nature to bacteria, fish , animals, finally into the realm of human forms into a infinite journey of evolution, when it reach the hunan forms is not the last point of refinement into human forms it as the opportunity to go one last step more into realize itself into become conscious of itself into illumination , that only if you are decisive about it you make a afford about it happen , meditation is the process that trigger this realization of one self, the awakening to consciousness, it not provide by the natural process of evolution ,you have to be decisive about it is a revolution to become conscious not a evolution and for the revolution you have to be determinate decisive, otherwise is not going to happen naturally, you have to wake up to one self, meditation is the path.

The Integral Yoga The base of the integral Yoga which lies in the background of Savitri is not a transcendence out of Matter and Mind into the Light of God. Yoga is a transformation of Mind. Matter and Life into Supermind.

It distinguishes between a flight into the abode of God, and a permanent transformation of the earth—life into Light. For the better understanding of the point. we may use an image. When a caterpillar goes into sleep in its chrysalis of matter and then finds a new awakening as the body of a butterfly in the environ-ment of the new air, this is the transformation of the form of the caterpillar. It is not an escape but a transmutation.

In the realisation of the Yoga Sri Aurobindo saw that the main consti-tuents of our being, our Body, our Mind. our Life were asleep in a world of nescience. He also discovered in the depths of our being that the Light of God was secretly concealed in Matter. Mind and Life. That Light is called the Light of Supermind.

Mind and Life into the Light of God under the descent of the Supramental Force In the long preparations of Yoga is the ascents of Mind transcendencies into Supermind.

The gradual transformation of his body into Supermind. In our imagery the caterpillar was turned into the butterfly in a new body and in a new range of being.

In a word, the complete transmutation of Body and Mind into the Supramental Light. In the gradual growth of his yoga, in the supramcntal con-sciousness, he moved into the fields of the subtle substances which he called the fields of ascending Matter. The lowest field of Matter he called the field of the Mind of Night. The entanglement of the soul in the lower substance he called the Knot of Matter. From the Mind of Night he rose into the next grade of substance which he called the world of the Intuitive Mind. Then he ascended into the next grade of substance the Mind of Light.

Intuitive Mind. then the step is to the Intuitive Mind, which unifies the earlier stages. Intuition is a power of consciousness more intimate to the Transcendental Spiritual Experience by identity and automatic certi-tude. Intuition is always an edge or ray or out leap of a superior light.

The future of humanity is enlightenment, The Superconsciousness of the Future, The Future Man, The Future Humankind, “Homo luminous” THE BIRTH OF THE LIGHT BODY, the fountain of youth or the philosopher’s stone. Superconsciousness is, in fact, the Second Birth, Self-realization, the Christ consciousness! Homo luminous to describe the next level of humanity’s advancement on this planet. We are in the very process of the evolution of our species from Homo sapiens to Homo luminous.’

What the three dimensional world will provide is a RFID-chip. transhumanism, to become a prototype of a homo-cyborg being, connected to digital global world brain that thinks for you. Computers disconnect the right brain hemisphere.

The more they can keep you coming from the left side of the brain, the more easily you can be controlled and manipulated, and the easier it is to distract you from finding out who you truly are and what you are truly doing here. The leaft brain is also the core that is using fear to stay in control and power, and fear is also the component that opens up the channels for mental negative programming of the mind. The powers using computers to dumb down the masses and the next generation. Computers eliminate all right-side brain activity. The right side is the side that produces creativity, innovation, intuition, imagination, and insight, and these aspects go hand in hand with consciousness, creating, and the essence of your soul.

The ego has become a god of this world – a tyrant of control and it doesn´t want anyone to re-connect to energy, powers, knowledge, wisdom that the ego can´t control, so the ego distorts, disturbs, and distracts the energy system, the path and blinds the mind of humankind.

Supermind is something beyond man and his limits; it is a greater consciousness than the highest consciousness proper to human nature.

“Homo luminous” to describe the next level of humanity’s advancement on this planet. IT`S THE BIRTH OF THE LIGHT BODY

The future of humanity is enlightenment . The future of humanity is …

The Superconsciousness of the Future

Imagine what we could achieve if we developed our capacity to its full potential—to 100 percent. According to the point of view of initiatic science, this full potential comes from the superconsciousness, from this inner being, this inner spark, this profound spring, our Higher Self, where everything comes from. This source is often referred to as the fountain of youth or the philosopher’s stone. Superconsciousness is, in fact, the Second Birth, Self-realization, the Christ consciousness! Superconsciousness does not emerge from the intellect but manifests through other faculties that are more subtle and sensitive, such as the intuition that lives in the soul and spirit. Our full potential is the superconsciousness; it is, in fact, the Christ within!

From these new currents, the sixth race of human beings will be born with a more fraternal consciousness. With this new race, peace and harmony among nations will prevail.

But the moment can come when, through the grace of God, the spark within us rekindles and we see again with its light. This is the most precious moment in the life of a soul, when we reconnect with our divine nature, when the journey Home begins. Our reawakening to this light can take many forms: we might meet a teacher, be inspired by a spiritual text, or in a sudden unexplained moment of truth experience our eternal nature.

Whatever the outer form, inwardly the moment is the same: the Higher Self gives us an energy that comes into our heart and the spark of light that is our gift from God begins to glow. The light of the Self awakens and brings its divine consciousness into our life. In this light we glimpse our true nature and the divine in life all around us. Usually the glimpse lasts just for a brief moment, and then the shadows of our ego, our mind, and the world close around us again. But it is enough to turn us away from life’s illusions, to draw us on the eternal search. This is the first step on the journey Home, the journey that can lead us to a full awakening to our divine nature. Ignorance is the first challenge to overcome. Ignorance represent the slumbering dreamstate or the darkness and unlighten mind. The more igonrance that is been pierced or removed the more enlighten one becomes.

As we start to wake up to the many mysteries of our universe that exist outside and inside our bodies, we learn that each of us has a critical and central role to play in the grand scheme of this shared existence. We are intimately connected to all that is, and we are the willful agents of the natural patterns of the One life force. Yet, we feel trapped — trapped within these physical bodies and further trapped in the dramas of our shadow energies. We feel drained and disconnected and always wonder why we are so lost. Until now.

Mass consciousness creates aleination from the real higher divine self and powering thought of being lost in mass consciousness of the ego.

There is an inherent level of distortion that we humans begin with when we incarnate here on Earth.

We keep falling asleep to the deep trances burned into our shadows, and so we must set constant reminders and perform practices that illuminate our awareness of this phenomenon. This is an incredibly powerful and effective way for us to attain real results in a short amount of time.

The Earthly Life Mind is immersed in the maya-hypnotized existence, remains in ignorance, deeming himself to be a physical being. The maya-hypnotized ego creates the distortions of reality or distortions of the powers within. The first distortion-error that man has made is believing that power is outside him, the second distortion-error is made through believing in the dying nature of man, and not the undying nature of the real Self/Soul. The third error-distortion of man´s mind is not limited by his physical body, although he usually thinks it is. But it is the intellect and the ego that bind him there. The human body system and chakra system has “three knots”. These knots are found within the energetic interior of our psychic system. They are problematic because they bind us in a state of ignorance, distort everything we experience, and lock up our wisdom. These mind-errors is the mind-illusions that distorts reality. Another term for illusions is “maya” and the “dream state” of the mind is the maya-hypnotized mind.

The development of our correct understanding of the nature of our existence leads us to dissolve the egos of our self-conscious identities and literally “step aside” and allow superconsciousness to feed information directly into our subconsciousness. This, in turn, makes our self.

The Yoga Sutras in particular present a system for temporarily shutting down the thought processes of the mind and entering states of superconsciousness called samadhi, which roughly translates as “with complete higher consciousness and knowledge.”

For within this newfound ability to awaken ourselves, there exists a paradoxical void. Soon after we have learned the tools to break from our trance state and plot our own course, we are being told to surrender to the superconscious will and become a participating agent of this consciousness. We then discover that we must do this work and dissolve our egos so that the intelligence of the Divine Self can guide us freely through the world as conscious co-creators of reality.

Homo luminous to describe the next level of humanity’s advancement on this planet. We are in the very process of the evolution of our species from Homo sapiens to Homo luminous.’ Although this coming progression is the ancient, stated birthright of all humans as taught by a number of worldly traditions, it has, until recently, been a lost spiritual technology for many centuries. This knowledge has fortunately re-emerged for the masses.

Homo luminous is the result of the practice of all yoga (which means “union”) and is the natural consequence to our illumination. The more aware we become, the clearer the Light Body practice continues to be for us. The more we wake up, the more we can see the energy fields and luminous bodies of others and eventually ignite our eternal Light Bodies.

Here the ultimate object is change of the life and existence, for which a full descent of the Divine Consciousness into … The omnipotent power of the Supermind is the spiritual alchemy that can transform the lead of earthly life into the gold of life. The Earthly life is the leaden consciousness that can be transmuted or tranformed into gold consciousness. leaden consciousness is also mass consciousness.

At that time our collective consciousness expressed as unity consciousness. The tunnels that link us directly to the universe were once a natural part of our awareness. Hypercommunication information, light language, and light codes passed through them unobstructed. This previous Golden Age was an era of great peace, advanced consciousness, evolution, and group connectedness to multidimensional realities. However, as we descended into duality consciousness and separateness, our DNA atrophied. For thousands of years we have experienced a third-dimensional consciousness, which vibrates at a low level, and the tunnels of light information exchange have been mainly dormant for a long time. We have almost completely lost our capacity for hypercommunication. To explore and experience duality, the descent in consciousness was a necessary and vital part of the evolution of the human soul. Now, as we find ourselves on the threshold of another Golden Age, we can regain a state of unity consciousness and access to information from many dimensions via our DNA.

Hypercommunication is dependent on DNA to receive the data that streams into the group consciousness of the Earth from sources outside third-dimensional consciousness. Hypercommunication is a natural process and is responsible for sudden flashes of information and insights that are ordinarily outside of our accessible knowledge. The state of hypercommunication is most pronounced when we are in a state of deep relaxation, in a heightened state of consciousness, or in a hypnogogic/trance state. Anxiety, stress, and mental overload can block our ability to pick up sparks of these transmissions or we can interpret what we pick up in a distorted way or with no significant meaning.

Through the resultant reactions to our aversions and cravings that were born from this “fall,” we began to create “noise” in the channel. Noise harassment, inducing stress, triggering fear, negativity, anxiety or terrorizing the mind is the work of organized gang stalking. It blocks the spiritual progress, and it blocks activation of new dna strands. This is how this world suppresses humankind downwards to the low vibrational frequencies and prevent them from becoming enlighten or expanding their consciousness.

It is also fascinating that we have recently discovered a whole internal system of language that involves the release of photons (particles of light) when our DNA zips and unzips. The photons somehow communicate with the DNA in our cells, and a system of coordination instantly orchestrates our growth and direction based on this information. In other words, somehow, superconsciousness relays information to us via our DNA, and our subconsciousness then takes this information and encodes it into a photon-based language, which it instantly communicates to all the cells in our body.

We also know that much of our genetic expression comes from the trillions of bacteria within us. It seems that life is having a profound conversation all around us. We instantly shift what it is we are doing, and we literally “create” a new reality based on this new encoding. This is where the magic happens.

Once we learn to listen to superconsciousness, we begin our resonant tuning with the primal will to the good of the entire universe. It seems that there is a definite direction in our evolution and that this has been encoded through our DNA, which has been driving us to become more self-aware since the very beginning.’

However, that first moment when we became self-aware as humans also ushered us into polarity consciousness.

Through the resultant reactions to our aversions and cravings that were born from this “fall,” we began to create “noise” in the channel.

Noise is a distractor in the acihvement for supermind or super consciousness. Noise is pollution for the mind. Today these actions of noise and sound interference is been created by the collective mass consciousness or organized gang stalking, or organized bullying, or organized noise harassment.

We began feeding energy into the shadows of our subconscious reasoning, distorting the message or the light based language that flows from super- to subconsciousness. We stopped hearing the inner voice and fell further and further into confusion. We became convinced that “this is it” and deluded ourselves that we had attained the highest level of evolution possible on the planet.

This then forced us to invent tools and technologies to make up for the inherent powers we had forsaken. we thought we lost Eden, but all we really lost was our ability to see it. We fell asleep and have been living a dream ever since.

He had given the whole message: this moment is all there is. This moment—the whole past, the whole present, the whole future, is involved in this moment. But you cannot see it in its totality because your mind is so clouded, so dusty with thought, dream, sleep; so much hypnosis, desire, motive. You cannot see. You are not total, your vision is not total. ‘Once the vision is total – past and future exist in the present, but they are not experienced in the present because they are on different planes.’ The past has moved on a different plane. It has become your unconscious—superconscious, and you cannot move in your unconscious so you cannot know your past—future. The future exists on a different plane. It exists in your superconscious. But because you cannot move in your superconscious you cannot know you future. You are closed in your small consciousness, very fragmentary. You are just like the tip of an iceberg: much is hidden deep, just beneath you, and much is hidden just above you. Just below, and above, and the whole reality surrounds you, but you are clinging to a very small consciousness. Make this consciousness greater and bigger.

That’s what meditation is all about—how to make your consciousness bigger, how to make your consciousness infinite. You will only be able to know that much reality; in the same proportion will you be able to know the reality as you have consciousness. If you have infinite consciousness you will know the infinite; if you have momentary consciousness you will know the moment. On your consciousness depends everything.

The final stage, the collectivized superconsciousness of the mass-formation, its a movement from the collective ego to the collective soul.

The superconscious is surely unconscious to us at the moment , but while the unconscious is the dynamic retention of our past , the superconscious is the inherent evolutional possibility for the future . If man is not the end state of evolution then surely the future possibilities of the growth of consciousness have in some sense a present reality . That is really our superconscious.

The supramental or gnostic being will be the perfect consummation of the spiritual man. In the Ignorance one is there primarily to grow, to know and to do, or, more exactly to grow into something, to arrive by knowledge at something, to get something done. Imperfect, we have no satisfaction of our being, we must perforce strive with labour and difficulty to grow into something we are not; ignorant and burdened with a consciousness of our ignorance, we have to arrive at something by which we can feel that we know; bounded with incapacity, we have to hunt after strength and power; afflicted with a consciousness of suffering, we have to try to get something done by which we catch at some pleasure or lay hold on some satisfying reality to life.

To maintain existence is, indeed, our first occupation and necessity, but it is only a starting-point: for the mere maintenance of an imperfect existence chequered with suffering cannot be sufficient as an aim of our being; the instinctive will of existence, the pleasure of existence, which is all that the Ignorance can make out of the secret underlying Power and Ananda, has to be supplemented by the need to do and become.

But what to do and what to become is not dearly known to us; we get what knowledge we can, what power, strength, purity, peace we can, what delight we can, become what we can. But our aims and our effort toward their achievement and the little we can hold as our gains turn into meshes by which we are bound; it is these things that become for us the object of life: to know our souls and to be our selves, which must be the foundation of our true way of being, is a secret that escapes us in our preoccupation with an external learning, an external construction of knowledge, the achievement of an external action, an external delight and pleasure.

The spiritual man is one who has discovered his soul: he has found his self and lives in that, is conscious of it, has the joy of it; he needs nothing external for his completeness of existence. The gnostic being starting from this new basis takes up our ignorant becoming and turns it into a manifestation of the self-knowledge of being, all power and action into a power and action of the self-force of being, all delight into a universal delight of self-existence.

Attachment and bondage will fall away, because at each step and in each thing there will be the full satisfaction of self-existence, the light of the consciousness fulfilling itself, the ecstasy of delight of existence finding itself. Each stage of the evolution in the knowledge will be an unfolding of this power and will of being and this joy to be, a free becoming supported by the sense of the Infinite, the bliss of the Divine State of Consciousness. the luminous sanction of the Transcendence.

Regarding the Superconscious: “In the first place, instead of being the greater memory, or storehouse of the impressions of the past, as is the subconscious, the superconsciousness of the individual is the latent possibilities of the future man, or superman. And the flashes from this region that occasionally reach the field of consciousness are practically the prophecies of the future of the race. That which is now the superconscious region of the individual will some day become the ordinary plane of everyday mentation of the advanced race. The superconsciousness is the consciousness of the future individuals of the race, and in it are stored the latent faculties and mental activities of a higher race of beings. To some favored ones of the present race there come flashes from this wonderful region of the mind, and we call this ‘genius,’ ‘intuition,’ and other terms denoting higher and uncommon mental activities and states. In each individual there is stored this great reservoir of future mental development—why, or how, we do not know—but that it is we do know.

There is latent faculties and powers in the mind of each and every individual, awaiting the stroke of the clock of evolutionary unfoldment. And when these flashes pass down into the field of consciousness, we recognize them as coming from above, and not from below.

The mental evolution of the race is not alone a matter of growth in the sense of addition—it is in the nature of an unfoldment of the latent qualities, faculties, and powers inherent in the mind, or perhaps the unfoldment into expression of some inherent power or quality of the Ego. At any rate it is undoubtedly an unfoldment—a revealing of something that has been hidden away from sight and expression…The man of today is slowly, laboriously, but surely unfolding into greater and grander mental states and activities. Mental growth comes not alone from without—there is an inner urge constantly at work, pressing ever on toward higher and greater things.”

In the higher regions of the mind are locked up intuitive perceptions of all truth, and he who can gain access to these regions will know everything intuitively, and as a matter of clear sight, without reasoning or explanation.” This attainment is Realization,—the belief in its possibility is Recognition.

Realization, the second step in unfoldment, is something higher than mere Recognition, although proceeding directly from the latter. It is very difficult to describe this Realization. Realization, you know, means: “The state of entering or bringing into actual existence, being or action; appreciating thoroughly and vividly in the mind,” etc. In short means the making real. In this second step or stage the individual not only intellectually recognizes the existence of the Superconscious, but he also enters into a knowing on the plane of the Superconscious itself.

He not only knows that the Superconscious is, by means of the intellect, but he also knows that it is, by reason of entering upon its own plane of knowing or consciousness. It is almost impossible to explain this to those who have not experienced it at least in a faint degree. It cannot be well described in the term of ordinary thought. It belongs to the unclassified and unnamed mental phenomena which the old psychology refined to admit. The old mystics and occultists understood it well.

Man is a threefold being, comprising `animal man’, ‘human man’, and ‘spiritual man’. The so-called subconscious comprises the knowledge and memory of all that appertains to animal man; that the average brain-consciousness embraces all that concerns the life of the human man; and that the superconscious is man’s channel or link with the spiritual realm, or world of causes, wherein is pictured the plan and purpose of world history from the beginning to the end.

We can understand in this way how, through his human side, man is in interaction with the physical world of the lower three dimensions; how, through his animal nature, when properly developed, he is in interaction with the fourth-dimensional world of vibrations and radiations, which play through the ethers—just as animals are—and gains in the same way his guiding ‘instincts’, which ate responses to natural laws; and how, through his spiritual nature, as soon as he can tune up to it, he is in interaction with the fifth-dimensional world of plan, of cause, and of pattern, wherein is shown life as a whole, past, present and future, and time no longer exists in its lower-dimensional sense. In this realm, time, instead of spreading out through space, is converging into the great withinness of which we spoke, and thus past, present and future have come together, presenting one completed picture. When man can link success-fully with his superconscious he obtains infinitesimal flashes of this completed picture of truth, which result in what we call intuition.

We now come to an interesting point. So long as man remains pre-eminently human man he has to rely for his knowledge upon memory, that is to say upon those facts which have been imprinted upon his physical brain since birth. His knowledge, therefore, consists of a mass of facts, statements and ideas communicated to him through other human beings. As soon as he is able to contact for himself, through concentration, meditation or contemplation, either deliberate or in-voluntary, dimensions higher than the physical he begins to obtain first-hand information.

He obtains this information in a realm not constricted to words, nor conditioned by time.

This means that he can learn to obtain infonnation instan-taneously, and eventually upon any subject. This means that memory, as we know it, is no longer so necessary! Men will come to realise that instead of having their brains packed with an assortment of facts which they may or may not need, it is better to train the powers of the mind, to develop concentra-tion and one-pointedness (or the power of tuning up to a certain vibration and sounding it forth steadily for as long as desired, thus contacting everything of affinity with it) so that they can at any time contact instantaneously any knowledge which they definitely require.

At the beginning of this section we made the statement ‘the humanity of the future must be global’. And perhaps we can now, after having undertaken an initial journey through the spirit worlds, have the feeling that global means more than to develop a consciousness which can be receptive to the physical world in all its variety.

Global means that all worlds, from the most material up to the highest (supermaterial) energy level, reveal themselves to us fully. And global also means that not only do space and super-space reveal themselves to our growing consciousness, but that we become liberated from the fetters of the material body and can move about in higher worlds, which have as yet found no expression on the earth, just as naturally as we can go into a town with our physical body, and accept this as perfectly natural. Global would also mean that the time dimension is disclosed to us, so that we no longer move through time, but with time and through it move across the world of space, for time is an energy to which the dynamic soul responds. The soul contains in itself the body of time and can give rise to the whole of creation as a projection of itself.

Not only can it look into the past and the present, but can above all things see the radiant vision of the future. A life of truth on the earth which is no longer determined by the exclusivities of a defectively organised reason, will thus become a flowering of the fully outfolded soul of man which of itself creates forms which correspond to its creative vision and open up the path into worlds of consciousness, of power and of bliss into which the human being can ascend as a higher life-form: a life-form which is no longer mentally limited but sees and acts in the full light of the superconsciousness, a life-form which is supramental and thus truth-conscious.

During this transformation and the awakening of ever more people to the necessity of a continual change, a constantly greater flexibility in mind, life and body, as well as new forms of expression will be created to serve as vessels for the New Consciousness. We spoke in this connection of a cell-like growth, of the arising all over the woad of points of light, initially centred around individuals and then expanding to form cellular organisations perhaps in the form of communications centres and educational and living communities, until finally the first complete organisms in the form of community structures as large as cities come to expression.

When this magnitude has been reached — or is approached — we can also speak of the release of a cultural trigger, a dynamic-creative soul impulse which will not only influence world developments, but will transform them, offering to humanity hitherto unimagined possibilities of perfection.

These new future perspectives will be based not only on the external material form of expression of things, but on their inner causative factors, the trigger of infinity which is immanent in the whole of creation. But in order to recognise this inner cause of all things and to make it the actual basis of existence, a number of connecting links must be set up between man’s outer. unknowing and defective existence and his higher nature of knowledge, totality and love.

We spoke in this connection of various mental levels, which are in fact variously-structured energy levels, leading from the spiritual energy locked up in matter, via various intermediate levels up to spirit energies which can act in increasing freedom.

But we have also pointed out in the course of our presentation that these levels are themselves but stages within specific dimensions of consciousness.

We have thus expanded our initial investigation of the make-up of the various spirit levels and presented a multidimensional spirit-cosmology which showed us that the human being himself is only the expression of a specific dimension within the whole: he is above all the essential expression of the mental principle, which casts a glance below to dimensions of consciousness of the animal, plant and mineral worlds and the hidden structures of matter which it can observe and contain within itself and upon which it has been built up in evolutionary stages.

But as individualised man we can also look up to higher regions, to dimensions of consciousness beyond the mental, levels of pure being, pure power and bliss. Although within his own mental dimension, man has no direct access to this higher nature, he can by means of self-development attain the further regions of his mental nature, which we called the experiential mind, the border region from which he can take the step into the supramental world.

One difficulty Is that in the past this entry into the experiential mind and the revelation of its reality was already felt to be the final point of development. But it is in truth the starling point for a new creation, for the creation of a materialised supramental world and the development of a new being which we call Future Man.

The feeling that the experiential mind represented the attainment of the endpoint of development was in past ages the origin of religions and was simultaneously the reason for their failure. There crystallised in them the principle of limitation and exclusivity, as it were on a divine scale (although this divinity was man’s creation); the result was the pathological gulf between Man and God, enmity towards nature as a consequence of this and thus a fameaching paralysis of the central evolutionary impulse within man.

This negative aspect of religion has permeated man’s creative spirit via thousands of different paths over the centuries. The blind and desperate flight of an extemalised human being into the titanic illusion of a machine culture based only on economic factors is the result of this separation of Man and God.

There the illumination in the experiential mind was translated into a reconciled community of the divine with the human, expressed through the effects of his many aspects and appearances. But the same limitation is manifest here too. The relationship to the divine worlds is not an expression of an ascent to these worlds with the intention of making one’s way towards new horizons.

They are dead ends, eternal powers which guide that which is transient and themselves descend to the transient to remind the world, in human form, of its higher existence or to effect the course of events. But both kinds of religious development have carried the development of the human consciousness further only to a particular degree and during a particular period. When their mission has been fulfilled, they must of necessity become obstacles which desire to keep man locked within the old boundaries.

We are now at this point and the first people who have begun to feel an interest in the higher or divine consciousness quite apart from any connection with religious traditions will attain, as a result of conscious selfdevelopment, the experience which Is the origin of all religions and will, starting from this experience, open up further dimensions of consciousness which are no longer mental, but supramental, and will activate these in their earth consciousness for the further evolution of the human race.

A reactionary instinct that is turned towards the past must be changed into a creative instinct turned towards the future. Through yoga. mediation and alchemy one can reverse the reactionary instinct into a creative instinct turned into real time presence. It´s through the present time reality humans have access to instant intuition of higher knowing. The electrical energy system of the 2 dna strand is a slow system. When humans through yoga, meditation and alchemy re-connecting and re-wiring their minds and consciousness to their 10 etheric dna strands they will have access to knowledge instantly through intuition and the re-activated sixth sense.

Knowledge at the mental level is largely mixed up with ignorance, but knowledge at the level of the Supermind is free from ignorance. Spirit is Supermind; Spirit is Consciousness; and Spirit is also Transformation. The whole principle of the Psychology of the New Consciousness is the raising of all existential energies to higher levels of intensity until the stage arrives when all these energies are transmuted by a new rhythm acting from above and below

The speciality of man is that like other animals and other plants a change of form is not necessary to house a change in consciousness. The change in consciousness from the mind to the supramental is so big that at any lower grade of manifestation it would not be possible without change of form. But with man his unique nature is such that he can go on housing new and newer states of consciousness without having to change his form. His mind is capable of exceeding itself. That is because mind itself is the extreme and fine point of the supermind.

Knowledge at the mental level is largely mixed up with ignorance, but knowledge at the level of the Supermind is free from ignorance

The Life Divine is based on an evolutionary model with the Supermind as the evolutionary destiny of humanity.

Spirit is Supermind; Spirit is Consciousness; and Spirit is also Transformation.

Visualized the transformation of even earth-nature here and now. The spiritualized society of the future would live like its spiritual individuals, not in the ‘collective ego’ but in the ‘collective spirit’ or soul. Evolution is never a new manifestation other than the individual or race manifestation. One has always to move into the future and not go back to his past consciousness, if he really wants to grow in his life.

In new scientific discoveries that will “thin the walls between soul and matter. The idea of Supermind is no dry linear concept, but consists of “yet un-dreamed-of mind-powers and life-powers” that could free humankind from the limitations of time, distance, and the material body.

Divine light in an all-comprehending supermind, the soul realize its divine-self in the all-possessing, all-blissful ananda at the heart.

The more they can keep you coming from the left side of the brain, the more easily you can be controlled and manipulated, and the easier it is to distract you from finding out who you truly are and what you are truly doing here. The leaft brain is also the core that is using fear to stay in control and power, and fear is also the component that opens up the channels for mental negative programming of the mind. The powers that are using computers to dumb down the masses and the next generation. Computers eliminate all right-side brain activity. The right side is the side that produces creativity, innovation, intuition, imagination, and insight, and these aspects go hand in hand with consciousness, creating, and the essence of your soul.

The Divine Body, the New Consciousness, The vision of the New World, the Consciousness of Future Man, The Supramental Soul, the Divine Principle. The result of this filling of the life forces with peace, joy, bliss and strength is a liberation of all ego-bound forces in a joyful self–opening to the action of the supramental consciousness, the revelation of the Divine consciousness, and how the Archon agenda prevents spiritual progress of this world. Spiritual resonance, Self-Realization, The yogic powers, The superconscious state of mind, The Transcendental Power, The power of the heart and intuition, “Lifting of a veil of ignorance by knowledge. Alchemy, and how to switch from beta brainwaves, and how to change the inner vibrations of the mind

The whole principle of the Psychology of the New Consciousness is the raising of all existential energies to higher levels of intensity until the stage arrives when all these energies are transmuted by a new rhythm acting from above and below. And this development will not stop short at the gates of material existence, for our body, no less than the higher and more subtle dimensions of being, will also participate in the breakthrough of the New Consciousness.

The starting point for the material transformation. One of the first effects of this inner psychological dynamism is to cause the brain-bound thinking to open up to greater mental expanses, to achieve perception of a growing intensity of light which flows into the brain structure. There. it causes a clarification and cleansing of the nerves, liberating them from the darker and more violent currents and eddies of unregenerated nature. The body cells become permeated by a light which illumines even the body’s physical expression to give it an aura of lightness, purity, clarity and loving peace. This process goes hand in hand with an expansion of awareness and a development of the complementary psycho-physical energy currents in the body.

And this awareness is also accompanied by an increasing capacity for conscious individual evolution which more and more liberates the human being from bondage to unconsciousness in body and life and from the tyranny of mental conceptions. He enters into a higher evolution of his soul and spirit and approaches supramental perfection. All this is brought about by the sours trust in its own divinity, by its expression and revelation in a conscious experience which -banishes the mind’s meaningless rigid rationality and reveals the all-encompassing meaning in all things. Life becomes simple. full of light. joyful, unburdened, happy. And the body also participates in this happiness, lightness, serenity. light, love and power. It can become joyful, full of light and love when it responds to the soul. And if it is not tyrannised, the body can respond in a simple and trusting way to receive ever more of the New Consciousness, awaken to the new vibration and express it in matter. Oppression by the narrow reason and the egoistic instincts of life have injected into the body a profound distrust of itself.

The anti-body attitude of religion and moral teachings have contributed their share. But all these are mere opinions, rigid mental formations which cannot exist in the presence of the Soul Light. When we entrust ourselves to it, the body will also awake to its Divinity, to its Truth. The wonderful new lifestyle in the new communities, the Cities of Transformation, will allow mind, life and body to free themselves -simultaneously. The new lifestyle will no longer tolerate the imposition of order via suppression and rigidification. True order will come from an inner truth, an inner agreement based on a unification in the depths of our being. We and everyone else will be accepted for what we truly are, so that everyone will have the opportunity to express their full divinity.

This new world will have nothing to do with breaking human beings or moulding them into conformity, because they will be totally accepted. An inner law of inmost truth will ensure that totality and rightness prevail. Thus will every human being be encouraged to live his wholeness and rightness. Within this atmosphere of bust and expansiveness, the body will quickly learn to develop its wholeness and rightness. And precisely because of its materiality, which has been damned so often, the body will give life its ultimate beauty and concreteness.

Wben all fear of self-expression and self-knowledge is gone. for the two are one since the body becomes aware of itself through action, it will attain a physical security and experiential certainty that it is not separated from the universe but is a homogenous component of the entire cosmos. Wthin material experience, the body will develop and embody an immense bust. Nature and man will be nourished by a new force which formerly was beyond his reach. When the power of trust flows In the body. in the cells. nerves and organs, then the surroundings also echo a new material response. The fear of nature withdraws and a joyful encounter results, a perfect material expression of an experience which has long been possible for the mind.

And the body opens itself out to the experience of its divinity, it learns to recognise itself as pure divine substance. And wherever this experience comes to dwell, the shadow of death retires into the background, withdrawing increasingly from the body’s awareness which is at the same time increasingly able to maintain itself in an endless sea of energy, the unbound energy of Shakti — Consciousness Force. Death is the egoism of matter. When it disappears, it dissolves into its true form of deathless energy.

Thus, when the body loses its fear and forgets death in a fully material way by living without the vibrations of fear and dissolution —it experiences itself more and more as a flexible receiver, maintainer and generator of this unlimited energy. To the degree that it becomes conscious of the supramental force streaming into it, it can acquire the means of receiving this energy current which flows through it in ever more abundant measure. It is the same current which streams through sun and planets. Under direct supramental influence, the body leams how to dissolve all obstacles still standing between itself and the universal energy. A direct flow of supramental energy occurs from soul to body without any bypaths through the realms of life and mind. It can receive ever greater quantities of energy in its soul, brain and body. This growing perfection of the body and its increasing capacity to receive ever greater quantities of unbound energy and its manifold expressions is the whole goal of material evolution.

As this perfection of the body progresses, the meeting of the complementary psycho-physical energies of the male and female will be followed by the experiencing of a material nerve current. It is an electrical energy bound to the body and moving in a complete cycle liberated from all hinderances so that it becomes totally effective.

When this cycle of nerve currents flows unhindered, the north pole (earth side) and south pole (spirit side) of the body, Pratistha and Karana, are connected in an infinite loop. Warmth, light and electricity — Tejas — flow along this cycle in the bodily substance —Retas. Since this cycle has an evolutionary trend, its strength depends on the body consciousness so that right at the beginning the qualities of warmth, light and electricity are still latent in Retas — the bodily substance. If the body consciousness is raised to give rise to greater amounts of inflowing energy and an enhanced capacity to store and emit this energy, then the body is more intensively stimulated. The first thing which is produced is heat or Tapas. This is why the Indian yogic methods for enhancing energy by self-discipline are called Tapas or Tapasya, because they produce stimulating warmth, a -source of powerful action and success.

The next thing to happen is that light is created — the primal Tejas — the energy which stands at the origin of all knowledge. The third stage of development gives rise to electricity — Vidyut — which is the basis for all powerful mental and physical action. Finally, the pure, unbound energy in its highest form — Ojas or Pranashakti — awaits its awakening from electricity in which it lies latent. This highest form of energy is at the same time the most refined form of matter and fills the entire body with physical strength, energy, brain power, pliability and consciousness. This conscious intensification of the nerve currents and excitation of the finest substantial forms in the body structure forms, under the influence of the supramental force, the next step of expression in fine materiality after or while we have grown conscious of the complementary psycho-physical energies in the body. Both types of energy thus link up at a specific point of development, which can vary greatly in individual cases, to give rise to a yet further evolution. It becomes obvious that these two types of energy initially meet in the solar centre, the natural or feminine energy pole.

The progressive handover to the activity of the New Consciousness, the psychological principle, and the increasing liberation of all the soul’s modes of manifestation raises both the energy currents from the solar centre into the heart centre. The supramental force can then act directly from soul to body, giving rise to a new experience in the most material parts of the physical body: the body experiences Soul Conditions directly, i.e. the soul begins to materialise.

The vision of the New World materialises and more and more the body acquires the power of direct materialisation. These new bodily experiences, and it must be repeatedly pointed out that this process of transformation is not subject to a rigid principle. It will find suitable and individual expression in line with the needs and tendencies of each body, of each human being. We may record only a few general lines of development: the principle of an inner handover, transformation of the complementary male-female energies, transformation and intensivation of the nerve currents and their centering in the soul centre.

All this may happen in separation, or simultaneously or successively, but everything follows naturally from the initial inner handover to the supramental powers which influence the soul. At all times, a number of disciplines and rules have existed which were used within certain paths of development to achieve a deification of human nature. But the handover to the force emanating from the Consciousness of Future Man is quite different, being subject to no fixed rules. Everything develops under a direct inner guidance which works from the background as long as the ego is active but which becomes manifest and all-encompassing as soon as the identification with the soul has been achieved. Various methods may be used along the way, in tune with the inner guidance. But the only law is that of evolution itself, the handover. It is the basis for the New Consciousness and the starting point for the emergence of Future Man.

The Supramental Soul causes the Ideal Body, which contains all energies, to flow into the previous body structure. The Ideal Body is thus formed in a more subtle dimension, and at the same time the material body develops further towards the fusion to which the soul is drawing it more and more. We see what an important part of this process the progressive incorporation of the divine principle represents, which is the unification of all energies in a multidimensional Oneness. This principle stands behind the male and female expression, making apparent the importance of a further development of the relationships between people in order to attain this higher at-one-ment.

This transformation is made possible by the complete handover to the intensive activity of the love-wisdom-consciousness force of the Divine Principle.

While the New Body is formed, the eyes — for example — become messengers of light, gates of the soul, mediators and receptors of an inner language of the soul. They can project and receive energy through space and time. The hearing develops into a form of perception which can hear both these aspects of energy of Manifestation (Space and Time). Eye and ear as well as all the other organs and functionings of the body are no longer subordinate instruments of the mental and vital consciousness: the organs themselves develop an intrinsic consciousness, and every organ and every part and cell of the body is filled with the Supramental consciousness. The central principle is no longer the mental or vital consciousness, but the Soul Consciousness.

The brain can transmit new thoughts, no longer self-existent and limited, but carriers of a supramental vibration which has transformed the entire mental field and its different dimensions, the five mental levels, into a continual supramental ladder of ascent. The brain cells become storers of energy, receptors and transmitters of the Consciousness of Truth, the Real Idea. Both halves of the brain develop a similarly individualised and unified reality of consciousness, a synthesis of linear and global aspects.

The limited mental function, the limitation of thoughts, is replaced by a direct supramental vision of the whole and the inner relation of all details to the whole and to every part in the brain cells. This is simultaneously the start of a constant materialisation of new substances or substance vibrations in the body.

A new organ of perception opens out in the back of the head. It can extend over the entire back. The larynx develops the capacity to perceive subtle and acoustic-physical oscillations and their nature. It can increasingly generate the new vibrations, fill the atmosphere with the supramental force and also perceive consciously which vibratory patterns are present in the atmosphere and precisely recognise which of these vibrations are closed, which are open and which belong to the New World.

It is a vast field of oscillations that can be perceived, a field in constant motion. The heart and the inner organs also develop an intense consciousness, a capacity of perception to become channels of communication. Through the physical consciousness centered in the brain, the soul can permeate the whole body with light and force and love, so that it assumes completely new dimensions, a kind of fluid vibration, without losing its form. The heart becomes a material energy point for soul love, a helping force which can have a direct effect on other hearts and other lives.

The hands, arms and legs become energy conductors, transmitters and receivers of the supramental forces. They develop a marked consciousness which allows them to work without the mental will, to move the body. The healing force of the soul streams out through the hands.

A direct contact with the earth takes place through the feet, and a consciousness current flows into the planet so that its emanation is transformed from within. Matter, the very ground itself, acquires a new vibration so that nature and the surroundings of the New Body become increasingly transformed. Blood, nerves and skin become bearers of light-vibrations. The surface of the skin changes to become a differentiated oscillating field of light-consciousness.

Every part of the surface develops its particular capacity for perception, its mode of communication and radiance. The purification and light-permeation of the nerves is one of the first changes to occur, since the nerve paths stand at the boundary between the material and finely-substantial bodies, so that they are the first to open up or extend towards the Ideal Body in the finely substantial medium.

During a certain period of time therefore, both the grossly-material nervous perception and its mode of functioning take place as well as the nervous perceptions in the still unmaterialised finely-substantial body. The blood develops an awareness of freshness, of vitality and perception through light. The bone marrow becomes an intensively radiating battery of light-forces. A part of its light substance can be transferred to the blood vessels of other bodies, the physical heart awakes to a secret consciousness.

All separatedness disappears from the body. The consciousness of the material body can increasingly live in all bodies. The old body fades away to make way for an indescribable new condition which is simultaneously universal and individual. But this transformation is not only experienced by the mental consciousness, but by the body, its organs, cells and forces. The become supramental beings materialised supamental vibrations.

The body also develops a new supramental language, which is so completely different from what we understand mentally as language, that it cannot be described. It is a permanent material-supramental way of being. The body becomes what it sees. Space and Time also change, since we have hitherto seen with mental eyes only. In the materially supramental consciousness, space and time are not separated. Everything collects in the supramental soul, and not the future alone, but also the past is flexible and mutable.

Matter expresses its life in states of soul, thus marking the beginning of complete transformation, a revelation of supramental omni-potence. It is a consciousness in which absolutely no opposition any longer exists between creation and its origin, so that it is capable of a complete self-expression in which whatever it sees becomes manifest. When this change-over in matter first appears, it means no less than the beginning of a New Creation. A new material expression, a new material form and finally also a new material substance are the necessary result of such a change in the Divine Consciousness.

The Soul of Future Man becomes incarnate and matter expresses its life in states of soul. At first in the form of planetary centres, then in growing organisms, in Cities of Transformation and finally in a complete supramental transformation of matter. This will lead to a completed relationship between Body, Universe, Society and Matter. The key lies in the smallest cell.

The New Consciousness affects the mind to produce a growing transparency of all mental dimensions. It is expressed beyond thoughts, in the silence of the mind, which becomes totally translucent for the supramental vibration in utter tranquility.

The Supramental Creation is its simplicity. It is here, it surrounds us and leads us in all conceivable ways into the unknown, but its results are always totally certain. And when we have begun to open ourselves a little to the smiling presence of the supramental consciousness, we quickly recognise how superseded are the old ideas of mental discipline, of Yoga, the thousand methods of mental man, in the light of the new consciousness. What now happens — and we can call it Supramental Yoga — is that a simple self-opening increasingly fills us with a new vibration, easy and straightforward, for the supramental manifestation has taken place, the new vibration oscillates everywhere, around us, above us, in us, below us, by the side of us.

And while we open ourselves up, we rise quite naturally into ever higher and further regions and worlds of the highest consciousness — in serenity and lightness. The New is simpler than the Old. The New Creation is simpler because it is more all-encompassing, broader and greater and thus capable of including all things. This had never been possible before, an incapacity which had obstructed progress in the past. For every progress has its obstacle to overcome, to become a secure fact in the consciousness of the earth. Spirit is infinity, and the highest force of the spirit, the force of the Divine Consciousness.

But every creation by this force will express only a partial potential of this force and its possibilities as long as it is not aiming at consciously revealing the infinite in and through the finite form, a revelation which is the nature of the New Creation. We consequently see an evolutionary universe, we ourselves form a part of this universe, imbued by the principle of evolution. Thus progress in the past has initially been concerned with the liberation of the divine element in its formulation through mind, life and body, and ways and means had been found corresponding to these efforts. The spirit immanent in this threefold formula of creation was liberated from the limitations of these forms, so that a heaven of the beyond, a leap into an indescribable nirvana took place.

The old spirituality had therefore to detach the life of the ego from earthly life and earthly identification and unite with the highest spirit by extinguishing the ego. But since life in the limited formulation of the individual being is, by virtue of its origin, a power of the Divine, of the hidden force of the Divine Consciousness, something unsolved and enigmatic was attached to this extinguishing of life in favour of a beyond. The leap was -possible, but life nonetheless remained stubbornly existent and followed a slow path over tremendous periods of time towards a distant goal. But because the efforts of the past concerned themselves only with the limits set by the mind, life and the body, this secret determination of the universal and individual nature could not be revealed. Life thus came to be seen as an obstacle to spiritual perfection, since it fettered man to the body and to material existence and flooded his mind with the needs of this coarse life, even made him into a slave of nature.

The efforts of the early spiritual disciplines therefore aimed at a twofold detachment of this life nexus: firstly the body was trained to develop capabilities allowing it to become free of the surge of the life forces by the vital nature of man and its constant flow of energies, so that he no longer had to follow the impulses of his vital nature. This fettering of the life forces in the body system was supplemented from the mental side by enabling the mind, by way of a supraconscious -enlightenment, to affect the life forces and finally master them by discipline.

The new or supramental method is based on an evolution of the consciousness beyond the mental and physical limits. The life -forces are then liberated from their fettered state. It is not mind or body which affect the vital nature, but the supramental force and the soul united together in a single divine unity.

Thus the supramental initially forms the mental and teaches it to open itself. This supramentalised mental nature then turns to the life forces. In the same way, the soul from its dimension instructs the body and teaches it self-opening. By means of this self-opening it becomes more and more receptive to the supramental forces, which it receives through the soul, and then turns to the life forces as supramentalised body. When the life forces revolt due to their conservative egoism, the mind does not react with confusion: it understands the problems of the vital nature and passes them on to the supramental which solves the mental problems resulting from the revolt of the vital nature. The body is not shocked by the agitation of the life forces. It is without fear and turns to the soul, which loves the body and gives it suppleness.

The result of this filling of the life forces with peace, joy, bliss and strength is a liberation of all ego-bound forces in a joyful self–opening to the action of the supramental consciousness, the revelation of the Divine consciousness. of the origin of the world, and mind, life and body completely express the Divine through Eternal Youth, Boundless Energy and Immortality. This is the Yoga in the shape of a City, which we can receive, with its strength to redeem the suffering and darkness of life and to open the portals to a New World OF LOVE, FREEDOM, PERFECTION and TRANSFORMATION.

The New Consciousness can both look into and out of this lens. Within it we may see a beautiful, clear landscape with a mountain: an image of the future world.

However, if the body is able, under the direction of the Soul of Future Man, to develop this flexible receptivity with relative ease (assuming that the mind, the reason and the various mental levels are completely free of petrifications and limitations, so that the New Consciousness can enter the soul without hindrance), it must still go through a complete series of far-reaching transformations to ensure a permanent material effect. One of the next experiences may thus be the perception of Supramental Substance as a kind of energy field. And this perception or feeling shifts increasingly to the nervous system itself.

This whole system with its many ramifications becomes an antenna for the -reception of the supramental vibrations. This perception then takes the form of a golden substance which contains seeds or little flames; they are first felt in the back, for numerous nerve strands emanate from the spinal column across the back and through the entire body. Potentially, every cell contains in itself the potentialities of all cells. The various cells are as it were specialised formations of a perfect Master Cell, which bears in itself all possibilities. One of the expressions of this Master Cell is the visual nerve, but the potential of this nerve is also present in every other cell in the body.

Thus when gross matter is permeated more and more by the substance of the New Consciousness under the soul influence, the New World can be stamped more and more onto the body. We can suppose that after a while the body itself begins to assume this new mode of knowing quite spontaneously. It is thus no longer the effect of the New Consciousness through the soul dimension, but a conscious repetition of these new processes by the body structure.

This repetition and reception will proceed step by step in the body. Initially, the subtle-physical shell receives the new forces and adapts itself to them. This is the basis of the psychic-material seeing. But the subtle-physical shell and substance is bound up in its most material parts with the grossly-material nervous system. This is why this system will be the first to respond to the new energies of the supramental world. And again it is the most sensitive and most evolved cells which are the first to make the transition. There are two areas in the general bodily system which are especially sensitive and particularly evolved: the lumbar and spinal region and the head. These areas at the same time represent an evolutionary development.

The entire digestive and alimentary system, the organs of reproduction and the spine possess a sort of bodily nerve intelligence which developed long before the brain evolved to the form we see today. This intelligence and this perception are activated by means of precisely coordinated nerve impulses which give animals and lower life-forms with rudimentary brains an extraordinary precision and an awareness of all vital and survival processes. This awareness is beyond the reach of a highly evolved animal such as man, even with the help of all his science.

The nerve intelligence with its memory reaching back millions of years is, however, an obstacle for higher physical development as long as it remains bound to the mechanical repetitiveness of the old memory. When the nervous system begins to perceive the supramental substance, it may happen that after a further development which prepares the first direct contact between the grossly-material nervous system and the supramental substance, this enters the lower part of the spine (at the tailbone), gradually changes the nerve paths and prepares them for the inflow of the new force. This entry of supramental substance takes place very gently and gives rise to a feeling of sweetness, of weightlessness, of light, of peace and a calm joy in the entire abdominal and spinal regions.

Seen as a whole, this experience takes the following form: The sensitised nerves of the spinal region and of the neck see a golden, vibrating energy field with a gentle radiative force. In this energy field, which seems to have an infinite depth, there hover particles which look like golden seeds or calm flames. This energy field is felt to be located behind the body, and we get the feeling of an all-powerful protection and a tender presence. From this substance is formed a kind of arm or channel which penetrates the body in the lower region of the spine.

This entry is perceived as a kind of immersion. A sweet pressure is felt in the moment when this substance comes into contact with matter. Then a peaceful current begins to spread out in the abdominal region. We can feel and see how all the nerves of this region begin to be affected, so that we seem to be sitting in a bowl which gently raises us. We feel light, are joyful and content. But a consciousness accompanies this feeling. This means that the body does not only feel lightness or satisfaction as before. It also feels and sees the light-in-itself and the consciousness which is contained in this light. This is transformed into the impression that the entire abdominal region becomes transparent, translucent, as if a kind of air current were to remove all blocks or any pollution and darkness from this region and its organs.

At the same time as this golden bowl, which streams its forces over the body, is formed, we also see and feel how a golden tongue begins to move from this same entry point in the spine, along the spine and up into the brain. This movement or inpouring is also gentle and very loving, accompanied by a wonderful perception of sweetness. This ascending tongue is somewhat larger than the spine and surrounds it with a warm, golden radiance. When the substance has risen as far as the head, it spreads out like a leaf, pours through the brain and covers the head. This experience is not identical with what is known as the awakening of the Kundalini. It is the contact with a new dimension of divine consciousness, which has not been often recorded before.

A connecting channel is formed from the golden substance to the lower region of the spine. From there, this substance extends like two golden tongues into the nerves of the abdominal region, along the spine, into the brain and over the head.

The effect of this contact with the new forces in the nervous system is a preparation for the continued development of the brain, which being an organ of a higher stage of evolutionary development, becomes a new centre of action.

Soul of Future Man and the initial preparation of the lower nerve system, the brain function begins to change or expand to a new mode of being. It is the starting point for the materialisation of the New World.

We thus approach a world which is no longer a three-dimensional world of objects and living beings. It is a four-dimensional state in which matter, substance and energy have become a unified consciousness, in which the Soul of Future Man grows and which is at the same time contained in the soul. The entire panorama of the future forms the material of the Soul of Future Man. It is the key to all-power, for a new creation can be embodied through this soul. And the energy of this omnipotence is love. Allencompassing love which can be materialised and so makes the entire universe into an expression, a materialisation of love. For this reason the supramental power is woven of love. The world will initially appear as a multitudinous flowing energy field. Even solid objects no longer seem to be solid. Rather do we perceive the principle or the relative consciousness which stands behind every particular energy formation.

AS soon as the awareness and Soul of Future Man begin to manifest in the first individuals, a new physical reality is revealed to these nascent Future Men and allows them to serve as magnets and points of attraction for the further development, concretisation and materialisation of the new forces. This power of cohesion and synthesis is based on the increasing materialisation of the soul and its forces in the body and in the physical world, so that the transmundane state of the world, the experience of the higher divine world and the knowledge of the gods are combined with a receptivity for the supramental forces and their mode of existence in the physical world to produce an unified mode of being in mental, vital and bodily incarnation.

This way of life of Future Man means that the incarnating soul increasingly lives the higher reality of the gods and the supramental world and brings it down to earth. It assumes a material body or develops it so that it becomes progressively able to express the realities of higher worlds on the earth.

The result is a bridging of all separation between the supracorporeal, immortal existence of the soul and the mortal life so that a new immortal body is created, capable of fully expressing the Divine Consciousness. For this reason we can say that the -Consciousness presence of Future Man links the supramental world with the material world. This link itself corresponds to the progressive embodiment of the Supramental Real Idea or the Consciousness of Truth in the individual body and the transmission to the larger human famity by the functions of the New Body.

The dimensions in which the progressively materialising Soul of Future Man can express itself comprise the following in a single Supramental Consciousness: the consciousness of Future Man, all the experience and knowledge of the archetypal ideal world of the gods plus the evolutive incarnation-world of man. Man came increasingly under the influence of the archetypal world of the gods in his mental ascent through the ideal and higher planes and so expressed a spark of this immutable principle in his ideals of harmony and beauty but also of destruction and struggle.

The arising of the Soul of the Future Man gives us a consciousness and intelligence of the gnosis — the Truth Consciousness which also embodies in its supramental force all the power of the higher ideal world of the gods. It is an intelligence which can express the creativity of the superearthly upon the earth. The limited mental ascent to the plane of the gods will be replaced by a complete Psychic Incarnation of their powers on earth and the Soul of Future Man will link these ideal forces to the evolutionary life-forces of the material world, so that substance and knowledge become the reality of the future as a single supramental realisation.

This newly incarnating being has an intelligence far beyond the traditional form. The Intelligence of Future Man, or rather his consciousness, is the Supramental Intelligence of the Spirit, the perfect unity of Knowledge and Will which is revealed on all levels of creation right down to the apparent unconsciousness of matter as its central principle. This supramental force of the spirit world which is contained in the hidden development of worlds, the evolution of life and mind, which maintains all these forms or gives rise to them as parts of itself, will become an effective force in the consciousness of Future Man. It will no longer be hidden but will work directly and create its own means of expression. It is the gnosis of the spirit, master of its own cosmos. Knowing itself, the supramental nature knows all things, for all things are the coming-into-being and development of its own force.

It knows all things directly and completely, from the inside, in their own truth and in their relation to things. A spontaneous knowledge of the whole and all its details. This complete perception of the multiplicity in unity and unity in multiplicity, and the force of unity grounded securely in itself brings forth multiplicity as the expression of its completeness and is graduated through the world of the gods to become a directly active force, which is unlimited in essence but can limit its expression for a particular purpose. The ordering force of the divine beings in the universe is thus a delegated force of the supramental omnipotence and omniscience of the spirit. When embodied in the Soul of Future Man, this gradation becomes a physically individualised reality and a vibration of capacities in his -consciousness.

These vibrations reach, with the fully activated intensity of the supramental world, from the highest level of the Spirit down to the deepest abyss of Matter. A primal vibration, simultaneously motion and sound, emerges in its totality of knowledge and will from the complete Supramental -Substance of the Consciousness of Future Man which is the perfect knowledge of the One and the complete power of the expression or will of the One in all possibilities. An all-powerful creative motion, a vibration, is set up in an infinite space of supramental glory. It is experienced as a the sum of all the sounds of the world, the consciousness or divinity which bears in itself the creative resolution.

This is the great divinity — as ancient Indian science of the supranatural named it — in his innumerable aspects.

An all-creative light-energy field sounds forth as a knowledge, a hymn of immortality from the supramental consciousness. This highest divinity, which represents the highest stage of the experiential mind, becomes a perfect force of the New World in its supramental embodiment in Future Man, manifesting its divinity in the motion and voice of the New Body, in the vibrations of its cells and the intensity of its nerves and energies.

The creative word and chant and the divinity which are the bearers of this knowledge. It is the beginning of the creation and the birth of the divinities who stand at the origin of creation and are represented as a great quaternity with innumerable names: consciousness and light, bliss, truth, life.

Thus, in the body of the materialising Soul of Future Man, this knowledge-power and the power of the divinities become the word of truth and the poetry of truth, the sound and intensity of the supramental speech which moves the world and incarnates the consciousness of truth, syllable by syllable. For the speech of Future Man is truth and thus has the power to manifest Truth in the world. With the bliss of the gods, his words will strike the yearning soul of an awakening humanity and will never lose their consciousness-expanding qualities. The further stages of the self-organising supramental creation now reveal the divine powers which prevail behind colour and form, the play of infinite worlds and arts, the manifesting forces whose magic lines guard the sublime blueprint of the future and the fundamental principle of the world’s structure. In the New Body of Future Man these powers and divinities receive their supramental perfection in the individual in the form of an ability to bring forth an impeccable physical beauty, a divine mastery of the secrets of colour and line, structure and rhythm in form and plan — Mandala. Their touch will cause the consciousness of truth to sound forth in every line and curve and point, to radiate forth in every colour.

All cosmic forces are integrated in its formation to a cadence of supramental perfection, beauty and harmony. The higher ideal world of the gods and goddesses and their super-earthly force receive, through their embodiment in the Soul of Future Man, a further graduation of supramental perfection in their power over the nature of space and form and volume — Yantra. The indwelling divinities in the structure and special configuration of worlds of perfect space, the sacred measure, inner dimension and perfect curvature which links that space to all things, and the miracle of an absolute temple of divinity in eternal time, gather together to a harmonious world-creation in the Soul of Future Man. Sublime archetypes of immense power of the eternal in matter, form and volume, they fill the limbs, form and matter of the new body with the supramental intensity of imperturbable peace and stability.

The dimensions in which Future Man’s Soul expresses itself combine to form the ideal body through which the supramental force and consciousness manifest on earth under individual conditions. They form the subtle medium and the fine supramental substance in which all divine worlds move in their supramental perfection. In it they can gather up their wealth under the aegis of the Supramental Real-Idea or the idea of truth-awareness in the Soul of Future Man, to realise a perfect creation. This ideal body and its divine capacities come into action after the preparatory stage which worked on the matter of the physical body, its nerves and cells, increasingly affecting its structure.

The ideal body will in ever greater measure interpenetrate and influence the transient substance and raise it to a state of immortality, into a consciousness of progressive perfection, so that the transmundane state of the soul and the mundane state combine under various mental, vital and physical conditions to form a new mode of being, a -progressive materialisation of the Consciousness of Future Man in an immortal body. All which at an earlier mental stage was regarded as superearthly existence, as a divine world separated from man’s earthly mode of being and existing in a higher realm, -becomes an experienced reality in a New Body. Or rather in a bodily existence which forms a transition towards a body ever more like the ideal body, partaking ever more of its qualities.

The passage into physical birth is therefore, in the new supramental creation, a conscious incarnation of the divine powers of the gods in a mortal body which houses from its inception a soul aware of its immortality, using this fragile and transient material with the passion of the spirit and its invincible power, Divine, to permeate it with the pure flame of Supramental Truth and to transmute it into an immortal vessel for the deathless godhead. It is an awakening of the human soul to become the Soul of Future Man, a transformation, a leap onto the immense potentials of a transformed world.

It is accompanied by a liberation from all bonds, creating the New World from a certain point of one’s life so that either by a gradual process or by a sudden awakening to material divinity, new life and a new form and substance is imparted to the material body. Or it may be a direct materialisation of the ideal body, the completed birth of Future Man. It is in any case the start of a new creation, which begins the conquest of the mortal world with the glory of its Supramental Manifestation. Its first dawn is felt by individuals, by adventurers of consciousness, by researchers and scientists, by the knowers of the immediate future which is about to be born. Whatever form this entry point into the new creation will take, will help to give birth to the Soul of Future Man in their bodily life.

They will begin together with the great worlds of the gods, to bring world harmony into being. They will have the creative touch, the capacity, talent and genius to fulfill the sublime message, the indescribable form and the light and knowledge and plan of the future, making it tangible for a seeking humanity. Thus the Soul of Future Man begins to embody its consciousness and to assume or develop a form which condenses and realises in itself the key and the knowledge of the transformation of the world and of matter and the buildup of the new world.

The ideal body and the forces of all worlds are conjoined in the Consciousness of Future Man with matter, teaching it supramental perfection. Thus, the immersion into the incarnation world of the earth plane is the birth of the true individual, the unique being aware of his divine origin who now begins to manifest, step by step, the limitless possibilities of this origin within material evolution. It is the beginning of the science of the future, the Science of Transformation, which conjoins three paths to solve the task of transformation.

The tremendous rise of global movements and their ever increasing convergence appears to have led to the disappearance of this unity to external observation and its replacement by restrictive specialisation. Divisions and separations of this kind arose from the necessity of keeping pace mentally with the new developments continually appearing in all sectors. From a superficial view, we have been forced to adopt these stopgap measures by the inadequacy of our backward methods of education and training and by their lack of balance. But in truth this helplessness is due to the meeting with the force of a new evolutionary epoch which has not yet fully arrived.

And when man’s mentality begins to open itself consciously to its Supramental Potential and thus cooperates with the New Dimension of awareness which is at work in the earth’s atmosphere, the time and the need for separation and division will be over. The mental crisis is dearly visible ever since the sudden acceleration in material progress has begun under the action of the new forces, but it has not — or not yet — been balanced by corresponding spiritual progress in humanity at large.

The result is thus a momentary but not inevitable psychological crisis, a global crisis of adaptation to the New Consciousness. It manifests in the helpless efforts made to impose a rigid monolithic outer organisation onto global forces rather than allow a flexible inner unification with the activity of these forces. This development has taken place because almost all fields of knowledge have lost their original unity in their relation to man and the divine and have become ever more self-enclosed, referring to an inhuman or rather an – unsouled conception of perfection which is increasingly becoming destructive for humanity.

If they can manipulate humanity into a state of fear, as they have, they make the vibrational connection which allows them to control the human psyche. The more they can keep you coming from the left side of the brain, the more easily you can be controlled and manipulated, and the easier it is to distract you from finding out who you truly are and what you are truly doing here. The leaft brain is also the core that is using fear to stay in control and power, and fear is also the component that opens up the channels for mental negative programming of the mind. The powers that are using computers to dumb down the masses and the next generation. Computers eliminate all right-side brain activity. The right side is the side that produces creativity, innovation, intuition, imagination, and insight, and these aspects go hand in hand with consciousness, creating, and the essence of your soul. This enables the expanding of a collective ego and disconnecting the powers and spiritual progress of collective soul reality.

Ego and mass consciousness is the author and creator of ignorance, and ego is also the creator of fear.

Alchemical theory states that eternal wisdom remains dormant in humanity so long as a mundane state of ignorance and superficiality exists. The objective of alchemy is the uncovering of this inner wisdom, and the removal of veils and obstacles between the mind and its intrinsically pure divine source.

The goal of alchemy is called the Magnum Opus, or the Great Work. It is the purification and evolution of something lesser and coarser, into something greater and more refined—whether in metals, vegetable matter, or in human consciousness. The term prima materia, or “first matter;’ is used to describe the original substance and condition of whatever material the alchemist is trying to change, be it lead or his own soul. Through the alchemical art, this first matter is transformed into the Philosopher’s Stone—the highest most perfect form of matter—it is the first matter elevated to the Godhead. This process is often symbolized by the transformation of lead (the darkest, heaviest, and least valuable of the metals) into pure gold, the most brilliant and valuable of metals.

Although alchemy suggests the pursuit of a formula for condensing gold, true alchemy is the quest for spiritual illumination. We dissolve the mist of illusion — the “cloud of unknowing” — that lies between our conscious mind and our “divine. The veil of ignorance is the veil of the ego thay clouds reality and the divine nature of Man.

The ordinary human consciousness is obstructed, blind, unconscious, a play of illusions (maya). The ordinary human consciousness is also the “leaden consciousness” that is in action in the human daily living. This leaden consciousness can be transmuted and transformed into higher levels of consciousness or the gold consciouness (Buddha or Christ state of Consciousness).

The Agnya Chakra is placed at their crossing point, and controls the pituitary and pineal bodies in the gross. Thus the pituitary controls the ego, and the pineal controls the superego. The pineal which controls the superego is over-developed in animals. In human beings there is balance between the ego and superego, by which both the ego and superego come to the centre on top of the brain near the fontanel bone.

The complete covering of the brain and the calcification of the fontanel bone separates human beings from the All-pervading Divine Power. In this way humans develop their “I-ness” or own identity. When both ego and superego are balanced by the temperate life of devotion of a householder, the Kundalini awakened through Yoga, breaks through the centre of the brain. She takes the attention of the seeker into the All-pervading Power, the Universal Unconscious. His attention moves onto the left or the right side of the system according to the nature of his activity. Any energy that is needed for this activity comes from the Ida or Pingala Nadis, and the Deities which are placed at the centre of the chakras (see Figure) decide the appropriate mode of action. The two parabolae of energy emerge from the two sides on the Pingala and Ida Nadis, one in a clockwise direction, the other in an anti-clockwise direction. The energy needed is transformed by the Deities. They are in contact with the seats of the subtle centers (Peethas) in the brain, and also with the auras of the Spirit that encircle the Divine Spirit (Atma) in the heart.

Until you are able to understand the meaning of the Self, the physical body would remain imperfect and would be unable to verify the truth. But once the physical instrument is connected with truth you are able to verify the Truth.

It is very important to understand that until the animal stage there was no need for animals to solve the problem of life as animals were under the complete command of God. At the human stage, however, as we learn from the story of Adam and Eve, they were given the choice and freedom to solve the problem of life itself. That was how evolution was to go a step further. Without such freedom human beings were not equipped to learn the secrets of Divine Power.

The ultimate in Opposites, the empirical ego and complex and the transcendent totality of the Self are brought together in the third, making the paradox of an apparent duality into a unity. The subject or individual soul who experiences the totality of the Self is both the same yet also different from its source, and it is also the same yet different from the opposites in the ego complexes that have been united. In The Symbolic Life , Jung reiterates that the Self is the central archetype, and equates it with the Deity. He again uses Christ as the epitome of the whole man whose crucifixion represents the process of uniting the opposites. In this reference Christ is “the model for the human answers and his symbol is the cross, the union of the opposites” . The work of seeing and understanding and thereby uniting the opposites in soul is the discovery of the “middle way,” or individuation, which is a conscious journey back to unity. It is a “task left to man, and that is the reason why man is so important to God that he decided to become a man himself’. Without the opposites of the complex experienced in the ego there is no material for transformation.

Ancient alchemists worked to turn lead into gold, which was to turn heavy and base metal into metallic light. The great psychologist Carl Jung explained this alchemical pro-cess as a metaphor for transforming the dark matter of the unconscious into the pure gold of the integrated self — for turning our own internal darkness into light. The universe reflects an alchemical process of transform-ing matter into consciousness, which we could call the ‘alchemy of light’. From mineral to plant, to animal, human and then to enlightened sage is a progressive evolution of the light of consciousness.

This ability to extract consciousness from matter is the internal alchemy of light. Our lives are part of this churning process, to bring the light out of darkness, to bring our soul out of our bodily density and inertia. Through the inner light of awareness we can discover light, truth and beauty in all things, which is to return the world to God without any loss of diversity. All life is moving towards this alchemical transformation of consciousness. The process of evolution does not end with the human mind as we know it. The mind too must evolve further to its source — which is pure consciousness or pure light transcending all material forms.

We must move beyond our current dualistic thought-based intellect, trapped as it is in likes and dislikes, attractions and repulsions, opinions and prejudices to a greater unitary awareness. This pure light of universal consciousness is what great yogis and mystics have always sought to realize through their meditation practices. The universe is evolving toward enlightenment as its true goal. Our role as a species is to bring the evolutionary process to its decisive phase in which we consciously seek enlightenment, so that the plenary light of pure consciousness can come forth out of the half-light of the mind. This search for enlightenment is our real contribution to the evolutionary movement.

Slowly the path and its practices free us from our negative tendencies and give us access to more and more of our light, more of its consciousness. And as we diligently work upon ourself through our devotions and inner work—as we “polish the mirror of our heart”—so the light within us grows. And this light works its mysterious chemistry, opening life in unexpected ways, revealing more of its magic and wonder. Also, as our light grows, we attract a higher light, a light from the inner world of pure spirit.

This is the mystery of “light upon light” in which “light rises towards light and light comes down upon light.” The light within us and the light from above then work together, growing in strength and purity, helping us on our journey. In fact the journey is the light transforming us, revealing itself within and around us. What we think is our evolution is the evolution of the light of our true nature, expressing itself in our inner and outer life and expanding our consciousness.

There is a great difference between a consciousness that sees with the reflected light of the ego and one that sees with the true light of the Self. The ego exists in a world of distortions and patterns of control that are antithetical to the Self. The light of the Self burns away these distortions, though this is often a painful process—to become free of the many chains that bind us, we have to lose what we have believed most precious.

And so the journey continues, the eternal journey from darkness to light. This journey of the soul takes us Home, where it finally reveals that the light within us is the One Light. There is only one light—the light of the heavens and the earth is the light within our own heart. We are the light of God in the world. The light within our heart is His light. This simple truth of the union mystica finally takes the wayfarer from the prison of the ego into the ever-expanding dimension of our divine nature and its true purpose; and into a direct experience of the oneness of life.

This alchemical transformation from one conscious state to another consists of steps—concentration–contemplation—meditation. These specific layers allows the individual to move from the microcosm to the macrocosm—it moves the individual from the fragmented self to the complete self—it moves the individual from a one dimensional view point to a multidimensional view point—it moves the individual from the conscious mind to the super conscious mind.

“Its goal is nothing less than the total transformation of a seemingly limited physical, mental and emotional person into a fully illumined, thoroughly harmonized and perfected being—from an individual with likes and dislikes, pains and pleasures, successes and failures, to a sage of permanent peace, joy and selfless dedication to the entire creation.”

The yogis believed that this transformation was possible for all beings. They believed that through their fervent dedication to seeking the answers to unlocking the mind and expanding their consciousness, that their teachings would help to illuminate a path for all who seek to experience Oneness.

“The basic premise of Yoga is that our perception of the divine Self is obscured by the disturbances of the mind. If the mind can be made still and pure, the Self will automatically, instantaneously, shine forth.”

“When, through the practice of yoga, the mind ceases its restless movements, and becomes still, the aspirant realizes the Divine Higher Self.” Essentially, meditation is the conduit for creating mental space, to tap into the unknown reservoir that is your being, passing through the wormhole of your consciousness in an effort to allow your highest self —your true Self.

The world is in the throes of a new creation and the pangs of that new birth have made mother Earth restless. It is no longer a far-off ideal that our imagination struggles to visualise^ nor a prophecy that yet remains to be fulfilled. It is Here and Now.

Although we may not know it, the New Man — the divine race of humanity is already among us. Only a thin veil covers it. It marches just behind the line. It waits for an occasion to throw off the veil and place itself in the forefront. We are living in strenuous times inj which age-long institutions are going down and new forces rearing their heads, old habits are being cast off and new impulsions acquired. In every sphere of life, we see the urgent demand for a recasting, a fresh valuation of things.

From the base to the summit, from the economic and political life to the artistic and spiritual, humanity is being shaken to bring out a new expression and articulation. There is the hidden surge of a Power, the secret stress of a Spirit that can no longer suffer to remain in the shade and behind the mask, but wills to come out in the broad day-light and be recognised in its plenary virtues. That Power, that Spirit has been grow-ing and gathering its strength during all the millenniums that humanity has lived through. On the momentous day when man appeared on earth, the Higher Man also took his birth.

Since the hour the Spirit refused to be impri-soned in its animal sheath and came out as man, it approached by that very uplift a greater freedom and a vaster movement. It was the crest of that underground wave which peered over the surface from age to age, from clime to clime through the experiences of poets and prophets and sages—the Head of the Sacrificial Horse galloping towards the Dawn. And now the days of captivity or rather of inner preparation are at an end.

The voice in the wilderness was necessary, for it was a call and a communion in the silence of the soul. To-day the silence seeks utterance. To-day the shell is ripe enough to break and to bring out the mature and full-grown being. The king that was in hiding comes in glory and triumph, in his complete regalia. Another humanity is rising out of the -present human species. The beings of the new order are everywhere and it is they who will soon hold sway over earth, be the head .and front of the terrestrial evolution in the -cycle that is approaching as it was with man in the cycle that is passing away.

What will this new order of being be like ? It will be what man is not, also what man is. It will not be man, because it will overstep the limi-tations and incapacities inherent in man ; .and it will be man by the realisation of those fundamental aspirations and yearnings that have troubled and consoled the deeper strata —the soul—in him throughout the varied experiences of his terrestrial life.

The New Man will be Master—and not slave. He will be master, first, of himself and then of the world. Man as he actually is) is but a slave. He has no personal voice or choice ; the determining soul, in him is sleep-bound and hushed. He is a mere plaything in the hands of nature and circumstances. Therefore it is that Science has become his supreme; for science seeks to teach us the moods of Nature and the methods of propitiating her. Our actual ideal of man is that of the cleverest slave.

But the New Man will have found himself and by and according to his inner will, mould and create his world. He will not be in awe of Nature and in an attitude of perpetual apprehension and hesitation, but will ground himself on a secret harmony and union that will declare him as the lord. We will recognise the New Man by his very gait and manner, by a certain kingly ease and dominion in every shade of his expression.

Not that this sovereign power will have anything to do with aggression or over-bearingness. It will not be a power that feels itself only by creating an eternal opponent—by coming in constant clash with a rival, that seeks to gain victory by subju-gating. It will not be Nietzschean ” will to power,” which is, at best, a supreme Asuric power. It will rather be a Divine Power, for the strength it will exert and the victory it will achieve will not come from the ego—it is the ego which requires an object outside and against to feel and affirm itself—but it will come from a higher personal self which is one with the cosmic soul and therefore with other personal souls. The Asura, in spite of, or rather, because of his aggressive vehemence betrays a lack of the sovereign power that is calm and at ease and self-sufficient. The Devic power does not assert but simply accomplishes; the forces of the world act not as its opponent but as its instrument.

Thus the New Man shall affirm his individual sovereignty and do so to perfection by expressing through it his unity with the cosmic powers, with the infinite godhead. And by being Swarat Self-Master, he will become Samrat, world-master. This mastery will be effected not merely in will, but in mind and heart also. For the New Man will know not by the intellect which is egocentric and therefore limited, not by ratiocination which is an indirect and doubtful process, but by direct vision, an inner communion, a soul revelation.

The new knowledge will be vast and profound and creative, based as it will be upon the reality of things and not upon their shadows. Truth will shine through every experience and every utterance —” a truth shall have its seat on our speech and mind and hearing”, so have the Vedas said. The mind and intellect will not he active and constructive agents but the luminous channel of a self-luminous knowledge.

And the heart too which is now the field of passion and egoism will be cleared of its noise and obscurity ; a serener sky will shed its pure warmth and translucent glow. The knot will be rent asunder—Midyate hridaya granthih—and the vast and mighty streams of another ocean will flow through. We will love not merely those to whom we are akin but God’s crea-tures, one and all ; we will love not with the yearning and hunger of a mortal but with the wide and intense Rasa that lies in the divine identity of souls.

And the new society will be based not upon competition, nor even upon co-operation. It will not be an open conflict, neither will it be a convenient compromise of rival individual interests. It will be the organic expression of the collective soul of humanity, working and achieving through each and every individual soul its most wide winging freedom, manifesting the godhead that is proper to each and every one. It will be an organisation, most delicate and subtle and supple, the members of which will have no need to live upon one another but in and through one another. It will be, if you like, a henotheistic hierarchy in which everyone will be the greatest, since everyone is all and all everyone simultaneously.

The New Humanity will be something in the mould that we give to the gods. It will supply the link that we see missing between gods and men ; it will be the race of embodied gods. Man will attain that thing which has been his first desire and earliest dream, for which he coveted the gods—Im-mortality, amritatwam. The mortalities that cut and divide, limit and bind man make him the sorrowful being he is. These are due to his ignorance and weakness and egoism. These are due to his soul itself.

It is the soul that requires change, a new birth, as Christ demanded. Ours is a little soul that has severed itself from the larger and mightier self that it is. And therefore does it die every moment and even while living is afraid to live and so lives poorly and miser-ably. But the age is now upon us when the god-like soul anointed with its immortal’ royalties is ready to emerge and claim our salutation. The breath and the surge of the new creation cannot be mistaken. The question that comfronts us to-day is no longer whether the New Man, the Super-humanity, will come or if at all, when ; but the question we have to answer is who among us are ready to be its receptacle, its instrument and ’embodiment.


The difference between living organism and dead matter is that while the former is endowed with, creative activity, the latter has only passive receptivity. Life adds, synthetises, new-creates—gives more than what it receives ; matter only sums up, gathers, reflects, gives just what it receives. Life is living, glad and green through its creative genius. Creation in some form or other must be the core of everything that seeks vitality and growth, vigour and delight. Not only so, but a thing in order to be real must possess a creative function. We consi-der a shadow or an echo unreal precisely because they do not create but merely image or repeat, they do not bring out any-thing new but simply reflect what is given. The whole of existence is real because it is eternally creative. So the problem that concerns man, the riddle that humanity has to solve is how to find out and follow the path of creativity. If we are not to be dead matter nor mere shadowy illusions we must be creative.

Every individual soul, however placed it may be, is by nature creative; every individual being lives to discover and to create. The inmost reality of man is not a passive receptacle, a mere responsive medium but it is a dynamo—a power-station generating and throwing out energy that produces and creates.

Now the centre of this energy, the matrix of creativity is the soul itself, one’s own soul. If you want to create—live, grow and be real—find yourself, be yourself. The simple old wisdom still remains the eternal wisdom. It is because we fall off from our soul that we wander into side-paths, paths that do not belong to our real nature and hence that lead to imitation and repetition, decay and death. This is what happens to what we call common souls. The force of circumstances, the pressure of environment or simply the momentum of custom or habit. compel them to choose the easiest and the readiest way that may lie before them. They do not consult the demand of the inner being but the requirement of the moment. Our bodily needs, our vital hungers and our mental prejudices obsess and obscure the impulsions that thrill the hidden spirit.

We hasten to gratify the immediate and forget the eternal, we clutch at the shadow and let go the substance. We are carried away in the flux and tumult of life. It is a mixed and collective whirl—a Welt-Geist that :moves and governs us. We are helpless.straws drifting in the current. But manhood demands that we stop and pause, pull ourselves out of the Maelstrom and be what we are. We must shape things as we want and not allow things to shape us as they want. Let each take cognisance of the godhead that is within him—for self is God—and in the strength of the soul-divinity create his universe. It does not matter what sort of’ universe he creates, so long as he creates it.

The world has become dull and uniform and mechanical, since everybody endeavours to become not himself, but always somebody else. Imitation is servitude and servitude brings in grief. In one’s own soul lies the very height and profundity of a godhead. Each soul by bringing out the note that is his, makes for the most wondrous symphony. Once a man knows what he is and holds fast to it, refusing to be drawn away by any necessity or temptation, he begins to uncover himself, to do what his inmost nature demands and takes joy in, that is to say, begins to create.

Indeed there may be much difference in the forms that different souls take. But because each is itself, therefore each is grounded upon the iundamental equality of things. All our valuations are in reference to some standard or other set up with a particular end in view, but that is a question of the practical world which in no way takes away from the intrinsic value of the greatness of the soul. So long as the thing is there, the how of it does not matter. Infinite are the ways of manifestation and all of them the very highest and the most sublime, provided they are a manifestation of the soul itself, provided they rise and flow from the same level.

The cosmic soul is true. But that truth is borne out, effectuated only by the truth of the individual soul. When the individual soul becomes itself fully and integrally, by that very fact it becomes also the cosmic soul. The individuals are the channels through which flows the Universal and the Infinite in its multiple emphasis. Each is a particular figure, aspect— a particular angle of vision of All. The vision is entire and the figure perfect if it is not refracted by the lower and denser parts of our being. And for that the individual must first come to itself and shine in its opal clarity and translucency. Not to do what others do, but what your .soul impels you to do. Not to be others but your own self. Not to be anything but the very cosmic and infinite divinity of your soul. Therein lies your highest freedom and perfect delight. And there you are supremely creative. Each soul has a consort—Prakriti, Nature—wbhich it creates out of its own rib. And in this field of infinite creativity the soul lives, moves and has its being.

The Superman is one who has gone beyond good and evil (beyond the state of duality),” who has shaken off from his nature and character elements that are human, all too human ”-—who is the embodiment of life-force in its absolute purity and strength and freedom. This then is the mantra of the new age—Life with Intuition as its guide and not Reason and mechanical efficiency, not Man but Superman.

So if you have to transcend man, you have to transcend egoism also. For a conscious egoism is the very characteristic of man and by increaing yoursense of egoism you do not supersede man but simply aggrandise your humanity. The superman, if he is to be the man “who has surmounted himself””, must embody a poise of being in which all the three find a fusion and harmony—a perfect. synthesis.

Intuition is a sort of sympathy, community of feeling or sensibility with the urge of the life-reality. The difference between the sympathy of Instinct and the sympathy of Intuition being that while the former is an unconscious or semi-conscious power, the latter is illumined and self-cons-cious. Now this view emphasises only the feeling-tone of Intuition, the vital sensibility that attends the direct communion with the life movement. But Intuition is not only purified feeling and sensibility, it is also purified vision and knowledge. It unites us not only with the movement of life, but also opens out to our sight the Truths, the fundamental realities behind that movement.

Matter forms the lowest level of reality. Above it is the elan vital. Above the clan vital there is yet the domain of the Spirit. And the Spirit is a static substance and at the same ‘a dynamic creative power. It is Being (Sat) that realises or expresses itself through certain typal nuclei or nodi of cons-ciousness (chit) in a continuous becoming, in a flow of creative activity (ananda). The dynamism of the vital energy is only a re-fraction or precipitation of the dynamism of the spirit ; and so also static matter is only the substance of the spirit concretised and solidified. It is in an uplift both of matter and vital force to their prototypes—swarupa and swabhava—in the Spirit that lies the real transformation and transfiguration of the) humanity of man.

This is the truth that is trying to dawn upon the new age. Not matter but that which forms the substance of matter, not intellect but a vaster consciousness that informs the intellect, not man as he is, an aberration in the cosmic order, but as he may and shall be the embodiment and fulfilment of that order—this is the secret Intuition -which, as yet dimly envisaged, nevertheless secretly inspires all the human activities of to-day. Only, the truth is being interpreted, ‘as we have said, in terms of vital life. The intellectual and physical man gave us one aspect of the reality, but neither is the vital and psychical man the complete reality.

The one acquisition of this shifting of the view point has been that we are now in touch with the natural and deeper movement of humanity and not as before merely with its artificial scaffolding.

Certainly this does not go far enough into the motive of the change. The cosmic order does not mean mentalised vitalism which is also in its turn a section of the integral reality. It means the order of the spirit, it means the transfiguration of the physical, the vital and the intellectual into the supernal Substance, Powerand Light of that Spirit. The real transcendence of humanity is not the transcendence of one or other of its levels but the total transcendence to an altogether different status and the transmutation of humanity in the mould of that status— of the tranquil vision and delight and dynamism of the Spirit— the incarnation of a god-head.

The Spiritualized Psyche: Reclaiming the Inner World Through the Power of Truth

The philosophical tradition of alchemy, which has been practiced since antiquity, was purported to bestow profound miraculous powers upon its practitioners. These supposedly included knowledge of the fabled “philosopher’s stone,” a magical formula that could transform base metals such as lead into gold or, working as an elixir of life, bestow the gift of immortality on those who unlocked its secrets. Metaphorically this myth hints at the transformation of consciousness—conversion of the ordinary human mind (lead) into a reflection of the Eternal Living Mind (gold). For those embarked on the quest to enlighten their minds, psychological self-knowledge is of paramount importance. A good alchemist must know the substances he is working with, otherwise his experiments could blow up in his face. If you and I want to turn lead into gold, transform mortal human consciousness into higher consciousness (and access its attendant powers), we need to have a very clear and perhaps even new understanding of the human psyche.

Happiness and the Transformation of Negative Emotions

If the true secret of alchemy is the transformation of gross substances into something finer, then in the laboratory of our own consciousness we can practice the art of turning the lead of negative thoughts and emotions into pure gold. How can we entertain negativity and be happy at the same time? It is impossible. Our deepest fear is not that we are inadequate. Our deepest fear is that we are powerful beyond measure. Our light, not our darkness, frightens us most.

Shocking as it may seem to those enmeshed in cynicism, the key to the art of happiness is knowing how to turn the lock that keeps us addicted to our negative emotions, releasing and transforming the energy it takes to stay trapped in them into a positive force that can feed the soul. Transmuted negative energy has the power to fill us with the enlightened consciousness of pure happiness.

“When people live as part of the mass, nobody can help them; they are so intermingled that you cannot separate one atom from another. On the level of the mass they are all the same. People can only expect to meet with favorable influences when they rise from the mass, not before. Influences affecting the mass are only unfavorable; they are influences that keep it down. There are favorable influences that help individuals to get out, but they can only help men who stand a little above the mass. We can expect help, but only on a certain level; for what would be the value of our efforts if someone could take us by the ears and drag us up? If we become conscious, it is the same as having will on a higher level; and if we can ‘do’, we can isolate ourselves from many of these planetary influences which affect the mass.”

Psychology has the potential to be one of the West’s great contributions to the world mind. Unfortunately it has failed to fulfill its promise because it makes two terrible mistakes: it assumes that we are already conscious, and it takes the unconscious to be a reflection of the conscious “waking” mind. How can this be so if we are actually asleep in our so-called consciousness, as so many great spiritual teachers throughout the ages have stated? True wisdom, which is knowledge of the self, should lead to consistency in human behavior, for without that we shall remain instruments for the unconscious creation of fiwther chaos in the world, rather than being a blessing to ourselves and others. So study of the psyche is not simply a mental exercise or a dry indulgence in seeking information, but a practical solution to understanding ourselves and, by extension, our fellow human beings. This understanding of self and others is a result of knowing why you think and act the way you do.

To be unaffected by the collective mindset and unconscious behavior, the programming that turns people into compliance automatons within the social trance, we must become masters in our own houses. This we do by constantly moving our center of gravity, the focus of our attention, away from the peripheral circles (in our diagram of the psyche) containing weak “i’s,” and starting to inhabit the circles of consciousness closer to the center. This is where the power to master life resides within us. By progressively moving

“Go and proclaim liberty through all the land unto the people thereof!” The “land” is our body-mind organism, which is made of the elements of the Earth. And we seek liberty by freeing our consciousness from the automatism of being ruled by the untold myriads of thought impulses roaming not just in our mind, but in the world mind of which we are a part. It is up to us to say to the forces of delusion within ourselves, and the illusion through which we must operate to have our lives.

The Future of Mankind

In this evolution, the change of consciousness will precede the change in body. As a matter of fact, the latter will follow from the former. Thus human gradation will be preserved in this evolution, but the mental status will remain “as an open step towards the spiritual and supramental status”! The appearance of man upon earth has decisively changed the course of the process of evolution. Till now evolution was through the automatic operation of Nature. Man has substituted a conscious for a sub-conscious evolution. In pre-human stages, the force of consciousness was determined by the efficiency of the body. In man, this order has been reversed, as the evolution is now inner and spiritual.

The real foundation of existence is the consciousness, struggling to manifest knowledge. It is this consciousness in man which will lead him to the supramental knowledge and being. And this spiritual urge in man has always aspired not only after the spiritualization of his own being but a spiritual mastery of Nature and a divine descent in human collectivity. Had man been incapable of this change, he would have given place to superman. But if man can exceed himself, then he himself, will arive at supermind. This is also proved by the double evolution in Nature, the psychic as well as mental. Had the intention been the exclusive evolution of spirit and an escape into the other world, this mental evolution would have no sense.

The very fact ofthe evolution of mind shows that the intention of Nature is a comprehensive change of the being. This comprehensive purpose makes the spiritual advance more difficult, since it has to face all possible difficulties on account of the inertia of mind, life, and body.

This impediment often appears so insurmountable that spiritual impatience leads us to asceticism, illusionism and other-worldliness. This uncompromising spirit is necessary, as what is required is complete victory of spirit. Unless spiritual consciousness becomes fully established, its extension towards other parts of nature is always imperfect.

Realization of Triple Truth

The spiritual human society will realize the three essential truths of existence — God, Freedom and Unity, which are three aspects of one and the same truth. None of the three can be realized without the realization of the other two. “When man is able to see God and to possess him, then he will know real freedom and arrive at real unity, never otherwise.”” The spiritual society will live as a collective soul and not as a collective ego. It will be the outcome of the realization of God within and on this earth. All our social activities, education, science, ethics, art, economic and political structure, will aim at the realization of the Divine self in man. Science will discover the ways of the Spirit in the masses as well as behind them. Ethics will develop a divine nature in Man.

ASPIRITUAL evolution, an evolution of consciousness in Matter in a constant developing self-formation till the form can reveal the indwelling spirit, is then the keynote, the central significant motive of the terrestrial existence.

This significance is concealed at the outset by the involution of the Spirit, the Divine Reality, in a dense material Inconscience; a veil of Inconscience, a veil of insensibility of Matter hides the universal Consciousness Force which works within it, so that the Energy, which is the first form the Force of creation assumes in the physical universe, appears to be itself inconscient and yet does the works of a vast occult Intelligence.

The obscure mysterious creatrix ends indeed by delivering the secret consciousness out of its thick and tenebrous prison; but she delivers It slowly, little by little, in minute infinitesimal drops, in thin jets, in small vibrant concretions of energy and substance, of life, of mind, as if that were all she could get out through the crass obstacle, the dull reluctant medium of an inconscient stuff of existence. At first she houses herself in forms of Matter which appear to be altogether unconscious, then struggles towards mentality in the guise of living Matter and attains to it imperfectly in the conscious animal.

This consciousness is at first rudimentary, mostly a half subconscious or just conscious instinct; it develops slowly till in more organised forms of living Matter it reaches its climax of intelligence and exceeds itself in Man, the thinking animal who develops into the reasoning mental being but carries along with him even at his highest elevation the mould of original animality, the dead weight of subconscience of body, the downward pull of gravitation towards the original Inertia and Nescience, the control of an inconscient material Nature over his conscious evolution, its power for limitation, its law of difficult development, its immense force for retardation and frustration. This control by the original Inconscience over the consciousness emerging from it takes the general shape of a mentality struggling towards knowledge but itself, in what seems to be its fundamental nature, an Ignorance.

Thus hampered and burdened, mental man has still to evolve out of himself the fully conscious being, a divine manhood or a spiritual and supramental supennanhood which shall be the next product of the evolution. That transition will mark the passage from the evolution in the Ignorance to a greater evolution in the Knowledge, founded and proceeding in the light of the Superconscient and no longer in the darkness of the Ignorance and Inconscience.

This terrestrial evolutionary working of Nature from Matter to Mind and beyond it has a double process: there is an outward visible process of physical evolution with birth as its machinery, — for each evolved form of body housing its own evolved power of consciousness is maintained and kept in continuity by heredity; there is, at the same time, an invisible process of soul evolution with rebirth into ascending grades of form and consciousness as its machinery.

The first by itself would mean only a cosmic evolution; for the individual would be a quickly perishing instrument, and the race, a more abiding collective formulation, would be the real step in the progressive manifestation of the cosmic Inhabitant, the universal Spirit: rebirth is an indispensable condition for any long duration and evolution of the individual being in the earth existence. Each grade of cosmic manifestation, each type of form that can house the indwelling spirit, is turned by rebirth into a means for the individual soul.

The progress of Nature from Matter to Life, from Life to Mind, may be conceded: but there is no proof yet that Matter developed into Life or Life-energy into Mind-energy; all that can be conceded is that Life has manifested in Matter, Mind in living Matter. For there is no sufficient proof that any vegetable species developed into an animal existence or that any organisation of inanimate matter developed into a living organism.

Even if it be discovered hereafter that under certain chemical or other conditions life makes its appearance, all that will be established by this coincidence is that in certain physical circumstances life manifests, not that certain chemical conditions are constituents of life, are its elements or are the evolutionary cause of a transformation of inanimate into animate matter. Here as elsewhere each grade of being exists in itself and by itself, is manifested according to its own character by its own proper energy, and the gradations above or below it are not origins and resultant sequences but only degrees in the continuous scale of earth-nature. If it be asked, how then did all these various gradations and types of being come into existence, it can be answered that, fundamentally, they were manifested in Matter by the Consciousness-Force in it, by the power of the Real-Idea building its own significant fonts and types for the indwelling Spirit’s cosmic existence: the practical or physical method might vary considerably in different grades or stages, although a basic similarity of line may be visible; the creative Power might use not one but many processes or set many forces to act together.

In Matter the process is a creation of infinitesimals charged with an immense energy, their association by design and number, the manifestation of larger infinitesimals on that primary basis, the grouping and association of these together to found the appearance of sensible objects, earth, water, minerals, metals, the whole material kingdom. In life also the Consciousness-Force begins with infinitesimal forms of vegetable life and infinitesimal animalcules; it creates an original plasm and multiplies it, creates the living cell as a unit, creates other kinds of minute biological apparatus like the seed or the gene, uses always the same method of grouping and association so as to build by a various operation various living organisms. A constant creation of types is visible, but that is no indubitable proof of evolution.

A universal totality may also be considered as something complete in itself; as a totality, it has nothing to gain or to add to its fullness of being. But here the material world is not an integral totality, it is part of a whole, a grade in a gradation; it may admit in it, therefore, not only the presence of undeveloped immaterial principles or powers belonging to the whole that are involved within its matter, but also a descent into it of the same powers from the higher gradations of the system to deliver their kindred movements hem from the strictness of a material limitation.

A manifestation of the greater powers of Existence till the whole being itself is manifest in the material world in the terms of a higher, a spiritual creation, may be considered as the teleology of the evolution. This teleology does not bring in any factor that does not belong to the totality; it proposes only the realisation of the totality in the part.

There can be no objection to the admission of a teleological factor in a part movement of the universal totality, if the purpose, — not a purpose in the human sense, but the urge of an intrinsic Truth necessity conscious in the will of the indwelling Spirit, — is the perfect manifestation there of all the possibilities inherent in the total movement.

Ananda is the secret principle of all being and the support of all activity of being; but Ananda does not exclude a delight in the working out of a Truth inherent in being, immanent in the Force or Will of being, upheld in the hidden self-awareness of its Consciousness-Force which is the dynamic and executive agent of all its activities and the knower of their significance. A theory of spiritual evolution is not identical with a scientific theory of form-evolution and physical life-evolution; it must stand on its own inherent justification: it may accept the scientific account of physical evolution as a support or an element, but the support is not indispensable.

The scientific theory is concerned only with the outward and visible machinery and process, with the detail of Nature’s execution, with the physical development of things in Matter and the law of development of life and mind in Matter, its account of the process may have to be considerably changed or may be dropped altogether in the light of new discovery, but that will not affect the self-evident fact of a spiritual evolution, an evolution of Consciousness, a progression of the soul’s manifestation in material existence. In its outward aspects this is what the theory of evolution comes to, — there is in the scale of terrestrial existence a development of forms, of bodies, a progressively complex and competent organisation of matter, of life in matter, of consciousness in living matter; in this scale, the better organised the form, the more it is capable of housing a better organised, a more complex and capable, a more developed or evolved life and consciousness.

Once the evolutionary hypothesis is put forward and the facts supporting it are marshalled, this aspect of the terrestrial existence becomes so striking as to appear indisputable. The precise machinery by which this is done or the exact genealogy or chronological succession of types of being is a secondary, though in itself an interesting and important question; the development of one form of life out of a precedent less evolved form, natural selection, the struggle for life, the survival of acquired characteristics may or may not be accepted, but the fact of a successive creation with a developing plan in it is the one conclusion which is of primary consequence.

Another self-evident conclusion is that there is a graduated necessary succession in the evolution, first the evolution of Matter, next the evolution of Life in Matter, then the evolution of Mind in living Matter, and in this last stage an animal evolution follows by a human evolution. The first three terms of the succession are too evident to be disputable. It may be debated whether there was a succession of man to animal or a simultaneous initial development, man outstripping the animal in mind evolution; a theory has even been put forward that man was not the last, but the first and eldest of the animal species.

This priority of man is an ancient conception, but it was not universal; it is born of the sense of the clear supremacy of man among earthly creatures, the dignity of this supremacy seeming to demand a priority of birth: but in evolutionary fact the superior is not prior but posterior in appearance, the less developed precedes the more developed and prepares it. In fact, the idea of the priority of the lower forms of life is not altogether absent in ancient thinking.

The animal, in whom there is this less developed force of consciousness, is prior in creation; the more developed human consciousness, in which there is a greater force of kinetic mind-energy and light of perception, is a later creation. The Tantra speaks of a soul fallen from its status passing through many lacs of births in plant and animal forms before it can reach the human level and be ready for salvation. Here, again, there is implied the conception of vegetable and animal life-forms as the lower steps of a ladder, humanity as the last or culminating development of the conscious being, the fonn which the soul has to inhabit in order to be capable of the spiritual motive and a spiritual issue out of mentality, life and physicality. This is indeed the normal conception, and it recommends itself so strongly both to reason and intuition that it hardly needs debate, — the conclusion is almost unescapable.

It is against this background of a developing evolutionary process that we have to look at man, his origin and first appearance, his status in the manifestation. There are here two possibilities; either there was the sudden appearance of a human body and consciousness in the earth nature, an abrupt creation or independent automatic manifestation of reasoning mentality in the material world intervening upon a previous similar manifestation of subconscious life-forms and of living conscious bodies in Matter, or else there was an evolution of humanity out of animal being, slow perhaps in its preparation and in its stages of development, but with strong leaps of change at the decisive points of the transition.

The latter theory offers no difficulty: for it is certain that changes of characteristics in the type, though not of the fundamental type itself, can be brought about in species or genus, — indeed this has already been done by man himself and its possibilities are being strikingly worked out on a small scale by experimental Science, — and it may fairly be assumed that the secretly conscious Energy in Nature could effect large-scale operations of the kind and bring about considerable and decisive developments by means of its own creative conventions.

The necessary condition for the change from the normal animal to the human character of existence would be a development of the physical organisation which would capacitate a rapid progression, a reversal or turnover of the consciousness, a reaching to a new height and a looking down from it at the lower stages, a heightening and widening of capacity which would enable the being to take up the old animal faculties with a larger and more plastic, a human intelligence, and at the same time or later to develop greater and subtler powers proper to the new type of being, powers of reason, reflection, complex observation, organised invention, thought and discovery. If there is an emergent Consciousness-Force, there would be no difficulty in the transition, the instrument being provided, except the consciousness will always remain possible to the human being when the flame of the soul, the psychic kindling, becomes potent in heart and mind and the nature is ready.

The spiritual aspiration is innate in man; for he is. unlike the animal, aware of imperfection and limitation and feels that there is something to be attained beyond what he now is: this urge towards self-exceeding is not likely ever to die out totally in the race.

The human mental status will be always there, but it will be there not only as a degree in the scale of rebirth, but as an open step towards the spiritual and supramental status. It must be observed that the appearance of human mind and body on the earth marks a crucial step, a decisive change in the course and process of the evolution; it is not merely a continuation of the old lines.

Up till this advent of a developed thinking mind in Matter evolution had been effected, not by the self-aware aspiration, intention, will or seeking of the living being, but subconsciously or subliminally by the automatic operation of Nature. This was so because the evolution began from the Inconscience and the secret Consciousness had not emerged sufficiently from it to operate through the self-aware participating individual will of its living creature. But in man the necessary change has been made. —the being has become awake and aware of himself; there has been made manifest in Mind its will to develop, to grow in knowledge, to deepen the inner and widen the outer existence, to increase the capacities of the nature.

Man has seen that there can be a higher status of consciousness than his own; the evolutionary oestrus is there in his parts of mind and life, the aspiration to exceed himself is delivered and articulate within him: he has become conscious of a soul, discovered the self and spirit. In him, then, the substitution of a conscious for a subconscious evolution has become conceivable and practicable, and it may well be concluded that the aspiration, the urge, the persistent endeavour in him is a sure sign of Nature’s will for a higher way of fulfilment, the emergence of a greater status.

In the previous stages of the evolution Nature’s first care and effort had to be directed towards a change in the physical organisation, for only so could there be a change of consciousness; this was a necessity imposed by the insufficiency of the force of consciousness already in formation to effect a change in the body. But in man a reversal is possible, indeed inevitable; for it is through his consciousness, through its transmutation and no longer through a new bodily organism as a first instrumentation that the evolution can and must be effected.

In the inner reality of things a change of consciousness was always the major fact, the evolution has always had a spiritual significance and the physical change was only instrumental; but this relation was concealed by the first abnormal balance of the two factors, the body of the external Inconscience outweighing and obscuring in importance the spiritual element, the conscious being. But once the balance has been righted, it is no longer the change of body that must precede the change of consciousness; the consciousness, the mental being can only be a transitional being. If, then, man is incapable of exceeding mentality, he must be surpassed and supennind and superman must manifest and take the lead of the creation. But if his mind is capable of opening to what exceeds it, then there is no reason why man himself should not arrive at supermind and supermanhood or at least lend his mentality, life and body to an evolution of that greater term of the Spirit manifesting in Nature.

Occultism is in its essence man’s effort to arrive at a knowledge of secret truths and potentialities of Nature which will lift him out of slavery to his physical limits of being, an attempt in particular to possess and organise the mysterious, occult, outwardly still undeveloped direct power of Mind upon Life and of both Mind and Life over Matter.

There is at the same time an endeavour to establish communication with worlds and entities belonging to the supraphysical heights, depths and intermediate levels of cosmic Being and to utilise this communion for the mastery of a higher Truth and for a help to man in his will to make himself sovereign over Nature’s powers and forces.

This human aspiration takes its stand on the belief, intuition or intimation that we are not mere creatures of the mud, but souls, minds, wills that can know all the mysteries of this and every world and become not only Nature’s pupils but her adepts and masters.

The occultist sought to know the secret of physical things also and in this effort he furthered astronomy, created chemistry, gave an impulse to other sciences, for he utilised geometry also and the science of numbers; but still more he sought to know the secrets of supemature. In this sense occultism might be described as the science of the supernatural; but it is in fact only the discovery of the supraphysical, the surpassing of the material limit, — the heart of occultism is not the impossible chimera which hopes to go beyond or outside all force of Nature and make pure phantasy and arbitrary miracle omnipotently effective.

What seems to us supernatural is in fact either a spontaneous irruption of the phenomena of other Nature into physical Nature or, in the work of the occultist, a possession of the knowledge and power of the higher orders or grades of cosmic Being and Energy and the direction of their forces and processes towards the production of effects in the physical world by seizing on possibilities of interconnection and means for a material effectuality.

There are powers of the mind and the life-force which have not been included in Nature’s present systematisation of mind and life in matter, but are potential and can be brought to bear upon material things and happenings or even brought in and added to the present systematisation so as to enlarge the control of mind over our own life and body or to act on the minds, lives, bodies of others or on the movements of cosmic Forces.

The modern admission of hypnotism is an example of such a discovery and systematised application, — though still narrow and limited, limited by its method and formula, — of occult powers which otherwise touch us only by a casual or a hidden action whose process is unknown to us or imperfectly caught by a few; for we are all the time undergoing a battery of suggestions, thought suggestions, impulse suggestions, will suggestions, emotional and sensational suggestions, thought waves, life waves that come on us or into us from others or from the universal Energy, but act and produce their effects without our knowledge.

A systematised endeavour to know these movements and their law and possibilities, to master and use the power or Nature-force behind them or to protect ourselves from them would fall within one province of occultism: but it would only be a small part even of that province; for wide and multiple are the possible fields, uses, processes of this vast range of little explored Knowledge. In modem times, as physical Science enlarged its discoveries and released the secret material forces of Nature into an action governed by human knowledge for human use, occultism receded and was finally set aside on the ground that the physical alone is real and mind and life are only departmental activities of Matter.

On this basis, believing material Energy to be the key of all things, Science has attempted to move towards a control of mind and life processes by a knowledge of the material instrumentation and process of our normal and abnormal mind and life functionings and activities; the spiritual is ignored as only one form of mentality. It may be observed in passing that if this endeavour succeeded, it might not be without danger for the existence of the human race, even as now are certain other scientific discoveries misused or clumsily used by a humanity mentally and morally unready for the handling of powers so great and perilous; for it would be an artificial control applied without any knowledge of the secret forces which underlie and sustain our existence.

Occultism in the West could be thus easily pushed aside because it never reached its majority, never acquired ripeness and a philosophic or sound systematic foundation. It indulged too freely in the romance of the supernatural or made the mistake of concentrating its major effort on the discovery of formulas and effective modes for using supernormal powers. It deviated into magic white and black or into a romantic or thaumaturgic paraphernalia of occult mysticism and the exaggeration of what was after all a limited and scanty knowledge.

We speak of the evolution of Life in Matter, the evolution of Mind in Matter: but evolution is a word which merely states the phenomenon without explaining it. For there seems to be no reason why Life should evolve out of material elements or Mind out of living form, unless we accept the Vedantic solution that Life is already involved in Matter and Mind in Life because in essence Matter is a form of veiled Life. Life a form of veiled Consciousness.

And then there seems to be little objection to a farther step in the series and the admission that mental consciousness may itself be only a form and a veil of higher states which are beyond Mind. In that case, the unconquerable impulse of man towards God, Light, Bliss, Freedom, Immortality presents itself in its right place in the chain as simply the imperative impulse by which Nature is seeking to evolve beyond Mind, and appears to be as natural, true and just as the impulse towards Life which she has planted in certain forms of Matter or the impulse towards Mind which she has planted in certain forms of Life.

As there, so here, the impulse exists more or less obscurely in her different vessels with an ever-ascending series in the power of its will-to-be; as there, so here, it is gradually evolving and bound fully to evolve the necessary organs and faculties. As the impulse towards Mind ranges from the more sensitive reactions of Life in the metal and the plant up to its full organisation in man, so in man himself there is the same ascending series, the preparation, if nothing more, of a higher and divine life.

The animal is a living laboratory in which Nature has, it is said, worked out man. Man himself may well be a thinking and living laboratory in whom and with whose conscious co-operation she wills to work out the superman, the god.

Or shall we not say, rather, to manifest God? For if evolution is the progressive manifestation by Nature of that which slept or worked in her, involved, it is also the oven realisation of that which she secretly is. We cannot, then, bid her pause at a given stage of her evolution, nor have we the right to condemn with the religionist as perverse and presumptuous or with the rationalist as a disease or hallucination any intention she may evince or effort she may make to go beyond.

If it be we that Spirit is Involved in Matter and apparent Nature is secret God, then the manifestation of the divine in himself and the realisation of God within and without are the highest and most legitimate aim possible to man upon earth.

Thus the eternal paradox and etemal truth of a divine life in an animal body, an immortal aspiration or reality inhabiting a mortal tenement, a single and universal consciousness representing itself in limited minds and divided egos, a transcendent, indefinable, timeless and spaceless Being who alone renders time and space and cosmos possible, and in all these the higher truth realisable by the lower term, justify themselves to the deliberate reason as well as to the persistent instinct or intuition of mankind. Attempts are sometimes made to have done finally with questionings which have so often been declared insoluble by logical thought and to persuade men to limit their mental activities to the practical and immediate problems of their material existence in the universe; but such evasions are never permanent in their effect.

Mankind returns from them with a more vehement impulse of inquiry or a more violent hunger for an immediate solution. By that hunger mysticism profits and new religions arise to replace the old that have been destroyed or stripped of significance by a scepticism which itself could not satisfy because, although its business was inquiry, it was unwilling sufficiently to inquire. The attempt to deny or stifle a truth because it is yet obscure in its outward workings and too often represented by obscurantist superstition or a crude faith, is itself a kind of obscurantism.

The will to escape from a cosmic necessity because it is arduous, difficult to justify by immediate tangible results, slow in regulating its operations, must rum out eventually to have been no acceptance of the truth of Nature but a revolt against the secret, mightier will of the great Mother. It is better and more rational to accept what she will not allow us as a race to reject and lift it from the sphere of blind instinct, obscure intuition and random aspiration into the light of reason and an instructed and consciously self-guiding will.

And if there is any higher light of illumined intuition or self-revealing truth which is now in man either obstructed and inoperative or works with intermittent glancings as if from behind a veil or with occasional displays as of the northern lights in our material skies, then there also we need not fear to aspire. For it is likely that such is the next higher state of consciousness of which Mind is only a form and veil, and through the splendours of that light may lie the path of our progressive self-enlargement into whatever highest state is humanity’s ultimate resting-place.

The Unknown is not the Unknowable; it need not remain the unknown for us, unless we choose ignorance or persist in our first limitations. For to all things that are not unknowable, all things in the universe, there correspond in that universe faculties which can take cognisance of them, and in man, the microcosm, these faculties are always existent and at a certain stage capable of development. We may choose not to develop them; where they are partially developed, we may discourage and impose on them a kind of atrophy. But, fundamentally, all possible knowledge is knowledge within the power of humanity. And since in man there is the inalienable impulse of Nature towards self-realisation, no struggle of the intellect to limit the action of our capacities within a determined area can for ever prevail. When we have proved Matter and realised its secret capacities, the very knowledge which has found its convenience in that temporary limitation -“Forth now and push forward also in other fields.”

And still there is a beyond.

The first spiritual challenge is to overcome ignorance.

For on the other side of the cosmic consciousness there is, attainable to us, a consciousness yet more transcendent, — transcendent not only of the ego, but of the Cosmos itself, — against which the universe seems to stand out like a petty picture against an immeasurable background. That supports the universal activity, — or perhaps only tolerates it; It embraces Life with Its vastness, — or else rejects it from Its infinitude.

How to conquered the ignorance, overcome the veil of ignorance, and then breaks out of Its imprisonment in a separated individuality. becomes universal. assumes a cosmic consciousness in which it identifies itself with the self and spirit. the life, the mind. Mass consciousness is the state of ignorance or maya that controls the human mind or the ego. Mass consciousness is the Kingdom of The Ego. When man functions from the external energy of the ego, he does not relate to the consciousnesses within the inner self and the higher self. This man, in effect, does not know who he is. Therefore, man will search for his identity within the external energy forces of life.

ALL evolution is in essence a heightening of the force of consciousness in the manifest being so that it may be raised into the greater intensity of what is still unmanifest, from matter into life, from life into mind, from the mind into the spirit. It is this that must be the method of our growth from a mental into a spiritual and supramental manifestation, out of a still half-animal humanity into a divine being and a divine living.

There must be achieved a new spiritual height, wideness, depth, subtlety, intensity of our consciousness, of its substance, its force, its sensibility, an elevation, expansion, plasticity, integral capacity of our being, and an assumption of mind and all that is below mind into that larger existence. In a future transformation the character of the evolution, the principle of evolutionary process, although modified, will not fundamentally change but, on a vaster scale and in a liberated movement, royally continue.

A change into a higher consciousness or state of being is not only the whole aim and process of religion, of all higher askesis, of Yoga, but it is also the very trend of our life itself, the secret purpose found in the sum of its labour.

The principle of life in us seeks constantly to confirm and perfect itself on the planes of mind, vitality and body which it already possesses; but it is self-driven also to go beyond and transform these gains into means for the conscious spirit to unfold in Nature. If it is merely some part of ourselves, intellect, heart, will or vital desire-self, which, dissatisfied with its own imperfection and with the world, strives to get away from it to a greater height of existence, content to leave the rest of the nature to take care of itself or to perish, then such a result of total transformation would not eventuate — or, at least, would not eventuate here.

But this is not the integral trend of our existence; there is a labour of Nature in us to ascend with all ourself into a higher principle of being than it has yet evolved here, but it is not her whole will in this ascension to destroy herself in order that that higher principle may be exclusively affirmed by the rejection and extinction of Nature. To heighten the force of consciousness until it passes from a mental, vital and physical instrumentation into the essence and power of the spirit is the indispensable thing, but that is not the sole object or all the thing to be done.

Our call must be to live on a new height in all our being: we have not, in order to reach that height, to drop back our dynamic parts into the indeterminate stuff of Nature and abide by this liberating loss in a blissful quiescence of the Spirit; that can always be done and it brings a great repose and freedom, but what Nature herself attends from us is that the whole of what we are should rise into the spiritual consciousness and become a manifest and manifold power of the spirit.

It Is as he grows In mind and In proportion as his mind asserts Its selfhood and independence against the tyranny of life and matter, that he grows in stature. On one side, mind by Its emancipation controls and illumines the life and physicality: on the other, the purely mental aims. occupations, pursuits of knowledge begin to get a value.

The mind liberated from a lower control and preoccupation introduces into life a government, an uplifting, a refinement, a finer balance and harmony: the vital and physical movements are directed and put Into order. transformed even as far as they can be by a mental agency: they are taught to be the instruments of mason and obedient to an enlightened will, an ethical perception and an aesthetic intelligence: the more this can be accomplished, the more the race becomes truly human, a race of mental beings. It is this perception of life that was put in front by the Greek thinkers. and it is a vivid flowering in the sunlight of this ideal that Imparts so great a fascination to Hellenic life and culture.

In later times this perception was lost and, when it came back, it returned much diminished, mixed with more turbid elements: the perturbation of a spiritual ideal imperfectly grasped by the understanding and not at all realised in the life’s practice but present with Its positive and negative mental and moral influences, and over against it the pressure of a dominant. an inordinate vital urge which could not get its free self-satisfied movement. stood in the way of the sovereignty of the mind and the harmony of life, Its realised beauty and balance.

An opening to higher ideals, a greater range of life was gained, but the elements of a new idealism were only cast into its action as an influence, could not dominate and transform it and. finally, the spiritual endeavour, thus ill-understood and unrealised, was thrown aside: Its moral effects remained, but, deprived of the sustaining spiritual element, dwindled towards ineffectivity: the vital urge, assisted by an immense development of physical Intelligence, became the preoccupation of the race. An imposing increase of a certain kind of knowledge and efficiency was the first result: the most recent outcome has been a perilous spiritual ill-health and a vast disorder.

For mind itself is not enough; even its largest play of intelligence creates only a qualified half-light.

A surface mental knowledge of the physical universe is a still more imperfect guide: for the thinking animal it might be enough, but not for a race of mental beings in labour of a spiritual evolution.

Even the truth of physical things cannot be entirely known, nor can the right use of our material existence be discovered by physical Science and an outward knowledge alone or made possible by the mastery of physical and mechanical processes alone: to know, to use righdy we must go beyond the truth of physical phenomenon and process, we must know what is within and behind it.

For we are not merely embodied minds; there is a spiritual being, a spiritual principle, a spiritual plane of Nature. Into that we have to heighten our force of consciousness, to widen by that still more largely, even universally and infinitely, our range of being and our field of action, to take up by that our lower tile and use it for greater ends and on a larger plan.

Our labour of mind and struggle of life cannot come to any solution until we have gone beyond the obsessing lead of an inferior Nature, integralised our natural being in the being and consciousness, learned to utilise our natural instruments by the force and for the joy of the Spirit.

Then only can the constitutional ignorance. the ignorance of the real build of our existence from which we suffer, change into a we and effective knowledge of our being and becoming. For what we are is spirit, — at present using mind predominantly, life and body subordinately, with matter for our original field but not our only field of experience: but this is only at present.

Our imperfect mental instrumentation is not the last word of our possibilities; for there are in us, dormant or invisibly and imperfectly active other principles beyond mind and closer to the spiritual nature, there are more direct powers and luminous instruments, there is a higher status, there are greater ranges of dynamic action than those that belong to our present physical. vital and mental existence.

These can become our own status, part of our being, they can be principles, powers and instruments of our own enlarged nature. But for that it is not enough to be satisfied with a vague or an ecstatic ascent Into spirit or a formless exaltation through the touch of Its infinities; their principle has to evolve. as life has evolved as mind has evolved, and organise its own instrumentation, its own satisfaction. Then we shall possess the true constitution of our being and we shall have conquered the ignorance.

The conquest of our constitutional ignorance cannot be complete. cannot become integrally dynamic, if we have not conquered our psychological ignorance; for the two are bound up together. Our psychological ignorance consists in a limitation of our self-knowledge to that little wave or superficial stream of our being which Is the conscient waking self.

This pan of our being is an original flux of formless or only half-formulated movements carried on in an automatic continuity, supported and held together by an active surface memory and a passive underlying consciousness in its flow from moment to moment of time. organised and interpreted by our reason and our witnessing and participating intelligence. Behind it is an occult existence and energy of our secret being without which the superficial consciousness and activity could not have existed or acted.

In Matter only an activity is manifest, —inconscient in the outside of things which is all we know; for the indwelling Consciousness in Matter is secret, subliminal, not manifested in the inconscient form and the involved energy: but in us consciousness has become partly manifest. partly awake. But this consciousness is hedged and imperfect; it is bound by Its habitual self-limitation and moves in a restricted circle. — except when there are flashes. intimations or upsurgings from the secrecy within us which break the limits of the formation or flow beyond them or widen the circle. But these occasional visitations cannot enlarge us far beyond our present capacities. are not enough to revolutionise our status.

That can only be done if we can bring into it the higher undeveloped lights and powers potential in our being and get them consciously and normally into play: for this we must be able to draw freely from those ranges of our being to which they are native but which are at present subconscient or rather secretly intraconsclent and circumconscient or else superconscient to us. Or. — the yet more that is also possible. — we must enter into these inner and higher pans of ourselves by an inward plunge or disciplined penetration and bring back with us to the surface their secrets. Or, achieving a still more radical change of our consciousness, we must leant to live within and no longer on the surface and be and act from the inner depths and from a soul that has become sovereign over the nature.

That part of us which we can strictly call subconscient because it is below the level of mind and conscious life, inferior and obscure, covers the purely physical and vital elements of our constitution of bodily being, unmentalised, unobserved by the mind. uncontrolled by it in their action. It can be held to Include the dumb occult consciousness, dynamic but not sensed by us. which operates in the cells and nerves and all the corporeal stuff and adjusts their life process and automatic responses. It covers also those lowest functionings of submerged sense mind which are more operative in the animal and in plant life; in our evolution we have overpassed the need of any large organised action of this element, but It remains submerged and obscurely at work below our conscious nature.

This obscure activity extends to a hidden and hooded mental substratum Into which past impressions and all that Is rejected from the surface mind sink and remain there dormant and can surge up in sleep or in any absence of the mind, taking dream forms, forms of mechanical mind action or suggestion, forms of automatic vital reaction or impulse, forms of physical abnormality or nervous penurbance, bums of morbidity, disease, unbalance.

Out of the subconscious we bring ordinarily so much to the surface as our waking sense-mind and intelligence need for their purpose; in so bringing them up we are not aware of their nature, origin. operation and do not apprehend them in their own values but by a translation into the values of our waking human sense and intelligence.

But the risings of the subconscious, its effects upon the mind and body, are mostly automatic, uncalled for and involuntary: for we have no knowledge and therefore no control of the subconscient. It is only by an experience abnormal to us, most commonly in illness or some disturbance of balance. that we can become directly aware of something in the dumb world, dumb but very active, of our bodily being and vitality or grow conscious of the secret movements of the mechanical subhuman physical and vital mind which underlies our surface, — a consciousness which is ours but seems not ours because it Is not pan of our known mentality. This and much more lives concealed in the subconscience.

A descent into the subconscient would not help us to explore this region, for it would plunge us into incoherence or into sleep or a dull trance or a comatose torpor.

A mental scrutiny or insight can give us some indirect and constructive idea of these hidden activities: but it is only by drawing back into the subliminal or by ascending into the superconscient and from there looking down or extending ourselves into these obscure depths that we can become directly and totally aware and in control of the secrets of our subconscient physical, vital and mental nature.

This awareness, this control are of the utmost imponance. For the subconscient is the Inconscient in the process of becoming conscious: it is a support and even a root of our inferior pans of being and their movements. It sustains and reinforces all in us that clings most and refuses to change. our mechanical recurrences of unintelligent thought. our persistent obstinacies of feeling, sensation, impulse, propensity, our uncontrolled fixities of character.

The animal in us. — the infernal also, — has its lair of retreat in the dense jungle of the subconscience. To penetrate there, to bring in light and establish a control, is indispensable for the completeness of any higher life. for any integral transformation of the nature.

The part of us that we have characterised as intraconscient and circumconscient is a still more potent and much more valuable element in the constitution of our being. It includes the large action of an inner intelligence and inner sense-mind, of an inner vital, even of an inner subtle-physical being which upholds and embraces our waking consciousness, which is not brought to the front, which is subliminal, in the modem phrase.

But when we can enter and explore this hidden self, we find that our waking sense and intelligence are for the most part a selection from what we secretly are or can be, an exteriorised and much mutilated and vulgarised edition of our real, our hidden being or an upthrow from its depths.

Our surface being has been formed with this subliminal help by an evolution out of the Inconscient for the utility of our present mental and physical life on earth; this that is behind is a formation mediating between the Inconscient and the larger planes of Life and Mind which have been created by the involutionary descent and whose pressure has helped to bring about the evolution of mind and life in Matter.

Our surface responses to physical existence have at their back the support of an activity in these veiled parts, are often responses from them modified by a surface mental rendering. But also that large part of our mentality and vitality which is not a response to the outside world but lives for itself or throws itself out on material existence to use and Possess it, our personality, is the outcome, the amalgamated formulation of powers, influences, motives proceeding from this potent intraconscient secrecy.

Again, the subliminal extends itself into an enveloping consciousness through which it receives the shock of the currents and wave-circuits pouring upon us from the universal Mind, universal Life, universal subtler Matter-forces.

These, unperceived by us on the surface, are perceived and admitted by our subliminal self and turned into formations which can powerfully alien our existence without our knowledge. It the wall that separates this inner existence from the outer self were penetrated, we could know and deal with the sources of our present mind energies and life action and could control instead of undergoing their results.

But though large pans of it can be thus known by a penetration and looking within or a freer communication, it Is only by going inward behind the veil of superficial mind and living within, in an inner mind, an inner life, an inmost soul of our being that we can be fully self-aware, —by this and by rising to a higher plane of mind than that which our waking consciousness inhabits.

An enlargement and completion of our present evolutionary status, now still so hampered and truncated. would be the result of such an inward living: but an evolution beyond it can come only by our becoming conscious in what is now superconscient to us, by an ascension to the native heights of the Spirit. In the superconscience beyond our present level of awareness are included the higher planes of mental being as well as the native heights of supramental and pure spiritual being.

The first indispensable step in an upward evolution would be to elevate our force of consciousness into those higher parts of Mind from which we already receive, but without knowing the source, much of our larger mental movements, those, especially, that come with a greater power and light, the revelatory, the inspirational. the intuitive.

On these mental heights. in these largenesses. if the consciousness could succeed in reaching them or maintain and centre itself there, something of the direct presence and power of the spirit, something even — however secondary or indirect — of the supemiind could receive a first expression, could make itself initially manifest, could intervene in the government of our lower being and help to remould it.

Afterwards, by the force of that remoulded consciousness. the course of our evolution could rise by a sublimer ascent and get beyond the mental into the supramental and the supreme spiritual nature. It is possible without an actual ascent into these at present superconscient mental planes or without a constant or permanent living in them, by openness to them, by reception of their knowledge and influences, to get rid to a certain extent of our constitutional and psychological ignorance: it is possible to be aware of ourselves as spiritual beings and to spiritualise. though imperfecdy, our normal human life and consciousness.

There could be a conscious communication and guidance from this greater more luminous mentality and a reception of its enlightening and transforming forces. That is within the reach of the highly developed or the spiritually awakened human being: but it would not be more than a preliminary stage. To reach an integral self-knowledge. an entire consciousness and power of being, there is necessary an ascent beyond the plane of our normal mind. Such an ascent is at present possible in an absorbed superconscience; but that could lead only to an entry into the higher levels in a state of immobile or ecstatic trance. If the control of that highest spiritual being is to be brought Into our waking life, there must be a conscious heightening and widening into immense ranges of new being,

The being breaks out of Its imprisonment in a separated individuality. becomes universal. assumes a cosmic consciousness in which it identifies itself with the self and spirit. the life, the mind, the body of all beings. Or it breaks out upward into a supreme pinnacle and infinity and eternity of self-existence independent of its cosmic or its individual existence.

The ego collapses, losing Its wall of separation, into the cosmic immensity: or it falls into nothingness. unable to breathe in the heights of the spiritual ether. If something of its movements remains by habit of Nature, yet these also fall away and are replaced by a new impersonal-personal seeing, feeling, action.

This disappearance of the ego does not bring with it the destruction of our true individuality. our spiritual existence, for that was always universal and one with the Transcendence; but there is a transformation which replaces the separative ego by the Purusha, a conscious face and figure of the universal being and a self and power of the transcendent Divine in cosmic Nature.

In the same movement, by the very awakening into the spirit, there is a dissolution of the cosmic ignorance; for we have the knowledge of ourselves as our timeless immutable self possessing itself in cosmos and beyond cosmos: this knowledge becomes the basis of the Divine Play in time, reconciles the one and the many, the eternal unity and the eternal multiplicity, reunites the soul with God and discovers the Divine in the universe.

It is by this realisation that we can approach the Absolute as the source of all circumstances and relations, possess the world in ourselves in an inmost wideness and in a conscient dependence on its source, and by so taking it up raise it and realise through it the absolute values that converge into the Absolute. If our self-knowledge is thus made complete in all its essentials, our practical ignorance which in its extreme figures itself as wrong-doing, suffering, falsehood, error and is the cause of all life’s confusions and discords, will yield its place to the right will of self-knowledge and its false or imperfect values recede before the divine values of the true Consciousness-Force and Ananda.

For right consciousness, right action and right being, not in the imperfect human sense of our petty moralities but in the large and luminous movement of a divine living, the conditions are union with God, unity with all beings, a life governed and formed from within outwards in which the source of all thought, will and anion shall be the Spirit working through the truth and the divine law which are not built and constructed by the mind of Ignorance but are self-existent and spontaneous in their self-fulfilment, not so much a law as the truth acting in its own consciousness and in a free luminous plastic automatic process of its knowledge.

This would seem to be the method and the result of the conscious spiritual evolution; a transformation of the life of the Ignorance into the divine life of the truth-conscious spirit, a change from the mental into a spiritual and supramental way of being, a self-expansion out of the sevenfold ignorance into the sevenfold knowledge.

This transformation would be the natural completion of the upward process of Nature as it heightens the forces of consciousness from principle to higher principle until the highest, the spiritual principle, becomes expressed and dominant in her, takes up cosmic and individual existence on the lower planes into its truth and transforms all into a conscious manifestation of the Spirit.

The true individual, the spiritual being, emerges, individual yet universal, universal yet self-transcendent: life no longer appears as a formation of things and an anion of being created by the separative Ignorance.

Mass consciousness is the state of ignorance or maya that controls the human mind or the ego.

Mass consciousness is the Kingdom of The Ego. When man functions from the external energy of the ego, he does not relate to the consciousnesses within the inner self and the higher self. This man, in effect, does not know who he is. Therefore, man will search for his identity within the external energy forces of life. He is functioning within the external ego world so it is logical for him to create support for that ego self from that external world. External identity consciousness creates an external support system for man and his ego. Maintaining the collective unconsciousness of the mass of collective energy in a negative state of mind will only give more power to the ego making reconnection of the spiritual and God’s energy impossible. This “game” can be reversed by alchemy, meditation and spiritual knowledge.

Some people live in what is called “people bondage.” People bondage is when people cannot separate their personal lives from other people’s thoughts and opinions about them. Because they cannot separate the two, they are perpetually governed by the opinions of others.

When man functions from the external energy of the ego, he does not relate to the consciousnesses within the inner self and the higher self. This man, in effect, does not know who he is. Therefore, man will search for his identity within the external energy forces of life. He is functioning within the external ego world so it is logical for him to create support for that ego self from that external world. External identity consciousness creates an external support system for man and his ego. Some people live in what is called “people bondage.” People bondage is when people cannot separate their personal lives from other people’s thoughts and opinions about them. Because they cannot separate the two, they are perpetually governed by the opinions of others.

Mass consciousness creates alienation from the real higher self and identifying himself with the outer external ego of mass consciousness. The mass consciousness is the Kingdom of The Ego. The Teachers say that mass-is like a massive “cloud” encircling our planet and affects every single living thing upon the Earth. When Man becomes disconnected from the Divine state of mind, he/she becomes susceptible for negative mind programming of the masses and searching for guidance in the outer external world because the center of identity is not within, but in the external outer ego of mass consciousness.

The ego creates an entrapment through the mass-consciousness of limitation.

How does this control-matrix called “corporate thinking” work? We all desire to be accepted. Every one of us has an inherent need for the approbation and acknowledgment of others. Because the enemy knows this, as soon as he gets control of a group, he brings all who may object to his will under control using the fear of not being accepted. It is called the “fear of exclusion.” This type of fear is an intimidating fear.

Some people live in what is called “people bondage.” People bondage is when people cannot separate their personal lives from other people’s thoughts and opinions about them. Because they cannot separate the two, they are perpetually governed by the opinions of others.

Fear and intimidation controls mass consciousness, and producing a “corporate thought pattern”, that keep people in bondage and separation, and subconsciously this creates a fear of exclusion. This state of fear and intimidation is been affected through the “tribal consciousness” that is part of the lower matrix (ultra ego) and this mind-prison.

Then the ego has developed a reality based outer-exsternal support system it fears to be excluded from the state of ego-mass consciousness, and to not be excluded it confirms to the ego based beliefs system based on fear. The ego state and mass consciousness is a concepts based on duality and not Oneness, so fear prevents anyone to be strong enough to spiritual grow and progress out of the ego-duality-mass consciousness into higher state of consciousness and Christ Consciousness is a higher level of Consciousness not based on duality as the ego-concept.

For eons, human will has been controlled by the collective will. For example, the will of the tribe has dictated the will of its tribe members, i.e., “my will and tribal will are one.” However, the individualization process requires that we develop a sense of our own will. Only when we can make decisions based on our inner guidance (and not the outer external ego) can we liberate ourselves from the dictates of the collective will, external authorities, as well as the manipulative and exploitative political and economic systems.

This is also part of the strategy of organized gang stalking; they create a world were the support system is taken away just for make one to confirm to organized belief system of mass consciousness. This world and its ego-mind has created a reality were it controls everyone´s mind by endless of actions to distort, disturb and distract the daily life. When the organized gang stalkers has taken away the support system, it creates isolation, and then using methods of constant harassment, stalking and persecution, fear and ind intimation, and psychology of wickedness and collective gaslighting. The goal by taking away all forms of support system is to create a endless loop of negative feedback. It´s the action of destroying willpower, higher soul knowledge and break down the power of spiritual awakening. Its the action of a collective ego-mass consciousness of gaslighting.The god of this world and ego-mass consciousness has become the gaslighter.

Spiritual awakening in this world leads to persecution. Revealing their true self causes ridicule, persecution, and never ending insults of projections of being labeled as delusional or heretics against the false reality belief system within the mass of collective energy. This is the collective organized gang stalking. They constant stalking persecution and “shadowing”.

From an energetic perspective, when our electromagnetic field and psyche are merged with mass consciousness, the tribal mind controls our mind and emotions. We are at the mercy of the directives of our tribe. We thus make ourselves available to be manipulated and exploited by the prevailing social and economic system. In fact, we are not only dependent upon external authorities, we are open targets for their abuse. If we are a slave to external forces, our will is not free. Our individualization process and separation from group consciousness requires that we focus on ourselves and become masters of our own energy.

Maintaining the collective unconsciousness of the mass of collective energy in a negative state of mind will only give more power to the ego making reconnection of the spiritual and God’s energy impossible.

To live life only in the confines of the ego blinds an energy system from the truth and limits their full capacity of experiencing the splendors of Earth as directed by the energy of Creation. Once the mistrust of God’s energy occurred the ego took control. Mistrust is an illusion that the ego has used as a defense against itself.

The ego has developed false perceptions of trust that are reflections of the original break between the truth, God’s energy, and that of the ego based energy system. Since the ego is only a representation of the physical realm, it cannot be trusted to guide or to confide in because it is filled with too many smokescreens and illusions. Illusions are ways to poison true, unconditional love.

Worldly chaos throughout history is directly related to the mistrust in the ego. Trusting an unstable, illusionary unconscious guide—the ego, only creates confusion, dissension, chaos, and mistrust within the mass of collective energy. This mass of collective energy is also same energy that is in action within the organized gang stalking energy.

You are newcomers to the game and you miss a vital key, for your senses, and the essence of your physical world, structure reality in a particular way. You constantly translate data and, like interpreting a dream, condense the experience into physical boundaries, where you find you can explain less and less. We are leaving an age of limitation and entering an age of limitlessness). We are being manipulated to decode reality that keeps us limited and enslaved.

One of the main goals of those who seek to deny us our freedom is to block our divine energy from rising up to our brain stem, also known as the Mouth of God*. If a person is allowed to arrive freely and unhindered at a higher state of consciousness, they cannot be controlled and enslaved unconsciously. For this reason, much research, time, energy and effort has been made throughout the ages to create programs to specifically suppress the rising of human consciousness.

We, identifying ourselves with the body, create ignorance of this reality and misunderstanding that we are just physical and finite beings. This doubt and duality thus created between us and the Pure Self, the Divine Consciousness within, is called Spiritual Ignorance. In this ignorance, pain and doubt develops within. As one adopt the body and develop the identities of ego, Maya becomes the companion.

Spiritual wisdom is an antidote to ignorance. In other words, it is spiritual wisdom that can destroy the thick veil of ignorance. Once the ignorance is dispelled, the mind is purified of egoism and illumined with spiritual wisdom and its misunderstanding ends. Spiritual progress dissolves the ego and state of duality.

Spiritual ignorance is caused by maya. Spiritual ignorance is generally called as darkness. The Hindus call the ego Maya, the god of all illusions, whose function is to distract the mind from finding the Divine nature of Man.

Computers have taken over the world and manipulated people’s brains so they believe they’re living normal lives. The computer-generated dream world keeps the human population content and incapable of fighting for their freedom. Within your incarnation, your inner Soul Atom self is also called your Soul or Greater Soul. Also called Christ within. Your inner consciousness matrix in and of itself is called your Divine Self. Your outer consciousness matrix in and of itself is called your ego. The component of your outer consciousness ego which in and of itself still attuned to the lower Planetary animal matrixes if any, is called your it Your ego is also called your lesser soul. Your id is also called the Beast within. The mass consciousness is been govern and controlled by the political beast system or the matrix of the ego, and its goal is to keep humankind in a sleep stasis or the slumbering state of mind, or the enslaved state of reality, or the low vibrational frequencies of third dimensional reality. The goal is to keep humankind in the beast state or the desire consciousness of materialism.

This explains the strange but common impression that we are somehow alienated from ourselves or do not know ourselves. Attaining gnosis or liberation in the ultimate sense means uniting one’s outer consciousness with the inner, as Christ said: “When you make the two one, you will become the sons of man”. Out of this fusion a new divine force is been created and is then no longer a state were duality powers the mind and destiny of humankind.

If we want to raise our vibration, we need to prevent fear from controlling our state of being. When we find ourselves in a state of fear, we need to have a way to release fear. Learning to release fear is important because most people regularly experience fear in different forms, inducing seemingly challenging, difficult, and emotional situations that are not real but imagined. These fears keep us locked in the matrix, the morphogenetic grids of our awareness, of our active consciousness. It is also our collective consciousness that induces fears. This is how we create the vicious circle of fear in our lives.

Fears and intimidation blocks the access to easily obtain information.

When fear blocks the ability of visions, it prevents us from seeing reality as it is. and make true learning, or real change. It blocks and creates major restrictions to knowing the real Higher Self and creates an illusions one is living in a comfort zone, and when one start to leaving the comfort zone the ego reacts with negativity, fear, stress, anxiety or panic, and if one continues to progress against these emotions and thoughts, then the mass consciousness will start organized gang stalking actions (spiritual and psychological warfare to prevent one from make any changes and leaving the matrix).

When fear blocks visions, it blocks us from seeing reality as it is, and this blocks new input of information, and when this input of new information is blocked, this then blocks the process of learning, and when the learning process is blocked, then the ability to change is blocked, and when the ability of changed is blocked humankind is imprisoned in the looping matrix of old concepts of duality. Freedom is the ability evolving and freedom is the ability to be able to change. And this controls the 2 dna strands from progressing.

“Trauma-based mind control programming can be defined as systematic torture that blocks the victim’s capacity for conscious processing. Spiritial. psychological and politcal warfare of organized gang stalking creates a negative feedbacl loop that blocks new input of information. The ego and mass consciousness is same mind of action of the lower matrix humandkind is trapped and impsioned within. It not just the mind that is a mind prison – Earth has become a vibratory mind prison of low vibrational frequencies and thos holds back all human spiritual progress.

There was once a golden age of humanity. It was a time of harmony and bliss. Our ancient ancestors lived in perfect interconnectedness with each other and with the universe. There were no wars, no famines, no pollution; everyone just got along. Then the peace was rudely shattered. A sinister power began casting a dark shadow over humanity. A conspiracy was afoot. For millennia now, the conspirators have been secretly implementing an elaborate control system, designed to suppress our natural connection to the cosmos and keep us trapped in a state of constant fear and confusion. The modern world is a shrine to their hidden machinations. The mainstream media, the education system, science, politics, and Western medicine are all tools of the conspiracy, used to control our minds and keep us subservient.

Fear blocks visions and and it blocks new input of information, and when this input of new information is blocked, this then blocks the process of learning, and when the organized gang stalker program creates sleep deprivation this means; “When we don’t sleep well, we lose the ability to integrate and synthesize information and this hindering spiritual growth. The organized Gang stalking hindering the process of new information from be configurated into the human body system. The organized gang stalkers does have any education in these advanced methods of psychology and everyone seems to know hoe to use this knowledge. Darwin evolutionary theory may just be a deception. Feedback loops are the normal cycles of information integration. If a feedback loop is broken and the information being received cannot be processed and stored in the appropriate category within the stream of consciousness, then cognitive chaos arises. Organized Gang Stalking using gaslighting psychology and the goal is to create confusions in the mind, create breakdowns and triggering cognitive chaos. Organized Gang Stalking is th carnal mind in actions and w ithin the gang stalker.

Fear not just blocks the flow of energy, visions, it blocks the pathways and it blocks the source of information. Fear makes the alpha bridge to dissapear, and the alpha bridge carries the codes that the theta divine brain waves need to start healing the old evolutionary brain. When the alpha bridge is re-builded one get access to divine theta information of bliss, and through this new information; humankind can reprogram the whole brain and evolving new spiritual gifts.

When fear blocks visions its blocks the third eye of intuition. The power of intuition dissolves ego and duality. Insights and visions reveals the path to salvation and fear hindering this process and the archons prevent the soul from ascending and obstructing the pathway to higher consciousness, and therefore using all forms of negative, fear mongering, stress inducing, senstizing methods create harm by using harmful covert and overt methods of spiritual and psychological warfare (organized gang stalking).

Energy is information, and information is history. Its like the key and lock together. Ancient text then reveals there is three knots of ignorance and these blocks the natural flow of energy in the human body-system, and then energy is information, and information is the “history” humankind is trapped in and living in the state of ignorance or the slumbring state.

The ultimtate result of visionary insights is when duality becomes oneness and the principle is; the further backward you look, the further you can see forward. In the state of Oneness everything is experienced in present time (past and future becomes now). When humans abilities slowly disconnects from her roots of evolutionary history and evolutionary reference, in combination with lost of ability to self-reflection, and lowered levels of Consciousness it will be more difficult to see further in the plans of future. The logic is easy; to see forward you must have ability to see backwards. When they disconnected 10 of humans spiritial dna strand they disconnected their evolutionary references and their intuition, and therefore lost the abilty to see beyond the veil of ignorance, and this gives them the advantage to control and make humankind manageable and easier to keep them enslaved in the Matrix.

Energy, information is light and it has been social and genetic manipulated and enginered for eons and thosuends of years, generation after generation.

Book of Ephesians: “We are not contending against flesh and blood, but against the principalities, against the powers, against the world rulers of this present darkness, against the spiritual hosts of wickedness in the heavenly places” (6:12).

Fear lies at the very heart of much of ego’s driving force. As much as it may disguise, delude and deceive itself, fear is what drives the ego toward narcissism (control), arrogance (compensation) and defense.

The collective mass-narcissism keep humankind imprisoned in the dreamworld and illusions. If one convert the veil of ignorance that is in place is the collective mass-narcissism and this the materialistic three dimensional world, ignorance or narcissism is the state of mind when one don´t has the ability to see through the illusionary world of matter.

As the ego or the egoic mind is the matrix composed by all the thoughts, beliefs, concepts, ideas, biases and assumptions that you picked up along the way, are not yours and that create within you a false sense of self and a false notion of who you are, the “Higher Mind” is, in fact, your real mind, made of your true essence and it contains your most pure sense of self.

The masses are made up of individuals and to change the consciousness of the masses — the consciousness of the individual must alter. As we alter our consciousness and awareness, we will understand who we are, why we are here, and what part we are destined to play in creating this new age.

From that moment on, you will live in a state of Grace and the “Voice within” becomes your constant companion.

This is what is meant by the Kingdom is within. When you enter the Kingdom of understanding within yourselves. You are only a part of the illusion until you rise above it in spiritual awareness and understanding. Mass-consciousness has perpetuated the illusion only because mankind is no longer personally aware of God.

As the fourth dimensional energies begin to come into Earth, mankind can no longer neglect the practice of meditation. It is your pathway into the Kingdom. You must begin to still the outer conscious mind and align to the soul consciousness. As your vibrations spiral upward, wisdom, knowledge and Truth which would flow through you, can be received through your own alignment with your soul. All that you would ever need to know, you would know in an instant. Because when you are aligned with Universal Mind instead of mass-consciousness, then you have access to Universal Knowledge.

For Jesus, the kingdom of heaven was not a place. It was a particular level of consciousness, one we now call Christ Consciousness, the highest level of human awareness. We get there by a renewal of our minds, by putting on the mind that was in Christ.

Ego mass consciousness is not Christ Consciouness, even if the ego has become the god of this world. Christ Consciousness is not based on the concept of ego-reality and therefore cannot be the ego-mass consciouness or desire consciousness of materialism.

The ego’s logic, based on fear, will continue to create our destiny until we have made the choice to wake up. The ego’s desire for everyone in this world is for us to remain asleep so it can maintain control. The masses of people are like robots, or hypnotized subjects, blindly following the plan of the ego.

The Earthly Life Mind is immersed in the maya-hypnotized existence, remains in ignorance, deeming himself to be a physical being. The maya-hypnotized ego creates the distortions of reality or distortions of the powers within. The first distortion-error that man has made is believing that power is outside him, the second distortion-error is made through believing in the dying nature of man, and not the undying nature of the real Self/Soul. The third error-distortion of man´s mind is not limited by his physical body, although he usually thinks it is. But it is the intellect and the ego that bind him there. The human body system and chakra system has “three knots”. These knots are found within the energetic interior of our psychic system. They are problematic because they bind us in a state of ignorance, distort everything we experience, and lock up our wisdom. These mind-errors is the mind-illusions that distorts reality. Another term for illusions is “maya” and the “dream state” of the mind is the maya-hypnotized mind.

When man functions from the external energy of the ego, he does not relate to the consciousnesses within the inner self and the higher self. This man, in effect, does not know who he is. Therefore, man will search for his identity within the external energy forces of life. He is functioning within the external ego world so it is logical for him to create support for that ego self from that external world. External identity consciousness creates an external support system for man and his ego.

The battle of Armageddon – Armageddon is actually the battle between your outer ego-based consciousness and your inner Christ consciousness. Hence Apocalypsis means a taking away of a veil. The word apokaluptein, and consequently apocalypse, means “to unveil,” “to disclose,” and hence “to reveal.” In this sense, apocalypse means “revelation.”

The word apocalypse comes from the Greek prefix apo and the verb kaluptein. The verb kaluptein, from which the name of Calypso is derived, means “to hide,” “to conceal,” or “to veil.” The privative prefix apo, when joined to a verb, marks “away” or “off.” The word apokaluptein therefore means “to do away with” or “to take off that which” “hides,” “conceals,” or “veils.” Following from this philological development thus: the word apokaluptein, and consequently apocalypse, means “to unveil,” “to disclose,” and hence “to reveal.” In this sense, apocalypse means “revelation.”

Our physical bodies are evolving slowly, but much faster than normal evolution. The faster process is in our consciousness. Our consciousness is concerned with changing our beliefs and truths and that can happen reasonably quickly, but our ego personality does take time to adapt to new beliefs. Change is always a frightening concept to our ego as it means the ego has to let go of the control it has had in our lives.

The personality and negative ego interprets the reality for mass consciousness instead of the Soul, the Higher Self.

But this spiritual truth and true aim of his being is not allowed to appear till late in his journey: for the early preparatory business of man in the evolutionary steps of Nature is to affirm, to make distinct and rich, to possess firmly, powerfully and completely his own individuality. As a consequence, he has in the beginning principally to occupy himself with his own ego. In this egoistic phase of his evolution the world and others are less important to him than himself, are indeed only important as aids and occasions for his self-affirmation. God too at this stage is less important to him than he is to himself, and therefore in earlier formations, on the lower levels of religious development, God or the gods are treated as if they existed for man, as supreme instruments for the satisfaction of his desires, his helpers in his task of getting the world in which he lives to satisfy his needs and wants and ambitions.

This primary egoistic development with all its sins and violences and crudities is by no means to be regarded, in its proper place, as an evil or an error of Nature; it is necessary for man’s first work, the finding of his own individuality and its perfect disengagement from the lower subconscient in which the individual is overpowered by the mass consciousness of the world and entirely subject to the mechanical workings of Nature. Man the individual has to affirm, to distinguish his personality against Nature, to be powerfully himself, to evolve all his human capacities of force and knowledge and enjoyment so that he may turn them upon her and upon the world with more and more mastery and force; his self-discriminating egoism is given him as a means for this primary purpose. Until he has thus developed his individuality, his personality, his separate capacity, he cannot be fit for the greater work before him or successfully turn his faculties to higher, larger and more divine ends. He has to affirm himself in the Ignorance before he can perfect himself in the Knowledge.

For the initiation of the evolutionary emergence from the Inconscient works out by two forces, a secret cosmic consciousness and an individual consciousness manifest on the surface. The secret cosmic consciousness remains secret and subliminal to the surface individual; it organises itself on the surface by the creation of separate objects and beings. But while it organises the separate object and the body and mind of the individual being, it creates also collective powers of consciousness which are large subjective formations of cosmic Nature; but it does not provide for them an organised mind and body, it bases them on the group of individuals, develops for them a group mind, a changing yet continuous group body. It follows that only as the individuals become more and more conscious can the group-being also become more and more conscious; the growth of the individual is the indispensable means for the inner growth as distinguished from the outer force and expansion of the collective being.

This indeed is the dual importance of the individual that it is through him that the cosmic spirit organises its collective units and makes them self-expressive and progressive and through him that it raises Nature from the Inconscience to the Superconscience and exalts it to meet the Transcendent.

In the mass the collective consciousness is near to the Inconscient; it has a subconscious, an obscure and mute movement which needs the individual to express it, to bring it to light, to organise it and make it effective. The mass consciousness by itself moves by a vague, half-formed or unformed subliminal and commonly subconscient impulse rising to the surface; it is prone to a blind or half-seeing unanimity which suppresses the individual in the common movement: if it thinks, it is by the motto, the slogan, the watchword, the common crude or formed idea, the traditional, the accepted customary notion; it acts, when not by instinct or on impulse, then by the rule of the pack, the herd mentality, the type law.

This mass consciousness, life, action can be extraordinarily effective if it can find an individual or a few powerful individuals to embody, express, lead, organise it; its sudden crowd-movements can also be irresistible for the moment like the motion of an avalanche or the rush of a tempest. The suppression or entire subordination of the individual in the mass consciousness can give a great practical efficiency to a nation or a community if the subliminal collective being can build a binding tradition or find a group, a class, a head to embody its spirit and direction; the strength of powerful military states, of communities with a tense and austere culture rigidly imposed on its individuals, the success of the great world-conquerors, had behind it this secret of Nature. But this is an efficiency of the outer life, and that life is not the highest or last term of our being.

There is a mind in us, there is a soul and spirit, and our life has no true value if it has not in it a growing consciousness, a developing mind, and if life and mind are not an expression, an instrument, a means of liberation and fulfilment for the soul, the indwelling Spirit. But the progress of the mind, the growth of the soul, even of the mind and soul of the collectivity, depends on the individual, on his sufficient freedom and independence, on his separate power to express and bring into being what is still unexpressed in the mass, still undeveloped from the subconscience or not yet brought out from within or brought down from the Superconscience.

The collectivity is a mass, a field of formation; the individual is the diviner of truth, the form-maker, the creator. In the crowd the individual loses his inner direction and becomes a cell of the mass body moved by the collective will or idea or the mass impulse. He has to stand apart, affirm his separate reality in the whole, his own mind emerging from the common mentality, his own life distinguishing itself in the common life-uniformity, even as his body has developed something unique and recognisable in the common physicality. He has, even, in the end to retire into himself in order to find himself, and it is only when he has found himself that he can become spiritually one with all; if he tries to achieve that oneness in the mind, in the vital, in the physical and has not yet a sufficiently strong individuality, he may be overpowered by the mass consciousness and lose his soul fulfilment, his mind fulfilment, his life fulfilment, become only a cell of the mass body.

Mass consciouness creates alienation from the real self. Some people live in what is called “people bondage.” People bondage is when people cannot separate their personal lives from other people’s thoughts and opinions about them. Because they cannot separate the two, they are perpetually governed by the opinions of others. People losing their connection to the divine source of identity and become the mass consciousness which is disconnected from the divine state of Consciousness. Then the ego is mass consciousness and the external outer ego it prevents humans from re-connect or re-wiring to their inner higher divine self. The ego creates a separation and working as veil of ignorance and the actions of this is to constant obstructing, constant harassing, constant interfering, or constant organized gang stalking. The ego and mass consciousness is today´s organized gang stalking, or organized bullying, or organized collective gaslighting.

When man functions from the external energy of the ego, he does not relate to the consciousnesses within the inner self and the higher self. This man, in effect, does not know who he is. Therefore, man will search for his identity within the external energy forces of life. He is functioning within the external ego world so it is logical for him to create support for that ego self from that external world. External identity consciousness creates an external support system for man and his ego. Some people live in what is called “people bondage.” People bondage is when people cannot separate their personal lives from other people’s thoughts and opinions about them. Because they cannot separate the two, they are perpetually governed by the opinions of others.

The collective being may then become strong and dominant, but it is likely to lose its plasticity, its evolutionary movement: the great evolutionary periods of humanity have taken place in communities where the individual became active, mentally, vitally or spiritually alive. For this reason Nature invented the ego that the individual might disengage himself from the inconscience or subconscience of the mass and become an independent living mind, life-power, soul, spirit, co-ordinating himself with the world around him but not drowned in it and separately inexistent and ineffective.

For the individual is indeed part of the cosmic being, but he is also something more, he is a soul that has descended from the Transcendence. This he cannot manifest at once, because he is too near to the cosmic Inconscience, not near enough to the original Superconscience; he has to find himself as the mental and vital ego before he can find himself as the soul or spirit. Still, to find his egoistic individuality is not to know himself; the true spiritual individual is not the mind ego, the life ego, the body ego: predominantly, this first movement is a work of will, of power, of egoistic self-effectuation and only secondarily of knowledge.

Therefore a time must come when man has to look below the obscure surface of his egoistic being and attempt to know himself; he must set out to find the real man: without that he would be stopping short at Nature’s primary education and never go on to her deeper and larger teachings; however great his practical knowledge and efficiency, he would be only a little higher than the animals.

First, he has to turn his eyes upon his own psychology and distinguish its natural elements, — ego, mind and its instruments, life, body, — until he discovers that his whole existence stands in need of an explanation other than the working of the natural elements and of a goal for its activities other than an egoistic self-affirmation and satisfaction. He may seek it in Nature and mankind and thus start on his way to the discovery of his unity with the rest of his world: he may seek it in supernature, in God, and thus start on his way to the discovery of his unity with the Divine.

Practically, he attempts both paths and, continually wavering, continually seeks to fix himself in the successive solutions that may be best in accordance with the various partial discoveries he has made on his double line of search and finding.

But through it all what he is in this stage still insistently seeking to discover, to know, to fulfil is himself; his knowledge of Nature, his knowledge of God are only helps towards self-knowledge, towards the perfection of his being, towards the attainment of the supreme object of his individual self-existence.

Directed towards Nature and the cosmos, it may take upon itself the figure of self-knowledge, self-mastery — in the mental and vital sense — and mastery of the world in which we find ourselves: directed towards God, it may take also this figure but in a higher spiritual sense of world and self, or it may assume that other, so familiar and decisive to the religious mind, the seeking for an individual salvation whether in heavens beyond or by a separate immergence in a supreme Self or a supreme Non-Self, — beatitude or Nirvana.

Throughout, however, it is the individual who is seeking individual self-knowledge and the aim of his separate existence, with all the rest, even altruism and the love and service of mankind, self-effacement or self-annihilation, thrown in — with whatever subtle disguises — as helps and means towards that one great preoccupation of his realised individuality.

This may seem to be only an expanded egoism, and the separative ego would then be the truth of man’s being persistent in him to the end or till at last he is liberated from it by his self-extinction in the featureless eternity of the Infinite. But there is a deeper secret behind which justifies his individuality and its demand, the secret of the spiritual and eternal individual, the Purusha.

It is because of the spiritual Person, the Divinity in the individual, that perfection or liberation — salvation, as it is called in the West — has to be individual and not collective; for whatever perfection of the collectivity is to be sought after, can come only by the perfection of the individuals who constitute it.

It is because the individual is That, that to find himself is his great necessity. In his complete surrender and self-giving to the Supreme it is he who finds his perfect self-finding in a perfect self-offering. In the abolition of the mental, vital, physical ego, even of the spiritual ego, it is the formless and limitless Individual that has the peace and joy of its escape into its own infinity. In the experience that he is nothing and no one, or everything and everyone, or the One which is beyond all things and absolute, it is the Divine in the individual that effectuates this stupendous merger or this marvellous joining,

Yoga, of its eternal unit of being with its vast all-comprehending or supreme all-transcending unity of eternal existence. To get beyond the ego is imperative, but one cannot get beyond the self — except by finding it supremely, universally. For the self is not the ego; it is one with the All and the One and in finding it it is the All and the One that we discover in our self: the contradiction, the separation disappears, but the self, the spiritual reality remains, united with the One and the All by that delivering disappearance.

The higher self-knowledge begins therefore as soon as man has got beyond his preoccupation with the relation of Nature and God to his superficial being, his most apparent self. One step is to know that this life is not all, to get at the conception of his own temporal eternity, to realise, to become concretely aware of that subjective persistence which is called the immortality of the soul.

When he knows that there are states beyond the material and lives behind and before him, at any rate a pre-existence and a subsequent existence, he is on the way to get rid of his temporal ignorance by enlarging himself beyond the immediate moments of Time into the possession of his own eternity.

Another step forward is to learn that his surface waking state is only a small part of his being, to begin to fathom the abyss of the Inconscient and depths of the subconscient and subliminal and scale the heights of the superconscient; so he commences the removal of his psychological self-ignorance.

A third step is to find out that there is something in him other than his instrumental mind, life and body, not only an immortal ever-developing individual soul that supports his nature but an eternal immutable self and spirit, and to learn what are the categories of his spiritual being, until he discovers that all in him is an expression of the spirit and distinguishes the link between his lower and his higher existence; thus he sets out to remove his constitutional self-ignorance.

Discovering self and spirit he discovers God; he finds out that there is a Self beyond the temporal (ego): he comes to the vision of that Self in the cosmic consciousness as the divine Reality behind Nature and this world of beings; his mind opens to the thought or the sense of the Absolute of whom self and the individual and the cosmos are so many faces; the cosmic, the egoistic, the original ignorance begin to lose the rigidness of their hold upon him.

In his attempt to cast his existence into the mould of this enlarging self-knowledge his whole view and motive of life, thought and action are progressively modified and transformed; his practical ignorance of himself, his nature and his object of existence diminishes: he has set his step on the path which leads out of the falsehood and suffering of a limited and partial into the perfect possession and enjoyment of a true and complete existence.

In the course of this progress he discovers step by step the unity of the three categories with which he started. For, first, he finds that in his manifest being he is one with cosmos and Nature; mind, life and body, the soul in the succession of Time, the conscient, subconscient and superconscient, — these in their various relations and the result of their relations are cosmos and are Nature.

But he finds too that in all which stands behind them or on which they are based, he is one with God; for the Absolute, the Spirit, the Self spaceless and timeless, the Self manifest in the cosmos and Lord of Nature, — all this is what we mean by God. and in all this his own being goes back to God and derives from it he is the Absolute, the Self, the Spirit self-projected in a multiplicity of itself into cosmos and veiled in Nature. In both of these realisations he finds his unity with all other souls and beings, — relatively in Nature, since he is one with them in mind, vitality, matter, soul, every cosmic principle and result, however various in energy and act of energy, disposition of principle and disposition of result, but absolutely in God, because the one Absolute, the one Self, the one Spirit is ever the Self of all and the origin. possessor and enjoyer of their multitudinous diversities.

The unity of God and Nature cannot fail to manifest itself to him: for he finds in the end that it is the Absolute who is all these relativities; he sees that it is the Spirit of whom every other principle is a manifestation; he discovers that it is the Self who has become all these becomings; he feels that it is the Shakti or Power of being and consciousness of the Lord of all beings which is Nature and is acting in the cosmos.

Thus in the progress of our self-knowledge we arrive at that by the discovery of which all is known as one with our self and by the possession of which all is possessed and enjoyed in our own self-existence. Equally, by virtue of this unity, the knowledge of the universe must lead the mind of man to the same large revelation. For he cannot know Nature as Matter and Force and Life without being driven to scrutinise the relation of mental consciousness with these principles, and once he knows the real nature of mind, he must go inevitably beyond every surface appearance. He must discover the will and intelligence secret in the works of Force, operative in material and vital phenomena; he must perceive it as one in the waking consciousness, the subconscient and the superconscient: he must find the soul in the body of the material universe.

Pursuing Nature through these categories in which he recognises his unity with the rest of the cosmos, he finds a Supemature behind all that is apparent, a supreme power of the Spirit in Time and beyond Time, in Space and beyond Space, a conscious Power of the Self who by her becomes all becomings, of the Absolute who by her manifests all relativities. He knows her, in other words, not only as material Energy, Life-Force, Mind-Energy, the many faces of Nature, but as the power of Knowledge-Will of the Divine Lord of being, the Consciousness-Force of the self-existent Eternal and Infinite.

The quest of man for God, which becomes in the end the most ardent and enthralling of all his quests, begins with his first vague questionings of Nature and a sense of something unseen both in himself and her.

Even if, as modem Science insists, religion started from animism, spirit-worship, demon-worship and the deification of natural forces, these first forms only embody in primitive figures a veiled intuition in the subconscient, an obscure and ignorant feeling of hidden influences and incalculable forces, or a vague sense of being, will, intelligence in what seems to us inconscient, of the invisible behind the visible, of the secretly conscious spirit in things distributing itself in every working of energy.

The obscurity and primitive inadequacy of the first perceptions do not detract from the value or the truth of this great quest of the human heart and mind, since all our seekings — including Science itself — must start from an obscure and ignorant perception of hidden realities and proceed to the more and more luminous vision of the Truth which at first comes to us masked, draped, veiled by the mists of the Ignorance. Anthropomorphism is an imaged recognition of the truth that man is what he is because God is what He is and that there is one soul and body of things, humanity even in its incompleteness the most complete manifestation yet achieved here and divinity the perfection of what in man is imperfect.

That he sees himself everywhere and worships that as God is also true; but here too he has laid confusedly the groping hand of Ignorance on a truth — that his being and the Being are one, that this is a partial reflection of That, and that to find his greater Self everywhere is to find God and to come near to the Reality in things, the Reality of all existence.

A unity behind diversity and discord is the secret of the variety of human religions and philosophies; for they all get at some image or some side clue, touch some portion of the one Truth or envisage some one of its myriad aspects.

Whether they see dimly the material world as the body of the Divine, or life as a great pulsation of the breath of Divine Existence, or all things as thoughts of the cosmic Mind, or realise that there is a Spirit which is greater than these things, their subtler and yet more wonderful source and creator, — whether they find God only in the Inconscient or as the one Conscious in inconscient things or as an ineffable superconscious Existence to reach whom we must leave behind our terrestrial being and annul the mind, life and body, or, overcoming division, see that He is all these at once and accept fearlessly the large consequences of that vision, — whether they worship Him with universality as the cosmic Being or limit Him and themselves, like the Positivist, in humanity only or, on the contrary, carried away by the vision of the timeless and spaceless Immutable, reject Him in Nature and Cosmos, — whether they adore Him in various strange or beautiful or magnified forms of the human ego or for His perfect possession of the qualities to which man aspires, his Divinity revealed to them as a supreme Power, Love, Beauty, Truth, Righteousness, Wisdom, — whether they perceive Him as the Lord of Nature, Father and Creator, or as Nature herself and the universal Mother, pursue Him as the Lover and attracter of initiation the starting-point for his entire evolution of his self-knowledge, world-knowledge, God-knowledge.

It is now possible and necessary, since we have formed a sufficiently clear idea of the significance of the evolutionary manifestation in earth-nature and the final turn it is taking or destined to take, to direct a more understanding regard on the principles of the process by which it has arrived at its present level and by which, presumably, with whatever modifications, its final development, its passage from our still dominant mental ignorance to a supramental consciousness and an integral knowledge, will be governed and made effective.

For we find that cosmic Nature is constant in its general law of action, since that depends on a Truth of things which is invariable in principle although in detail of application abundantly variable. At the outset, we can easily see that, since this is an evolution out of a material Inconscience into spiritual consciousness, an evolutionary self-building of Spirit on a base of Matter, there must be in the process a development of a triple character. An evolution of forms of Matter more and more subtly and intricately organised so as to admit the action of a growing, a more and more complex and subtle and capable organisation of consciousness is the indispensable physical foundation. An upward evolutionary progress of the consciousness itself from grade to higher grade, an ascent, is the evident spiral line or emerging curve that, on this foundation, the evolution must describe. A taking up of what has already been evolved into each higher grade as it is reached and a transformation more or less complete so as to admit of a total changed working of the whole being and nature, an integration, must be also part of the process, if the evolution is to be effective.

The four planes of Matter, Life, pure Mind and Supermind.

The end of this triple process must be a radical change of the action of the Ignorance into an action of Knowledge, of our basis of inconscience into a basis of complete consciousness, — a completeness which exists at present only in what is to us the superconscience. Each ascent will bring with it a partial change and modification of the old nature taken up and subjected to a new fundamental principle; the inconscience will be turned into a partial consciousness, an ignorance seeking for more and more knowledge and mastery: but at some point there must be an ascent which substitutes the principle of knowledge, of a fundamental true consciousness, the consciousness of the Spirit, for the inconscience and ignorance.

An evolution in the Inconscience is the beginning, an evolution in the Ignorance is the middle, but the end is the liberation of the spirit into its true consciousness and an evolution in the Knowledge. This is actually what we find to be the law and method of the process which has hitherto been followed and by all signs is likely to be followed in her future working by evolutionary Nature. A first involutionary foundation in which originates all that has to evolve, an emergence and action of the involved powers in or upon that foundation in an ascending series, and a culminating emergence of the highest power of all as the agent of a supreme manifestation are the necessary stages of the journey of evolutionary Nature.

An evolutionary process must be by the very terms of the problem to be solved a development, in some first established bask principle of being or substance, of something that that bask principle holds involved in itself or else admits from outside itself and modifies by the admission; for it must necessarily modify by its own law of nature all that enters into it and is not already part of its own nature.

This must be so even if it is a creative evolution in the sense of manifesting always new powers of existence that are not native to the first foundation but introduced into it, accepted into an original substance. If, on the contrary, there is already there in involution, — present in the first foundation, but not yet manifested or not yet organised, — the new principle or power of existence that has to be evolved, then, when it appears, it will still have to accept modification by the nature and law of the basic substance: but also it will modify that substance by its own power, its own law of nature. If, further, it is aided by a descent of its own principle already established in its own full force above the field of evolution and pressing down into that field to possess it, then the new power may even establish itself as a dominant element and considerably or radically change the consciousness and action of the world in which it emerges or into which it enters.

But its force to modify or change or to revolutionise the law and working of the original substance chosen as the evolutionary matrix will depend upon its own essential potency. It is not likely that it will be able to bring about an entire transformation if it is not itself the original Principle of Existence, if it is only derivative, an instrumental power and not the first puissance. Here the evolution takes place in a material universe; the foundation, the original substance, the first established all-conditioning status of things is Matter.

Mind and Life are evolved in Matter, but they are limited and modified in their action by the obligation to use its substance for their instrumentation and by their subjection to the law of material Nature even while they modify what they undergo and use.

For they do transform its substance, first into living substance and then into conscious substance; they succeed in changing its inertia, immobility and inconscience into a movement of consciousness, feeling and life.

But they do not succeed in transforming it altogether (art of alchemy); they cannot make it altogether alive or altogether conscious: life-nature evolving is bound to death; mind evolving is materialised as well as vitalised; it finds itself rooted in inconscience, limited by ignorance; it is moved by uncontrolled life-forces which drive and use it, it is mechanised by the physical forces on which it has to depend for its own self-expression.

This is a sign that neither Mind nor Life is the original creative Power; they, like Matter, are intermediaries, successive and seried instruments of the evolutionary process. If a material energy is not that original Power, then we must seek for it in something above Mind or Life; there must be a deeper occult Reality which has yet to disclose itself in Nature.

An original creative or evolutionary Power there must be: but, although Matter is the first substance, the original and ultimate Power is not an inconscient material Energy; for then life and consciousness would be absent, since Inconscience cannot evolve consciousness nor an inanimate Force evolve life. There must be, therefore, since Mind and Life also are not that, a secret Consciousness greater than Life Consciousness or Mind Consciousness, an Energy more essential than the material Energy. Since it is greater than Mind, it must be a supramental Consciousness-Force; since it is a power of essential substance other than Matter, it must be the power of that which is the supreme essence.

Because of the continuity of the evolutionary process there is no rigid separation between them; each new advance or formation takes up what was before. The animal takes up into himself living and inanimate Matter; man takes up both along with the animal existence. There are furrows left by the transitional process or separating demarcations settled by the fixed habit of Nature: but these distinguish one series from another, serve perhaps to prevent a fall back of what has been evolved, they do not cancel or cut the continuity of the evolution.

The evolving Consciousness passes from one grade to another or from one series of steps to another either by an imperceptible process or by some bound or crisis or, perhaps, by an intervention from above, — some descent or ensouling or influence from higher planes of Nature. But, by whatever means, the Consciousness secretly indwelling in matter, the occult Inhabitant, is able thus to make its way upward from the lower to the higher gradations, taking up what it was into what it is and preparing to take up both into what it will be.

Thus, having first laid down a basis of material being, material forms, forces, existences in which it seems to be lying inconscient, though in reality, as we know now, always subconsciently at work, It is able to manifest life and living beings, to manifest mind and mental beings in a material world, and must therefore be able to manifest there supermind also and supramental beings. Thus has come about the present status of the evolution of which man is the now apparent culmination but not the real ultimate summit; for he is himself a transitional being and stands at the turning-point of the whole movement.

Evolution, being thus continuous, must have at any given moment a past with its fundamental results still in evidence, a present in which the results it is labouring over are in process of becoming, a future in which still unevolved powers and forms of being must appear till there is the full and perfect manifestation. The past has been the history of a slow and difficult subconscious working with effects on the surface, — it has been an unconscious evolution; the present is a middle stage, an uncertain spiral in which the human intelligence is used by the secret evolutionary Force of being and participates in its action without being fully taken into confidence, — it is an evolution slowly becoming conscious of itself; the future must be a more and more conscious evolution of the spiritual being until it is fully delivered into a self-aware action by the emergent gnostic principle.

The first foundation in this emergence, the creation of forms of Matter, first of inconscient and inanimate, then of living and thinking Matter, the appearance of more and more organised bodies adapted to express a greater power of consciousness, has been studied from the physical side, the side of form building, by Science; but very little light has been shed on the inner side, the side of consciousness, and what little has been observed is rather of its physical basis and instrumentation than of the progressive operations of Consciousness in its own nature. In the evolution, as it has been observed so far, although a continuity is there, —for Life takes up Matter and Mind takes up submental Life, the Mind of intelligence takes up the mind of life and sensation, — the leap from one grade of consciousness in the series to another grade seems to our eyes immense, the crossing of the gulf whether by bridge or by leap impossible; we fail to discover any concrete and satisfactory evidence of its accomplishment in the past or of the manner in which it was accomplished.

Even in the outward evolution, even in the development of physical forms where the data are clearly in evidence, there are missing links that remain always missing; but in the evolution of consciousness the passage is still more difficult to account for, for it seems more like a transformation than a passage.

It may be, however, that, by our incapacity to penetrate the subconscious, to sound the submental or to understand sufficiently a lower mentality different from ours, we are unable to observe the minute gradations, not only in each degree of the series, but on the borders between grade and grade: the scientist who does observe minutely the physical data, has been driven to believe in the continuity of evolution In spite of the gaps and missing links; if we could observe similarly the inner evolution, we could, no doubt, discover the possibility and the mode of these formidable transitions.

But still there is a real, a radical difference between grade and grade, so much so that the passage from one to another seems a new creation, a miracle of metamorphosis rather than a natural predictable development or quiet passing from one state of being to another with its well-marked steps arranged in an easy sequence.

These gulfs appear deeper, but less wide, as we rise higher in the scale of Nature. If there are rudiments of life-reaction in the metal, as has been recently contended, it may be identical with life-reaction in the plant in its essence, but what might be called the vital-physical difference is so considerable that one seems to us inanimate, the other, though not apparently conscious, might be called a living creature.

Between the highest plant life and lowest animal the gulf is visibly deeper, for it is the difference between mind and the entire absence of any apparent or even rudimentary movement of mind: in the one the stuff of mental consciousness is unawakened though there is a life of vital reactions, a suppressed or subconscious or perhaps only submental sense vibration which seems to be intensely active; in the other, though the life is at first less automatic and secure in the subconscious way of living and in its own new way of overt consciousness imperfectly determined, still mind is awakened, — there is a conscious life, a profound transition has been made. But the community of the phenomenon of life between plant and animal, however different their organisation, narrows the gulf, even though it does not fill in its profundity.

Between the highest animal and the lowest man there is a still deeper though narrower gulf to be crossed, the gulf between sense-mind and the intellect: for however we may insist on the primitive nature of the savage, we cannot alter the fact that the most primitive human being has above and beyond the sense-mind, emotional vitality and primary practical intelligence which we share with the animals, a human intellect and is capable — in whatever limits — of reflection, ideas, conscious invention, religious and ethical thought and feeling, everything fundamental of which man as a race is capable; he has the same kind of intelligence, it differs only in its past instruction and formative training and the degree of its developed capacity, intensity and activity.

Still, in spite of these dividing furrows, we can no longer suppose that God or some Demiurge has manufactured each genus and species ready-made in body and in consciousness and left the matter there, having looked upon his work and seen that it was good. It has become evident that a secretly conscious or an inconscient Energy of creation has effected the transition by swift or slow degrees, by whatever means, devices, biological, physical or psychological machinery, —perhaps, having made it, did not care to preserve as distinct forms what were only stepping-stones and had no longer any function nor served any purpose in evolutionary Nature. But this explanation of the gaps is little more than a hypothesis which as yet we cannot sufficiently, substantiate.

It is probable at any rate that the reason for these radical differences is to be found in the working of the inner Force and not in the outer process of the evolutionary transition; if we look at it more deeply from that inner side, the difficulty of understanding ceases and these transitions become intelligible and indeed inevitable by the very nature of the evolutionary process and its principle. For if we look, not at the scientific or physical aspects, but at the psychological side of the question and inquire in what precisely the difference lies, we shall see that it consists in the rise of consciousness to another principle of being.

The metal is fixed in the inconscient and inanimate principle of matter; even if we can suppose that it has some reactions suggestive of life in it or at least of rudimentary vibrations that in the plant developed into life, still it is not at all characteristically a fonn of life; it is characteristically a form of matter. The plant is fixed in a subconscient action of the principle of life, — not that it is not subject to matter or devoid of reactions that find their full meaning only in mind, (or it seems to have submental reactions that in us are the foundation of pleasure and pain or of attraction and repulsion; but still it is a form of life, not of mere matter, nor is it, so far as we know, at all a mind-conscious being.

Man and the animal are both mentally conscious beings; but the animal is fixed in vital mind and mind-sense and cannot exceed its limitations, while man has received into his sense-mind the light of another principle, the intellect, which is really at once a reflection and a degradation of the supennind, a ray of gnosis seized by the sense-mentality and transformed by it into something other than its source: for it is agnostic like the sense-mind in which and for which it works, not gnostic; it seeks to lay hold on knowledge, because it does not possess it, it does not like supennind hold knowledge in itself as its natural prerogative. In other words, in each of these forms of existence the universal being has fixed its action of consciousness in a different principle or, as between man and animal, in the modification of a lower by a higher though still not a highest-grade principle.

The transition to the mind and sense that appear in the animal being, that which we call conscious life, is operated in the same manner. The force of being is so much intensified, rises to such a height as to admit or develop a new principle of existence, — apparently new at least in the world of Mauer, — mentality.

Animal being is mentally aware of existence, its own and others, puts forth a higher and subtler grade of activities, receives a wider range of contacts, mental, vital, physical, from forms other than its own, takes up the physical and vital existence and turns all it can get from them into sense values and vital mind values. It senses body, it senses life, but it senses also mind; for it has not only blind nervous reactions, but conscious sensations, memories, impulses, volitions, emotions, mental associations, the stuff of feeling and thought and will. It has even a practical intelligence, founded on memory. association, stimulating need, observation, a power of device; it is capable of cunning, strategy, planning; it can invent, adapt to some extent its inventions, meet in this or that detail the demand of new circumstance.

All is not in it a half-conscious instinct; the animal prepares human intelligence. But when we come to man, we see the whole thing becoming conscious; the world, which he epitomises, begins in him to reveal to itself its own nature. The higher animal is not the somnambulist, — as the very lowest animal forms still mainly or almost are, — but it has only a limited waking mind, capable of just what is necessary for its vital existence: in man the conscious mentality enlarges its wakefulness and, though not at first fully self-conscious, though still conscious only on the surface, can open more and more to his inner and integral being.

As in the two lower ascents, there is a heightening of the force of conscious existence to a new power and a new range of subtle activities; there is a transition from vital mind to reflecting and thinking mind, there is developed a higher power of observation and invention, taking up and connecting data, conscious of process and result, a force of imagination and aesthetic creation, a higher more plastic sensibility, the co-ordinating and interpreting reason, the values no longer of a reflex or reactive but of a mastering, understanding, self-detaching intelligence. As in the lower ascents, so here there is also a widening of the range of consciousness; man is able to take in more of the world and of himself as well as to give to this knowledge higher and completer figures of conscious experience. So, too, there is here also the third constant element of the ascension; mind takes up the lower grades and gives to their action and reaction intelligent values.

Man has not only like the animal the sense of his body and life, but an intelligent sense and idea of life and a conscious and observant perception of body. He takes up too the mental life of the animal, as well as the material and bodily; although he loses something in the process, he gives to what he retains a higher value; he has the intelligent sense and the idea of his sensations, emotions, volitions, impulses, mental associations; what was crude stuff of thought and feeling and will, capable only of gross determinations, he turns into the finished work and artistry of these things.

For the animal too thinks, but in an automatic way based mainly on a mechanical series of memories and mental associations, accepting quickly or slowly the suggestions of Nature and only awakened to a more conscious personal action when there is need of close observation and device; it has some first crude stuff of practical reason, but not the formed ideative and reflective faculty.

The awaking consciousness in the animal is the unskilled primitive artisan of mind, in man it is the skilled craftsman and can become, — but this he does not attempt sufficiently, — not only the artist, but master and adept.

But here we have to observe two particularities of this human and at present highest development, which bring us to the heart of the matter. First, this taking up of the lower pans of life reveals itself as a turning downward of the master eye of the secret evolving spirit or of the universal Being in the individual from the height to which he has reached on all that now lies below him, a gazing down with the double or twin power of the being’s consciousness-force, — the power of will, the power of knowledge, — so as to understand from this new, different and wider range of consciousness and perception and nature the lower life and its possibilities and to raise it up, it also, to a higher level, to give it higher values, to bring out of it higher potentialities.

And this he does because evidently he does not intend to kill or destroy it, but, delight of existence being his eternal business and a harmony of various strains, not a sweet but monotonous melody the method of his music, he wishes to include the lower notes also and, by surcharging them with a deeper and finer significance, get more delight out of them than was possible in the cruder formulation.

Still in the end he lays on them as a condition for his continued acceptance their consent to admit the higher values and. until they do consent, he can deal harshly enough with them even to trampling them under foot when he is bent on perfection and they are rebellious. And that indeed is the true inmost aim and meaning of ethics, discipline and askesis, to lesson and tame, purify and prepare to be fit instruments the vital and physical and lower mental life so that they may be transformed into notes of the higher mental and eventually the supramental harmony, but not to mutilate and destroy them. Ascent is the first necessity, but an integration is an accompanying intention of the spirit in Nature.

This downward eye of knowledge and will with a view to an all-round or a superfluous but pleasant luxury of imaginations, feelings and thought-abstractions, not as inner realities; or, even if it receives them as realities, it does not feel them concretely and substantially in their own proper substance, subtler than the physical substance and its grosser concreteness, — it treats them as a subjective, less substantial extension from physical realities.

It is inevitable that the human being should thus take his first stand on Matter and give the external fact and external existence its due importance; for this is Nature’s first provision for our existence, on which she insists greatly: the physical man is emphasised in us and is multiplied abundantly in the world by her as her force for conservation of the secure, if somewhat inert, material basis on which she can maintain herself while she attempts her higher human developments; but in this mental formation there is no power for progress or only for a material progress.

It is our first mental status, but the mental being cannot remain always at this lowest rung of the human evolutionary ladder. Above physical mind and deeper within than physical sensation, there is what we may call an intelligence of the life-mind, dynamic, vital, nervous, more open, though still obscurely, to the psychic, capable of a first soul-formation, though only of an obscurer life-soul, — not the psychic being, but a frontal formation of the vital Purusha. This life-soul concretely senses and contacts the things of the life-world, and tries to realise them here; it attaches immense importance to the satisfaction and fulfilment of the life-being, the life-force, the vital nature: it looks on physical existence as a field for the life-impulses’ self-fulfilment, for the play of ambition, power, strong character, love, passion, adventure, for the individual, the collective, the general human seeking and hazard and venture, for all kinds of life-experiment and new life-experience, and but for this saving element, this greater power, interest, significance, the physical existence would have for it no value.

This life mentality is supported by our secret subliminal vital being and is in veiled contact with a life-world to which it can easily open and so feel the unseen dynamic forces and realities behind the material universe. There is an inner life-mind which does not need for its perceptions the evidence of the physical senses, Is not limited by them; for on this level our inner life and the inner life of the world become real to us independent of the body and of the symbols of the physical world which alone we call natural phenomena, as if Nature had no greater phenomena and no greater realities than those of gross Matter.

The vital man, moulded consciously or unconsciously by these influences, is the man of desire and sensation, the man of force and action, the man of passion and emotion, the kinetic individual; he may and does lay great stress on the material existence, but he gives it, even when most preoccupied with its present actualities, a push for life-experience, for force of realisation, for life-extension, for life-power, for life-affirmation and life-expansion which is Nature’s first impetus towards enlargement of the being; at a highest intensity of this life impetus, he becomes the breaker of bonds, the seeker of new horizons, the disturber of the past and present in the interest of the future.

He has a mental life which is often enslaved to the vital force and its desires and passions, and it is these he seeks to satisfy through the mind: but when he interests himself strongly in mental things, he can become the mental adventurer, the opener of the way to new mind-formations or the fighter for an idea, the sensitive type of artist, the dynamic poet of life or the prophet or champion of a cause.

The vital mind is kinetic and therefore a great force in the working of evolutionary Nature. Above this level of vital mentality and yet more inly extended, is a mind-plane of pure thought and intelligence to which the things of the mental world are the most important realities; those who are under its influence, the philosopher, thinker, scientist, intellectual creator, the man of the idea, the man of the written or spoken word, the idealist and dreamer are the present mental being at his highest attained summit.

This mental man has his life-part, his life of passions and desires and ambitions and life-hopes of all kinds and his lower sensational and physical existence, and this lower pan can often equibalance or weigh down his nobler mental element so that, although it is the highest portion of him, it does not become dominant and formative in his whole nature: but this is not typical of him in his greatest development, for there the vital and physical are controlled and subjected by the thinking will and intelligence.

The mental man cannot transform his nature, but he can control and harmonise it and lay on it the law of a mental ideal, impose a balance or a sublimating and refining influence, and give a high consistency to the multipersonal confusion and conflict or the summary patchwork of our divided and half-constructed being. He can be the observer and governor of his own mind and life, can consciously develop them and become to that extent a self-creator.

This mind of pure intelligence has behind it our inner or subliminal mind which senses directly all the things of the mind-plane, is open to the action of a world of mental forces, and can feel the ideative and other imponderable influences which act upon the material world and the life-plane but which at present we can only infer and cannot directly experience: these intangibles and imponderables are to the mental man real and patent and he regards them as truths demanding to be realised in our or the earth’s nature. On the inner plane mind and mind-soul independent of the body can become to us an entire reality, and we can consciously live in them as much as in the body.

Thus to live in mind and the things of the mind, to be an intelligence rather than a life and a body, is our highest position, short of spirituality, in the degrees of Nature.

The mental man, the man of a self-dominating and self-formative mind and will conscious of an ideal and turned towards its realisation, the high intellect, the thinker, the sage, less kinetic and immediately effective than the vital man, who is the man of action and outer swift life-fulfilment, but as powerful and eventually even more powerful to open new vistas to the race, is the normal summit of Nature’s evolutionary formation on the human plane.

These three degrees of mentality, clear in themselves, but most often mixed in our composition, are to our ordinary intelligence only psychological types that happen to have developed, and we do not discover any other significance in them; but in fact they are full of significance, for they are the steps of Nature’s evolution of mental being towards its self-exceeding, and, as thinking mind is the highest step she can now attain, the perfected mental man is the rarest and highest of her normal human creatures.

To go farther she has to bring into the mind and make active in mind, life and body the spiritual principle. For these are her evolutionary figures built out of the surface mentality; to do more she has to use more amply the unseen material hidden below our surface, to dive inwards and bring out the secret soul, the psyche, or to ascend above our normal mental level into planes of intuitive consciousness dense with light derived from the spiritual gnosis, ascending planes of pure spiritual mind in which we are in direct contact with the infinite, in touch with the self and highest reality of things.

In ourselves, behind our surface natural being, there is a soul, an inner mind, an inner life-part which can open to these heights as well as to the occult spirit within us, and this double opening is the secret of a new evolution; by that breaking of lids and walls and boundaries the consciousness rises to a greater ascent and a larger integration which, as the evolution of mind has mentalised, so will by this new evolution spiritualise all the powers of our nature.

For the mental man has not been Nature’s last effort or highest reach, — though he has been, in general, more fully evolved in his own nature than those who have achieved themselves below or aspired above him; she has pointed man to a yet higher and more difficult level, inspired him with the ideal of a spiritual living, begun the evolution in him of a spiritual being.

The spiritual man is her supreme supemonnal effort of human creation; for, having evolved the mental creator, thinker, sage, prophet of an ideal, the self-controlled, self-disciplined, harmonised mental being, she has tried to go higher and deeper within and call out into the front the soul and inner mind and heart, call down from above the forces of the spiritual mind and higher mind and overmind and create under their light and by their influence the spiritual sage, seer, prophet, God-lover, Yogin, gnostic, Sufi, mystic. This is man’s only way of true self-exceeding: for so long as we live in the surface being or found ourselves wholly on Matter, it is impossible to go higher and vain to expect that there can be any new transition of a radical character in our evolutionary being.

The vital man, the mental man have had an immense effect upon the earth-life, they have carried humanity forward from the mere human animal to what it is now. But it is only within the bounds of the already established evolutionary formula of the human being that they can act; they can enlarge the human circle but not change or transform the principle of consciousness or its characteristic operation.

The whole concentration of the being will be shifted from below upwards and from without inwards; our higher and inner being now unknown to us will become ourselves, and the outer or surface being which we now take for ourselves will be only an open front or an annexe through which the true being meets the universe. The outer world itself will become inward to the spiritual awareness, a part of itself, intimately embraced in a knowledge and feeling of unity and identity, penetrated by an intuitive regard of the mind, responded to by the direct contact of consciousness with consciousness, taken into an achieved integrality. The old inconscient foundation itself will be made conscious in us by the inflow of light and awareness from above and its depths annexed to the heights of the spirit. An integral consciousness will become the basis of an entire harmonisation of life through the total transformation, unification, integration of the being and the nature.

Text source; The Life Divine: Art of living

When man functions from the external energy of the ego, he does not relate to the consciousnesses within the inner self and the higher self. This man, in effect, does not know who he is. Therefore, man will search for his identity within the external energy forces of life. He is functioning within the external ego world so it is logical for him to create support for that ego self from that external world. External identity consciousness creates an external support system for man and his ego.

The battle of Armageddon – Armageddon is actually the battle between your outer ego-based consciousness and your inner Christ consciousness. Hence Apocalypsis means a taking away of a veil. The word apokaluptein, and consequently apocalypse, means “to unveil,” “to disclose,” and hence “to reveal.” In this sense, apocalypse means “revelation.”

The word apocalypse comes from the Greek prefix apo and the verb kaluptein. The verb kaluptein, from which the name of Calypso is derived, means “to hide,” “to conceal,” or “to veil.” The privative prefix apo, when joined to a verb, marks “away” or “off.” The word apokaluptein therefore means “to do away with” or “to take off that which” “hides,” “conceals,” or “veils.” Following from this philological development thus: the word apokaluptein, and consequently apocalypse, means “to unveil,” “to disclose,” and hence “to reveal.” In this sense, apocalypse means “revelation.”

The Open Heaven

You may not be ready for the ascension in this hour. But you are ready for your commitment to the eternal covenant. You are ready for the conversion to be God within your heart. You are ready to go forth as a conqueror in life, to command all circumstance to come into the subjection of the one Great Law. You are ready to enter the age of Reality—realism, whereby you do not turn your back but face with the calm certitude of inner knowing all that has been less than Christ perfection.

Energy is God. Every erg of energy that has passed through the nexus of your consciousness through thousands upon thousands of years of incarnation must now be passed through the flame of the sacred fire, be stripped of the outer coating of human consciousness, and sent back into your causal body of Life. This is the real challenge of life on earth—not creature comforts, not the attributing of success to those who have become adept at the manipulations of matter.

For to extend illumination is to remove the screen of Maya whereby the soul may see Light, may see Darkness, may understand the equation, may know that in the ultimate sense all wrong is unreal. But in order to be unreal—to be rendered unreal in the physical octave where illusions have the appearance and concreteness of a quasi-reality—it must pass through the fires of transmutation.

Thus molecules of light are stripped of false belief and systems of error by this ritual of transmutation. And healing is complete. And the inner man is made whole. This is the Science of the Immaculate Concept whereby you behold the true geometry of Life—and that Life beholding itself in you is the quickening power of the true scientist of Christ.

Apocalypse paradigm shift; shift in perception – from ego perception and five senses to soul perspective and sixth sense (third eye intuition).

Apocalypse paradigm shift; from “matter over mind” to “consciousness over matter”, its a shift from outer ego perspective into inner higher self perspective. its a shift from low vibrational frequencies of matter into high vibrational frequencies of Divine Spirit, its a reversal from fear based low vibrations into high vibrations of love frequency.

The battle of Armageddon – Armageddon is actually the battle between your outer ego-based consciousness and your inner Christ consciousness. Hence Apocalypsis means a taking away of a veil (as when a statue is said to be unveiled), and thus bringing into view that which had been before hidden as by a veil. The veil of ignorance

The collective unconscious is the consciousness that covers the original nature of the Earth. When the unconsciousness improves and its shell is finally cracked, the original consciousness of the Earth will be revealed; it is the same principle of the expansion or evolution of the human consciousness. If the collective unconscious doesn’t improve, the original “me” would always be shadowed by it.

The battle of Armageddon is both in the cosmos and in each of us! On a personal level, it is the battle between the lower self and the higher self, between truth and illusion, between fear and love, between positivity and negativity, between separation and oneness, between God and ego, between the forces of light and the forces of darkness. The outer battle that is talked about so often is just a reflection of this personal battle that every seeker of truth must fight — and must win. Each person must master the dweller on the threshold, the conglomeration of glamour, maya and illusion within self. In essence, as Sai Baba has so eloquently stated, “God equals man minus ego.” We each must win the battle over our negative-ego/fear-based, separative thinking and feeling; we must be spiritually victorious in this battle. It does not happen in one day, though; it is a process.

The process of spiritual evolution to become a spiritual master requires us to reverse this by undoing all the mass-consciousness programming. We must get complete control of the subconscious mind and not let it run us; we must totally become the computer programmer of the subconscious mind. So there is a phase for us on our spiritual path — and this is true for all, disciples, initiates and masters — when the battle of Armageddon wages within us seekers of God. This phrase is good and appropriate. “Give up this unmanliness and self-pity and get up and fight!” “Life is a battlefield.”

The apocalypse could be represented by the cross, were duality ends and oneness begins, therefore it represents a shift in consciouness, from fear based low vibrational frequencies to a higher state of vibrational frequencies based on love. Armageddon is actually the battle between your outer ego-based consciousness and your inner Christ consciousness. The inner Christ Consciousness begins at the fourth chakra when the spiritual heart is opened and Man has overcome the three first lower physical chakras of materialism.

“Soul minds” are veiled. The challenge for some of us seems to be work on “thinning the veils. The program itself is run from the structures, which are stretched across various parts of the brain as membrane veils, shutting the conscious from the super conscious, so you are not in connection with all that you are. Thus affecting your ability to expand your reality to encompass the vaster self you truly are. Spirit has called this a four point encoding access. This will likely be a long process to clear all of the four points of clearing. When we begin to live the spiritual life , a reversal of consciousness takes place. The reversal represent change or movement turning consciousness inward from the outer external ego.

There is a veil that exists in between the place you open and close your eyes. It interrupts your awareness and creates a pattern that shifts you between two different levels of consciousness. When your eyes are open, you are in one state, when your eyes are closed, you are in another. This veil was put in place at the time of the Fall of Consciousness to keep you in the limited reality of separation.

This veil holds a rigid structure in place that does not allow the DNA software programming and the coding structure of the DNA to actively integrate into the higher-dimensional chakra system necessary to activate aspects of the hypothalamus, medulla oblongata and pineal gland. These aspects are limited by this veil or partition. This partition is also what holds you in third-dimensional linear time (time as a past—present—future loop) and creates major restrictions to knowing yourself.

The veil programs are usually placed in at birth, although can be and probably are, included with many past programs also. There are various “fallen- hierarchies that perform the shut-off programs. the programs of separation and death. The program itself is run from the structures, which are stretched across various parts of the brain as membrane veils, shutting the conscious from the super conscious, so you are not in connection with all that you are.

The program itself is from the beings that set up the program, a small group who determine what it will take, and what programs will work well to shut off your divine potential. causing you to feel lost. It is calculated according to your soul weaknesses, and set in a situation that seems to prevent expansion in your life, from the group coming through set situations (these will be situations you find yourself in that continually repeat. with similar energies, and certain groups that hold you back). The program comes into the crown chakra, at full width, so it would be hard to break, travelling down into the back of the neck, and anchoring there. As it is in the brain, it affects your mental ability to commune with God source, your guides, and your higher self. It also affects the body when you are attempting to take divine steps in your outer life, to manifest God’s light on Earth. It may have the effect of immobilizing you. and making it harder to move spiritually in the outer world.

Lower sound harmonics and lower programming tend to lock in together, along with group dynamics. To clear group dynamics, permissions you have given to the group need to be released. This can be done through Vow/Contract breaks. (Affirming this).Certain frequency programming within the DNA and various other structures does not allow divine frequencies to enter, therefore needs release. Various other points at which to clear include-Genetic — through the DNA. Physical — through cellular memory. Allowed through agreement by yourself — opening spiritual doonvays to your access. Your access to the world. Etheric memory (affecting your ability to expand reality).

Thus affecting your ability to expand your reality to encompass the vaster self you truly are. Spirit has called this a four point encoding access. This will likely be a long process to clear all of the four points of clearing that is mentioned above.

Focusing your consciousness multi-dimensionally is about bringing all of your consciousness to the mind, allowing the higher mind to play a part also, and to bring this into your life, as part of it. If you desire for this in your life, you will find that new pathways need to be made within the present brain, on various levels, as it is currently not totally connected to the vaster capabilities possible. This process will be like a rewiring; to enable more refined frequencies to enter into the mental etherics.

Most of the brain structure is simply coded out of receiving these higher impulses, much like tuning certain channels out on a T.V. set. Then, they will be pushed back into the subconscious, and accessed through dream state, perhaps, or in meditation. The ideal, of course, is not to need to go back to access, but to be in the present all of the time as this is the vaster part of who we are, and we are here to live that, to know of all that we are, here on earth.

As a result of flawed thinking (caused by a negative programmed mindset), most people either do not have the required tools, or are not interested in obtaining the knowledge for freedom or higher. Freedom and higher consciousness require a desire to be free, effort, work, and change, all of which most people are programmed to avoid. The objective of this kind of programming is to have people lose the ability to think freely. – ‘whatever you do not use you lose.’ Many people often want or seek the benefits of freedom without paying the price. However, freedom is never free.

Another common misunderstanding to the untrained eyes is how freedom is defined. Freedom is generally defined as the opportunity to get a “good” education, a “good” job and be financially sufficient to provide for their families. The definition of true freedom is a freed mentality. A freed mentality ensures people can have all of their desires, and also be in full control of their thoughts and mind.

With mental freedom, people can learn who they are, understand the role they play in the broader scope of the universe; appreciate and value themselves, others, and the natural environment, and be much better equipped to understand how societies and organizations are structured to control the minds of the masses.

Once you are able to free yourself mentally, finding the real purpose for your existence will no longer be a challenge. Many people, regardless of how well educated they are, regrettably continue to be very narrow-minded when it comes to matters about the process and methods of achieving mental freedom. They feel this way because they are either unfamiliar with the subject, or have been programmed to reject such information as real and essential.

Thinking that mental freedom is something that can easily be attained is a colossal mistake. It requires a strong desire, clarity of thought, discipline, effort, work, courage, sacrifice, and change. Most people are just not prepared to be free -they have no control over their thoughts or their lives.

A large portion of their decisions derives from their societal programming. This fact is suppressed by the widely held view that people make decisions based on their personal choices and preferences. This view is merely a misconception. What many are ignoring either through ignorance or deliberate rejection is the fact that, the choices people make derived from their subconscious programmed condition and manipulated mentality.

Ascension is a journey, not a destination. It is an individual journey of the soul. We are always on a journey of ascension because we are always seeking the truth, seeking that which we feel we have lost. To live life in the lower realms of 3D demands that we lose our connection with God in order to experience duality, both sides of the opposing energies of our world.

Our ascension journey is about traversing the frequencies of the lower realms, garnering the truth that we are beings of light, and then transcending the 3D vibrational frequencies of duality. This is a journey to find our truth, our light and our divine essence, that “We Are God Also”. Only when you have this belief well and truly imbedded into your heart can you reach up to the upper realms and begin the ascension home, taking your physical vessel with you. In the journey of ascension into the higher dimensions of self, the Higher Self begins to meld with the biological body. Slowly the physical body takes on more and more of the Divine Intelligence, the Divine Wisdom, the Divine Creativity of the Higher Self, evolving into a manifested Lightbody form living on Earth.

Life journey is like playing hide and seek. The invisible world within is hidden, dormant, and waiting to be discovered and connected so that we can explore the divinity within us. Unless we are aware to a certain degree that we are spirit beings, it is not easy to attune to the concept. So it is important to become aware of all the vital supreme power which is responsible for every phase of life.

Once the knowledge of spiritual truth has been discovered or consciousness has dawned within our being or to know who we are, we become transformed and view life differently and confidently through new eyes, with new understanding, for its purpose begins to fall into place to realise the divine plan to equip ourselves by service for the fulfilment of our inevitable destiny. Within us is a spirit being, and when we tune into the spiritual power that higher source can access the divine part of us when we realise and become aware.

Once the shell of mass consciousness starts cracking around and in you, the spiritual emptiness which comes from having shut down the ways you are connected to Soul and to The Divine starts being “in your face as the expression goes. You will be DRIVEN BY AN INNER PUSH to know, do, and be that which is once again consciously connected with spirit, with Soul, and with God/Goddess. One of the tasks of being Soul in physical, human form is to EXPERIENCE YOUR UNIQUENESS WHILE STAYING CONSCIOUS OF YOUR ONENESS WITH EVERYTHING. Life on Earth is really about BRINGING FORTH THE SOUL POTENTIALITIES that exist in everyone of us. And we obviously cannot do that without spirit.

Operating from Soul, being 100 % Higher Self Integrated, means that you will be TUNING IN FOR HIGHER GUIDANCE IN EVERY AREA, CONCERNING EVERYTHING, ALL THE TIME. You will be functioning from Soul Knowledge, integrating spiritual or Divine Wisdom with the practicalities of living and working in a material world.

The collective unconscious is the consciousness that covers the original nature of the Earth. When the unconsciousness improves and its shell is finally cracked, the original consciousness of the Earth will be revealed; it is the same principle of the expansion or evolution of the human consciousness. If the collective unconscious doesn’t improve, the original “me” would always be shadowed by it.

When we close down our physical perception through our ego beliefs, the other rooms within our mansion continue to shine with light.

As we crack the cosmic shell of our ego, we rend the veil of our beliefs that surrounds our intellect and find ourself open to the wisdom and ingenuity of our soul and to the love, truth, and equality of our spirit. We will look upon our soul and spirit with total humility as we recognize the insignificance of our intellect when it is compared to our magnificent soul and spirit mind.

Cracking our ego shell to access the wisdom and ingenuity of our soul and the love, truth, and equality of our spirit will heal us of all physical, mental, and societal disease. From that moment forward the soul will consciously, with absolute freedom of choice, use disease only to complete a lesson of transformation. We have consciously denied our soul and spirit for millions of years. Our ego denial has made it necessary to hypnotize our conscious mind so that we can communicate with our subconscious soul and our unconscious spirit mind as a way to stay balanced within our intellectual mind. This is the state that we call sleep, and we have an inherent dependency upon sleep for our mental balance. Our soul and spirit has gently worked with us in our sleep to encourage our soul growth despite our state of ego denial.

Once we rind the veil of our ego we can also access our future soul experience and our angel hierarchy that covers the seven levels from our spirit consciousness to the Archangel energy of our Spirit. These higher levels of our energy can’t be accessed until the veil is rent, but we may experience temporary communica-tion with other levels as we perforate our cosmic shell. The subconscious memory of our soul lives serves our intellect as an alternate reality when we reach our threshold level of absorption in fear, pain, anger, abuse, and drama within our physical life experience.

When we can no longer cope with our physical or mental reality and our emotions, we change the focus of our mind into another soul print of memory, which is not understood by medicine. Changing the focus of our mind will be a common event when our soul memory and the Universal mind of our spirit is understood. We will have the mind power to con-sciously change into other life experiences to give us an opportunity to find the lessons that we have been intent upon repeat-ing. Once we rend the veil of our cosmic shell we are able to reach into all levels of the soul and spirit mind without difficulty.

To shift our consciousness as humans we must release our belief in inequality that has cast us into fear, control, and dependency as we have descended through the shadow side of our soul path. With absolute equality being practiced within a culture there is no dependency, and therefore there is no fear and control.

The final battle each of us must fight . It is the inner Armageddon , the battle between our ego – mind and our higher divine self.

This is the spiritual meaning of the Battle of Armageddon, the final battle of the forces of light and the darkness within.

renewal of the mind” (Rom. 12:2). The writer of the Apocalypse envisions a “new heaven and a new earth”

So we are in the apocalypse, the “lifting of a veil” is a rising of consciousness that knows no fear (a physical lifting of a veil of ignorance

Duality that keeps us all bound in separation, and from the Self Mastery that was originally intended

Transcending Armageddon Consciousness is nothing more than transcending the negative ego duality within self.

The apocalypse fear based system of duality represents a change from mind of duality into state of oneness of Christ Consciousness. Its a change from a system of low vibrational of control and enslavement into high vibrational state of liberation.

The “coming of the self is described as an apocalypse for the ego, the “you” that wants to hang along for the ride. It may be that the only way to survive the Apocalypse is to undergo it, first, within your own being.

The “Title” of the Book describes its character. It is not “The Revelation of St. John the Divine,” as the heading in our Bibles would have us believe, but it is “THE REVELATION OF JESUS CHRIST.” The word “Revelation” in the Greek is “APOCALUPSIS.” Hence the title “THE APOCALYPSE,” by which it is often called. It is from the verb “APOCALUPTO,” to unveil; from “APO,” away from; and “KALUMMA,” a veil. Hence “Apocalupsis” means a tak-ing away of a veil, as when a statue is unveiled, that what is behind the veil may be seen.

Thus the root meaning of apocalypse is an unveiling, a revealing of the future. The entire book of Revelation, called by many the Apocalypse, deals with what will take place in the future.

The book of Revelation is the only book in the Bible that calls itself an apocalypses were written in order to unveil or reveal some deep truth about the world. As Brian Blount explains, Rev-elation is “a truth that enables its hearers and readers to see the present in a new light. But that truth is so powerful, so overwhelming, that John’s words cannot properly convey it. He therefore appeals to symbols and codes that must bear the weight his language cannot:”

Apocalyptic Transformation: Alchemy – alchemy and apocalypse are inextricably linked: if apocalypse proposes a form of alchemical morphing of the world to some higher state, so too the fulfilment of the alchemical project would result in the apocalyptic transformation of the world.

The motion of consciousness from psyche to Spirit, during which latent errors arise, fully-formed and fully-enacted, until they are revealed as forms of Truth, is the esoteric significance of apocalypse, which means ‘revelation’. Physical death is a symbol of the death of the ego—of the belief that the human psyche is autonomous and self-created. The end of the world is a symbol of the ‘recollection’ produced by the death of the ego—the gathering together of the scattered fragments of the psyche through withdrawal of the projec-tions of that psyche into the abstract wilderness of matter, energy, space and time.

Personal apocalypse consciousness is a reality, whether or not a person is conscious of having it. Population pain is personal suffering, even when this translation is entirely subconscious. Yes, we share the experience of pain, just as we share positive experiences.

Positive Apocalypse Consciousness Apocalypse awareness is with us. It would be dishonest to say that intense experiences, challenging transitions or events that may be perceived as terrible will never take place. But it is also dishonest to say that there is no positive way of seeing these events. Positive apocalypse consciousness is essential. This constructive view and use of our instinctive apocalypse awareness will purify the application of protective awareness and reduce the odds of its mingling with blinding fear.

Positive apocalypse consciousness is a state of knowing how to admit to oneself the difference between blinding fear and protective awareness, and how to resist labeling one’s sensations as one or the other of these fears when others label them for you. Positive apocalypse consciousness also involves a sense of rising to meet the challenge of any transition, of any death. Seeing a purpose, a positive outcome, as a distinct possibility — even if that positive outcome is simply that one can make it through an ordeal — is essential. Endings Are Beginnings therefore works with some basics of this positive consciousness.

Allow the ideas offered here to dialogue with your own heart, mind and soul. Try the ideas on; test them in daily life. Question as much of this as you feel driven to. Honest questioning and ongoing dialogue are means of discovering truth for yourself and for all of us. And this is the surest route to knowledge: your knowledge, our knowledge, species knowledge, living knowledge. Fear, if read with understanding, is a signal. We must learn to read our own and others’ fears for their meaning. We must learn to prevent fear from blocking us, disturbing us and withholding from us our abilities to navigate change and transition — even physical death —to a new place, a higher state.

The word (apocalupsis). Hence the title of ” Apocalypse ” so frequently given to the book. It is from the verb

Hence Atocalypis means a taking away of a veil (as when a statue is said to be unveiled), and thus bringing into view that which had been before hidden as by a veil. Unveiling is the equivalent English word. It is used, of course, in two senses , of a bringing to knowledge by the removing of the veil of ignorance ; or of he visible appearance of one who had previously been unseen, as though hidden by a veil.

The In understanding this acceleration of an evolution of consciousness coming to an omega point in time… it is important to first define the biblical word apocalypse that appears in so many texts of the end times that manipulate and create fear in the market place. The word Apocalypse means… (Greek: Apokalypsis; “lifting of the veil”) is a term applied to the disclosure to certain privileged persons of something hidden from the majority of humankind. Today the term is often used to refer to the end of the world, which may be a shortening of the phrase “apokalupsis eschaton”, which literally means “revelation at the end of the aeon, or age”. So we are in the apocalypse, the “lifting of a veil” is a rising of consciousness that knows no fear (a physical lifting of a veil of ignorance, superstition and religious dogma) of the unknown for those certain privileged individuals that can see themselves on the other side of the Omega point. This could easily apply to the understanding of the creational

“The Apocalypse”, the Revelation taking place in the completing phase of Creation… is this “lifting of the veil”… the veil is ignorance and superstition.

The perfect Now moment in the midst of Chaos, being disconnected from our Animal nature and the Old Reptilian Brain. This state of consciousness is the fulfillment of our evolution… a time when light would blaze across the planet… not physical light but “the light of consciousness”… the full descent of spirit into matter as prophesized by Teilhard de Chardin. When we rise to the challenge of our greater potential and do not cower in fear, we catch the wave of rising consciousness… lifting the veils of ignorance and superstition. This wave of consciousness showing us… humanity- “half-animal, half-human Sheeple slaves in a hell on earth”… as we rise above… back to spiritual beings having a human experience in a heaven on earth.

All awakened conscious people create their reality according to their belief systems, and they should know what they are. We are at the end of the age of ignorance and unsubstantiated belief systems living in an illusion, and we will be awakened in a series of shocks to what is really going on. The stage does seem to be set for a battle… when we look closer as an evolving consciousness… not one in the classical sense of good and evil but one over consciousness of an evolving human being… against a social consciousness, one that is asleep in ignorance.

If the masses stay asleep in their pods living an illusion. If the majority of the people around the world (80% masses, 20 % ruling classes) do not wake up, we may see “the end of time” as prophesied in the bible.

The Primacy of the Material World

We need to change our focus and begin to understand why this is happening and how…. So we will presently look to a solution from a point of view of science and quantum physics… that everything in our world is made up of energy… matter is nothing more than… atoms and empty space… that our collective minds have the ability to project a holographic vision of the world we live in. We currently need to begin to see that everything is made up of an Ancient Science of Spirit… an evolution of consciousness and energy, making anything possible. We need to demystify the coming changes and put everything in a balanced context, so we can clearly look at our options without the illusions of fears that have been drummed into us as a collective from the beginning of our present cycle.

This means we need to clarify a few things, develop an understanding of the evolution of consciousness, and see where it is evolving to, what is its divine plan… as an Ancient Science of Spirit? The problem of understanding the evolution of consciousness is that we are talking about it from within an illusion of a limited “materialist paradigm”. The idea that the world is flat, that matter is rock-solid and that our collective assumptions of our reality are linear, trustworthy and stable… and “all is well in wonderland Alice”. These are the illusions of society… ideas heavily promoted by the engines of commerce that fuel society, the Universities and the Media for a very large profit. To understand and unlock the doors to an evolution of consciousness we have to let go of our materialist point of view and open our minds.

It is in the end the stuff of nightmares and what has been called dark prophecy or conspiracy theory is actually ancient agenda in its final stages of being played out.

The purpose of these gang-stalking activities is not just to unnerve the target and make them look foolish or even crazy in public, or to frustrate or intimidate them, or to punish them for some perceived misdeed. The deeper purpose is to coerce them into conforming, to force them to silently accept what is going on, and to break their will and draw them into taking part in this system of control. Anyone around the target will be clueless as to what the target is experiencing, and the target will appear to be delusional should he or she mention anything to anybody. The sense of isolation that often results, due to a lack of anywhere to turn for help, is meant to break down the target and force his or her silent submission.

The Chakra System and the Seven levels The human body has been used for centuries as an example of the seven levels of consciousness. The seven chakras or Seven Seals as they were known in ancient times… are an indication of the energy vortexes that the seven levels of consciousness can respond to. The human body has many chakra points but only seven seals that all the chakra points come together to form these energy vortices.

In each of these seven levels, there are planes of existence where other beings live. Therefore, the human body becomes a holographic representation of the universe. The seven planes of existence start with the seventh seal (chakra) in the pituitary gland of the brain down to the first seal, which in the human body are the reproductive organs. We can see in the EMF spectrum that consciousness forms seven different levels. From the Bible and other ancient records, we can learn about the seven levels of consciousness.

Christ said that his ‘Fathers house had seven mansions or seven kingdoms’. (A search on the intemet will give you volumes of information on this eastern philosophy.) Our understanding of the chakra system is handed down from ancient Hindu teachings; this is where the Sanskrit word ‘chakra’ originated. These ancient teachings have been validated over the ages in practices of meditation, yoga and healing techniques. Chakras are anchored energy centers or vortexes in the human etheric body that correspond in etheric matter to the respective, and relatively more physical, glands and organs. In the Hindu tradition, the word chakra means ‘wheel”.

One of the major gateways through which energy enters the body is the top of the head. Where there is alignment and balance in the being, energy generally moves down the front of the central channel to the base of the spine, where it is collected, blended, amplified, and propelled up the back, through the spinal column, directly through the seven energy centers and out the top of the head. It is this simultaneous movement of energy up and down the central channel and in and out of the seven centers who create the electromagnetic field surrounding the physical body.

The world’s population is ignorant of the “Art of Transmutation of the Flesh into Spirit”…true Alchemy.

In human development… no part of the body evolves without a use…the unused part of the brain has been sitting dormant until someone learns how to turn it on [ the other 90%] possibly through the understanding, development, and use of concentrated nutritional products developed for the brain. We know very little about the brain, how it works, how gifted people can do what they do, yet the brain has continued to evolve and is now the last frontier in neuroscience research. This research and development of the brain will take up where evolution left off… and create an unbelievable amount of phyto-chemicals and nutrients for the human body and brain to evolve.. a greater mind and higher consciousness. This will allow the mind to generate frequencies that will cause a cascading affect throughout the whole neural structure… and open the other 90% waiting to be turned on. We have been nurtured by Gaia to evolve to this level, but it is not in the best interests of the Powers That Be” and the engines of commerce to be more intelligent than the beings controlling the Sheeple. However,it is our minds that are evolving beyond our genetics, and it is our minds that will evolve and aet us throuoh this crisis of consciousness.

EMF Radiation… the lon Effect and Chemical Trails in the Sky: To evolve to the next level… we have to consciously dodge all the evolutionary problems societies create in their life cycle… before they destroy themselves. Hundreds of Societies have risen and fallen in the last 100,000 years since the development of modern man…Homosapien. Let us look at what our technological society is doing to the planet that we are evolving on and what other effects it may cause in the illness-ridden guinea pigs and Sheeple.

One good reason that we might want to learn how to raise our vibratory frequency is because of the exponential rise of electromagnetic field (EMF) background radiation… Scientists estimate that YOUR daily exposure to EMF radiation is 100 Million Times higher than it was in your Grandparents’ time.

This frequency is lowering your biological vibratory frequency making you more susceptible to environmental pollution and disease as you age… disconnecting you from spirit and your true nature. In normal consumers all over the planet, research shows that these fields have a significant disruptive effect on the natural energy levels of your body. They magnify your body’s “flight or fight” responses, compounding your adrenal loads from other stressors and significantly reducing your ability to cope effectively. One of the greatest problems is that the EMF fields are adversely affecting… the dehydrated bodies in 80% of the people in the developed world… accelerating its effects… like running a race car without proper coolant.

Studies indicate that non-ionizing radiation causes everything from cancer in lab rats to neurological changes in humans. Human beings are very good conductors of microwave transmitted signals. Living organisms are themselves electromagnetic instruments of great sensitivity that can support a variety of electrical vibrations… these can be interfered with by external radiation… both at microwave and very much lower (ELF) frequencies… in a number of ways, from which adverse health effects can follow. It is everywhere, in this “Matrix of Society” almost as common as the air you breathe. If you’re like the average person living in modem society, there is not a time during your usual day when you are not exposed to electromagnetic fields (EMF). This type of environment has never existed in the history of human civilization before. What consequence does this type of invisible presence have on your ability to function fully as an organic human being? And what effect does it have on your ability to be conscious…

“This frequency is lowering your biological vibratory frequency making you more susceptible to environmental pollution”.

Technology lowering humans biological vibratory frequency making you more susceptible to environmental pollution”, and in same wau its fear that makes the mind or brain susceptible to negative mind-mass programming. Through technology and fear they can hold back all human spiritual progress, so they can´t raising their inner vibrational frequencies through the seven sealed chakras and activate the dormant 10 etheric dna strands of light. Low vibrational feeding the ego and keeps the real spirit of life in a sleep-stasis or slumbering state of ignorance.

No revelation ; for it is covered with a strong and thick veil of ignorance .

We are truly on a prison planet, no longer having a natural connection with the divine spirit, “Why”. The story of the “Garden of Eden” (and paradise lost), is the eviction from Paradise. This story becomes our true reality. But instead of eating an apple from a sacred tree, “what” could be the true story? Remember the old saying “an apple a day keeps the doctor away”. This is not just a fancy saying, because the apple has a monatomic substance which can heal you, and more importantly helps to activate the pineal gland between the brain (every ones third eye). But instead of nourishing our stargate to gain access to a higher self, this ability has been manipulated with chemicals in the air, food, and water. A time when a different race came from heaven to earth, who we call god’s because they were so advanced. Revelation quotes that these god’s created man to their likeness, well they improved mans ability on a molecular level, more or less changing our DNA. They changing the dna and then unplugged the other 10 etheric strands, and this is how humankind become trapped in history of the limited 2 dna strand. Fear keep the third eye of higher intuition and information closed and fear controls visions and visions is revelations and this comes from the third eye of intuition. When the 2 dna strands is hacked, then the visions is hacked, and then information is hacked, and this hacking the process of re-learning and this blocks the process of re-programming the old evolutionary brain to the higher state of mind they have disconnected humankind from.

Transmutation is truly an art form that comes with the acceptance of beauty that exists in all things. Transmutation is appreciating the life in all things. All things have energetic markers. Through silence and observation one can come to understand these markers. Usually the world we perceive is through another’s perception. Fear and doubt have taught us to suppress our own concerns. As we heal and grow, our perception of life’s energetic markers will bring us a clearer interpretation. Through silence and observation (meditation) one can come to understand these energy markers.

There is forces of darkness, rulers, authorities and principalities that requires that we don´t understand these energetic markers by keeping humankind in the state of ignorance – in the state of illusions and fear based consciousness, trapped, captivated and imprisoned in the Matrix. Then these higher energetic markers can be understand through the art of yoga and meditation, and by lowering, stilling and quitening beta brain waves to the theta state of silence, it is through observation one can come to understand these markers. But the powers of darkness is in action today´s society and using mass consciousness and organized gang stalking, and organized gang stalking stalking, interfering and noise/sound posion, both the inner and outer enviroment with constant sounds, noise and voices to create distractions in the spiritual progress and transformation.

Fear has numerous faces and has been engrained into our systems in countless ways. Fear is reflected in our beliefs, emotions, and the collective consciousness grids. It is locked in our energy bodies, organs, and cells, and it is an inherent part of our minds. This means that stepping out of fear is a process that requires time, diligence, perseverance, willingness, and a clear intent to never give up, even though the process might at times be incredibly frustrating. We will never step into a new consciousness if we are not willing to undertake this path. And we will never make a real connection with the Sidhe. The process of stepping out of fear has three major steps: connecting with your heart (divine essence), connecting with the frontal lobes of your brain, and the stimulation of the frontal part of your amygdala.

Living in this three-dimensional world, we experience limited understanding and illusionary perceptions of the ego mind. The Ego bends every effort to quicken vibration. Man’s ego-perception and vision has lately been reduced to a single dimension; he now thinks of his activity as limited to on the surface of the earth. Then the lower ego-self vibrates slow it can´t access higher levels of consciousness and therefore not vibrating fast enough to be in touch with the spiritual realm. The Earth we are speaking of is what you perceive as your planet. Your planet is not all what you see or think it is. Earth is a vibrational mind prison and humans is kept within a full-scale vibratory imprisonment or enslavement of this world. To live life in the lower realms of 3D demands that we lose our connection with God in order to experience duality, both sides of the opposing energies of our world.

The Ego bends every effort to quicken vibration.

Man’s ego-perception and vision has lately been reduced to a single dimension; he now thinks of his activity as limited to on the surface of the earth.

Then the lower ego-self vibrates slow it can´t access higher levels of consciousness and therefore not vibrating fast enough to be in touch with the spiritual realm.

The ego has become the “God” of the collective awareness among energy systems within the mass of collective energy. The dividing factor of separation from spiritual energy and God’s energy was when the ego entered and took over the unconsciousness of the energy system. As long as the ego remains in control of the energy system, the truth of knowing God is inhibited. Spiritual energy and God’s energy must converge to allow total connection to the higher levels of consciousness. The ego suppresses spirituality and God’s energy, thereby, disconnecting the energy system from believing in anything greater than itself.

The god of this controls this world because the Ego bends every effort to quicken vibration to be change to higher vibrations. Therefore humans is held in a reality where one single dimension dominates the mind and perception. When vibrations not vibrating fast enough it prevents humans from be in touch with the spiritual realm. Low vibrational frequencies keeps humankind disconnected from the Divine God, disconnected from their real higher divine nature. To live life in the lower realms of 3D demands that we lose our connection with God in order to experience duality, both sides of the opposing energies of our world.

This is the concept of duality and concept of the matrix or the mind prison on Earth. Its a “vibratory prison” where humans in kept in one dimension and one dominating vibration – this vibration is based on fear or the fear frequency. The veil of ignorance produces fear for the unknown and fear for the unknown is a result when humankind don´t are in touch with their other higher vibrations. Lack of knowledge creates fear for the unknown or it creates fear what is outside the single dimension of reality humankind is expericing through the ego-perception. And mass consciousness buing his concept because mass consciousness is the egp of this concept of duality.

Once you have an account of your belief system, you then face a second difficulty: acknowledging that your actions and current path may not be leading you to a higher vibrational existence. Within this second difficulty, there are two blocks: the ego, which cannot admit to an imbalanced course, and tribal pressure (mass consciousness), which hinders you from going against what is accepted by everyone around you. Humankind is enslaved within a three dimensional vibratory mind prison based on low vibrational frequencies, and mass consciousness (the ego) bends every effort to quicken vibration or raising their inner vibrations.

Low vibrational frequencies creates an enviroment that prevents vibrations to vibrating fast enough to be in touch with the spiritual realm. The link to God is broken and disconnected and this creates free space to the ego to become god of this world. The ego teaching there is no god and them who think they can become like god´s are wicked, but the ego itself can become god and rules the world. Low vibrations breaks the communication link to the divine source of light and when vibrations not vibrating fast enough to be in touch with the spiritual realm they also are disconnected from the path as multidimensional divine beings.

When you observe in present-time, the veil is neutralized, allowing observation from the Higher Mind. It’s here where this partition or veil is dismantled and reconstructed into its originally intended function: to open your awareness of the multidimensional consciousness from where you have come. Here the hypothalamus, medulla oblongata, pineal gland and seventh and eighth chakras become more engaged, the ninth, tenth and eleventh chakras become accessible. Here, with the use of higher-vibrational Light and colour vibrations, the coarse tissue of the corpus callosum will be altered into a softer electrochemical gel, allowing the right and left hemispheres of the brain to function as originally intended, in full communication with each other.

Our fear is manipulated. heightened. and eventually harvested. This tactic also promotes fear waves of bioenergy to halt, or obstruct, the energetic evolutionary impulse of humankind. We are being sold short not only on who we are but also on what we can become. As a consequence, we are selling our future(s) short and not only for ourselves but also for the new generations to come.

Man has consciousness of his physical body, of his physical environment. He has no consciousness of his Higher Self because he cannot see it. His ignorant mind shrouds his spirit. It is vital that every effort be made to realise his real self, the spirit. Only deep meditation will lift the veil of ignorance and reveal to man his true nature.The ultimate goal of meditation is to reach this pure consciousness. It is the highest state of consciousness man can attain and become capable of enjoying his full potential. If the body does not get sufficient rest and sleep it gets out of gear. So it is with the spirit. The spirit lost in the abyss of the mind and unable to manifest itself has made us run into spiritual bankruptcy.

Once a person has journeyed through the Five Bodies in meditation, life begins to unfold in the fullness of time. These people are called Gurus or leaders, though each individual that has reached this point of awareness is still evolving and still considers himself a student.

By using these meditations, the inner awareness unfolds and with it, the psychic development. Things not perceived before become obvious to the mind, emotions and body for self and others. Past, present and future occurrences are known and accepted. At the same time, healing abilities for self and others manifest. With patience and practice, an individual becomes a metaphysician; a living walking example of what many are still searching for within themselves.

The heart knows no fear; it doesn’t allow negative emotions from the past to hold us back from achieving wonderful things. Then the heart doesn´t fear anything this world prevents people from opening their spiritual heart. The spiritual heart also represent Christ/Buddha Consciousness. The ego is fear and has no control of heart energies, so it keep humankind trapped and imprisoned within the three lower physical chakras and its materialistic-reality of matter.

The heart knows no fear, in same way darkness can´t exist in light, or low vibrations can´t exist in high levels of consciousness vibrations, and the ego can´t access higher levels of consciousness because of its structures of opposites concepts of duality.

The only thing stopping us from being the love we are is the fear-based programming that we have been imprinted with.

The Material Model is a Mass Mind Consciousness belief, as is the negative programming most people have regarding health and aging.

One of the earliest benefits of television was the ability to project important news throughout society, quickly and accurately. Being able to inform the public of current affairs prompted energy systems to be more aware of what was going on in their community, as well as the nation. Initially news outlets were designed to report factual, reliable, accurate information to keep society informed. However, this would change as television developed. The more that the true energy of the mass collective energy permeated into television the more negative the information being projected became. Negative news stories tend to get the main priority of media coverage. The ego finds gratification in knowing that suffering, pain, chaos, and hatred, violence, and earthly primitive and physical earthly intelligence still flourish in the mass of collective energy. These negative associations reinforce the presence of the ego. A world without such negativity would mean that the ego wouldn’t exist.

Media outlets have become the eyes of the mass of collective energy. Whatever dominating energy of the mass of collective energy develops into is what news media outlets capitalize on. Unfortunately, the current controlling energy of the mass of collective energy is negativity. Therefore, the consensus of most all news is negative. Negativity feeds negativity. This process of negative mirroring is not by accident. As long as the ego is in control fear, anxiety, hate, cynicism and negativity will always be in charge.

These negative traits are built by the false reality system within the mass of collective energy. We are living in a time where positive energy is constantly being thwarted by negativity. Therefore, as long as we perceive negativity as being the governing force, it will always be projected and reflected upon us. The ego is in a constant struggle for supremacy within itself. What stimulates the power of the ego is its ability to struggle between negativity and positivity. This constant dual for power is what created the entire universe and it is also the same governing force of the ego, which is the internal universe of unconsciousness.

The ego believes in what it wants to hear to satisfy itself, regardless if the projection is true or not. If negativity is the governing energy of the ego, then it will most likely be attracted to all the negative aspects of life. If the ego is governed by positive energy then it is most likely attracted to the positive aspects of life. Modern media can directly influence the mass of collective energy by manipulating the truth to polarize energy systems against certain belief systems and political views.

Mind-control programs can be subtle and not so subtle. The handlers attach themselves to us and set us up with thoughts that trigger our emotions, so that we become trapped in a loop of playing out the same behavior patterns. The ego, which feeds on fear, makes itself the main focus. These negative programs keep on feeding on us, and through us they are also set up to feed on others.

Doing the clearings enables us to jump out of the box of limitations that those programs saddle us with, and they enable us to access the truth of our hearts to create from a place of connection with who we really are.

Dogmas are beliefs we get imprinted with in religions, schools, financial institutions, the healthcare industry, the entertainment industry, the media, and more. They have been created in such a way as to program us with certain acceptable standards to which we must conform. The dogmas of these institutions are underpinned by fear and confusion, saying that this is the way things have to be, and they reinforce beliefs of right and wrong within us. The people who are the controllers of the money supply and the institutions realize that if the population doesn’t adhere to their codes of control, then they will lose their power.

Dogmas are beliefs that are designed to shift the balance of power to the controllers. Dogmas are encoded into the system for the shelter of elite families, providing the framework of lies that empower the institutions. The dogmas propagate fear, and they must not be challenged lest the wizard’s curtain drop down to expose the whole charade. For instance, we may not think of the media as an institution that is controlled by the dark forces, but if we trace who funds them with advertising and who controls their licenses, then the picture becomes dear: they are interconnected to a vast structure that holds this negative programming in place. We have come to realize their agenda of fear and control has been in place for quite some time, and that it has been benefitting the same few elite families for many centuries.

Curses are a trick of the dark ones. Handlers use curses to attach themselves to us; the dark ones try to control us and trap our minds into having us play out a loop of fear. When others place curses on us, it gives them a false sense of power because they think they are in some way controlling or taking away power from beings whom they perceive as their enemies or not their equals.

This is not the way of the new energy of the higher dimensions. Curses are part of an agenda based in fear.

From the double helix model of DNA, we are evolving once more into a complex model of at least twelve strands. We are going from being carbon based to crystalline based. Our brains have been rewired to accommodate these higher frequencies, by activating parts of the brain that have been dormant for a very long time. These parts of the brain correspond to what scientists have called “junk DNA.” Our DNA has within itself a map of who we are and who we’ve been. All of us have lived many lifetimes; we have been tested time and time again with different issues and life lessons. There is always an originating lifetime where a negative program started, where the handlers came in and manipulated us in some way to feed themselves with negative programming. Fear is always at the root of their programs to enslave us. Fear is a total disconnect from Creator-Source, and this leaves us open to being taken over by their negative programming.

The more that our journey through this life reflects on and focuses on the love we are, the more we are able to take in the higher light codes, which make it harder for those of the darkness to control not just us but the whole of creation.

You can think of the process of doing the clearings as a way of making more space for the higher frequencies of love and light to come in. We do this by dearing what has been keeping us in the same patterns of fear. The clearings facilitate an unimpeded flow of universal love with the higher aspects of our being. The connection we have with Creator-Source is realized and maintained through our conscious intent for the bodies of our being to be centered in our heart, balanced with the transmission and reception of higher light codes through the pineal gland.

The spirited clearings are a co-creation with the unseen light beings. When we merge with them to remove the negative programs based in fear, we rise up into their level of high vibration and become entrained with them. Truly on the interdimensional levels of our being, we are One.

When we do the clearings, we are communing with the light beings and the higher aspects of our own being; we are bringing higher frequencies of love and light into our being. These clearings will give you the momentum to unravel the layers of programming that the dark forces have orchestrated within the collective consciousness over many millennia.

The spiritual heart will opening opening when the three lower chakras have been conquered.

The heart space is the heaven of all true devotion, beyond all form, division and limitation, where all the Gods and Goddesses become one. Those who do not know the space within the heart have missed the most important thing in life. They have condemned themselves to be ever seeking and striving and never come to rest. Because we are afraid of being nothing, we must ever struggle to become something. We fall from spirit, which is immate-rial, into matter, which being formed is mortal, limited and uncertain.

Life dwells in the space within the heart, not merely our per-sonal life, but all life throbbing, pulsating and vibrating everywhere. Our true Self dwells in the space within the heart, ever at peace, far removed from all the worries of the mind and all the strife of the ego. The space within the heart is our true home, in which we can let everything go, including our body and our identity, and become completely free.

Fear and its creator, the ego, are making a tremendous effort to convince us that the fears are valid and should be listened to. The ego ego wants you to believe that without struggle and suffering you would be nothing and nobody. And this is how it continues; fear of death, fear of exlusion from the mass consciouness mind.

The ego is blind to union of any kind, blind to the unity of two or more; blind to the possibility of one family of God. The ego depends on fear to control us, and we live our lives full of fear, doubt, smallness, and low self-esteem. So the ego constant working againts Oneness to keep the state of duality in place – its done by uisng fear programming.

God having created all that is real, anything not Created by God cannot be real. The ego is nothing more than a thought system, made by man and therefore not real. It only seems very real. Most of all the ego mind fears the soul, because the ego knows it is itself false and the soul is truth. The ego knows given a chance the soul will expose the ego for what it is, a lie. Light eliminates darkness, and the light of the soul will expose the nothingness of the ego and bring to light all of the lies the ego supplies in order to guarantee its continuation. The ego fears from be dissolved and therefore fear union and unity at higher levels of consciousness. The ego can´t exist on higher levels of Oneness because the ego is duality and God represent Oneness. This is how the ego prevent anyone from raising their inner vibrations and instead producing a low vibrational enviroment that´s controls the human mind. This ego has become god of this world.

The ego creates mass consciousness and fear controls and fuels the masses of the humankind. With fear follows intimdation and persecution if one not become followers of mass mind contol programming. Mass consciousness then become the organized gang stalking mind, the organized bully mind, or the collective gaslighter.

Fear “shocks” ego (news in media), breaking the innate coarseness of the heart, that coarseness or egocentricity that prevents one from being truly receptive and perceptive to reality outside oneself in general, and the Divine Essence of all reality in particular. The ego system is only a belief system and only has the power of fear to sustain its existence. The Holy Spirit is the antidote. The Holy Spirit speaks for the Christ/Buddha Consciousness, which of course is the opposite of the negative ego/fear-based consciousness.

We lose our inner space and become an outer thing, a external outer ego and mass consciousness, a mere body or person confined within a few feet of flesh. We give up our light and become a shadow of what other people think. True meditation is returning to the space within the heart. It consists of withdrawing and immersing the mind in the inner heart space, in which the mind gets lost and loses itself like a drop within the sea. This requires that we sink deep inside our-selves, merging everything within the core of our being. Yet while easy to understand conceptually and not difficult to feel emotionally, a complete merging into the inner space is not easy. Though the most direct it is also the most difficult of all practices and the fruit of all. Few advanced yogis are able to accomplish it, even after years of practice. To move into the spiritual heart requires that we withdraw our entire attention from the field of the senses, directing all of our energy within.

A tremendous fire of spiritual practice is necessary to get there. It requires an inward death and transfiguration even while the body is alive. To really fully return to the spiritual heart requires the consummate energization of our entire life and conscious-ness. Yet any contact with the spiritual heart, however minor, must sow the seeds of its eventual realization. To open that space within we must release the knots of fear and desire that bind us to the outer world. We must let go of all the stress and tension that we create around ourselves trying to sustain a personal life or promote a personal identity. Space is our true nature. We must open our hearts to the inner space of pure awareness. That is the ultimate goal of all life, the begin-ning and end of everything, of which all that we know is but a shadow.

We suffer because we do not have a Self. Our identity is dependent upon some thing or person that we are connected with. Identity that is dependent, that is given by another—like a name or title—is a fiction. It is a superimposition of thought, and though it may distract us for a time, it cannot afford us peace. We suffer because we seek the Self in the notself, the Subject in the object. We try to find happiness by achievement and acquisition in the external world. But achievement is becoming a bigger or better object. Acquisition is the accumulation of objects around our assumed objectivity or materiality. But to be an object is to be heavy. dependent and transient. Objectivity is not a state of happiness or fulfillment. Happiness is only possible in eternal existence, which is only possible in the pure Subject. As long as we think we need something to be ourselves, we will always be dependent on another. We will always be somebody else or trying to please someone else. We will never be ourselves but will be trapped in the conditioned responses around us. We will be victims of other peoples thoughts.

“The unchanging reality dwells within the heart. It shines by itself, how can anyone write about it? In the middle of the lotus of the heart, supreme as the Absolute, the pure I is directly perceived. It shines by the nature of the Self. Enter into the heart, diving with your mind and your thoughts or by control of the breath. Be one who abides in the Self.”

The doors of the superconscious

The first stage of our work on the superconscious was to understand and rediscover the hidden treasures of the tradition, as we have explained above. We understood a basic principle: the doors of the superconscious open briefly during the initiations, and with the healing practice, which is a re-activation of these initiations. This is something that we knew by experience. We also learned, that as soon as the conscious and the unconscious are in harmony, as soon as they merge, a new energy appears, a new force descends, the superconscious, and it creates a totality.

To speak in terms of energy we can say that if the purification of the lower chakras is done, the real functioning of the heart chakra takes place, and the Divine Energy can flow inside. The Divine Force can descend, and its difficult installation in the spiritual heart can progressively happen.

The superconscious appears to be a reality of our nature, free of the limitations of the body and the mind, to which we have access, in certain energetic conditions, when our frequencies reach a certain level. This energetic level can be the result of a psychological harmony between conscious and unconscious minds in certain natural conditions, that we have all experienced exceptionally in our respective lives, as artists have, maybe more frequently. These frequencies can also be the result of Sadhanna, meditation, spiritual practice and purification; in this case the level will be constant and installed, but the efforts are tremendous.

The heart is the most powerful cosmic antenna having the ability to receive or remit messages around the world instantly, faster than the speed of light. The heart is t he seat of intuitive wisdom, the conduit to Universal intelligence and the fountainhead of all emotions. Through the heart you are instantly connected to this invisible power and energy, infinite in scale and magnitude.

Heart—A Powerful Force

The heart contains the most powerful inner force that must be reckoned with; it is an unlimited source of passion, creativity and inspiration. Real adventure begins from the heart. It is where you decode the purpose of your life on this planet, and it is where real transformation happens. The heart has the ability to develop control over sense organs; it is where you re-illuminate your love and your relationships in your life. It is the direct link to the universal birthing cradle of the cosmos … it is where you have the capacity to be instantly in touch with anybody or everybody in the world. It is where you experience unimaginable bliss and ecstasy. The thoughts that are imbued with the energy from the heart are more powerful and have the capacity to change anything in this world.

The power to create beauty, power to create infinite wealth, power to heal, power to manifest anything you desire; these all lay dormant in your heart, and you hold the key to unlock your potential. Once you understand it, and you have tried and decoded the message from your heart and start putting faith in this invisible source of energy, a tremendous transformation will take place in your life. Your life will change . . . you will know and understand that there is nothing impossible in this world.

Most humans are only dimly aware of their minds except as bothersome chatter that keeps them from getting to sleep at night or interferes with their daily lives. Their heads are filled with mundane thoughts about themselves, other people and material things, which keeps them stuck in their ruts. It is their choice, with free will, to remain at this lower level, but they may also choose to raise their consciousness to higher levels by paying attention to what they have instead of what they don’t have— because the mind is the uniting force of the spiritual and physical world.

The bridge. By choosing, with free will, good over evil, spiritual over physical, by consciously learning to control the flow and direction of thoughts through the mind, humans will gain access to their higher powers— not for personal gain but the good of humanity and the planet. It doesn’t mean one can no longer have fun or own stuff, but what is really important is put into perspective. This raises the vibratory rate of the physical brain, which opens the conscious mind to the superconscious mind… as if a door were opened and one entered into the Light.

The constant inflow of positive thoughts and elimination of negative thoughts accelerates the process. You choose your reality by what you pay attention to, where your thoughts dwell, by what occupies your mind most of the time. Energy follows thought. The state your world is in today is a reflection of Man’s level of consciousness yesterday. Man, through the evolutionary process, will be reunited with his divine nature, eventually. As he is now ruled by his desires for material things, he will soon purify his heart by focusing his thoughts on divine love and rise above his carnal nature. Accepting it as pan of one’s self while knowing that it doesn’t define oneself. As an individual, you may wait it out, through as many more incarnations as it takes to compensate for the karma you accumulated by continuing to give in to the temptations and attractions of the material world— or you can choose to transform yourself in this lifetime.

When everything you think and do reflects Christ-Consciousness (Love, Compassion, Empathy, Kindness, Caring, Altruism, Selflessness), you will experience the transformation the Master Jesus came to teach and comprehend the gift of eternal life— the sudden recognition that you don’t die, this body dies but you simply continue to transform… as a caterpillar transforms itself into a butterfly.

Yogis say samadhi is the door to superconscious states, the gateway to liberation.

The Inner Stratosphere

Yoga is samadhi, the ancient yogic texts say. But what is samadhi? Most of us innocently begin yoga classes in hopes of improving our physical health and peace of mind. As we advance in our study and practice, however, we learn that ashtanga yoga, “the eight limbs of yoga,” leads to a state of awareness called samadhi. Often we have the impression this is some incredibly elevated state of consciousness acces-sible only to the most advanced yogis, and that anyone who experiences it automatically becomes enlightened.

Samadhi is a tool which can open us to the realms of extrasensory powers or can carry us all the way through to the liberated state.

Your programming system is made up of three separate compartments in your mind called the conscious, subconscious, and superconscious:

• Your conscious mind relates to your senses and your body;

• your subconsious mind is your soul; it is between the conscious mind and the superconscious mind and communicates as a middleman between them.

• and your superconscious mind represents the Universal Intelligence, Spirit, or the God force that surrounds you and flows within you as your Innate Intelligence.

What you read, watch on television, listen to, and experience firsthand is taken in by your conscious mind which will funnel all the destructive, disempowering and terrorizing information you receive directly to your subconscious mind. This can be harmful to you as it is your subconscious mind that is your power to create your world!

The Influence of the Media

Current estimates suggest that the average person is bombarded with more than 3,000 advertisements a day from television, radio, T-shirts, billboards, and the Internet—all of which constantly inundate us with messages that strike at our insecurities. In marketing circles it is known as aggressive, in-your-face tactics. The desired result leaves one with an underlying sense of inadequacy if not an inferiority complex. There is no doubt this method works, otherwise marketers would move on to a different strategy. Corporate marketing is only part of the fear-based media equation.

Both local and national news broadcasts have discovered that the addictive nature of fear sells. Even the Weather Channel has changed its focus to broadcast weather-related disasters between forecast updates just to keep viewers’ attention. More-over, the federal government was accused of using the media to fan the flames of anxiety with hyper-vigilant color-coded terrorism alerts. One of the best ways to increase your tolerance to negative media is to reduce your exposure to it, limiting the time you spend watching television and social media, if not getting rid of it altogether.

Although it’s true that it is difficult, if not impossi-ble, to give sincere thanks for a crisis the moment it appears (that’s called denial), continuously dwelling on a problem only tends to make things worse. A shift in consciousness toward those things that are blessings tends to balance the negative thoughts that per-sist from personal stressors. In doing so, an attitude of gratitude provides a perspective that helps resolve the problem at hand. In the midst of stress, regardless of the size of the problem, it is easy to take things for granted. The preferred option is to count your blessings by seeing even the smallest things as gifts. One aspect of refra ming suggests to do just that—adopt an attitude of gratitude for all the things in life that are going right, rather than curse all the things that seem to be going wrong. In a society where only 1 day out of 365 is dedicated to giving thanks, the regular practice of an attitude of gratitude may not seem to be encouraged, but remember, this is the same society that promotes fear-based television programming.

The news is dangerous to one’s mind. Seek the news behind the news, and you’ll be able to maintain a sound mind (you’re own mind). Masters of the human psyche are controlling your mind when you watch the daily news. Thoughts are implanted into your mind for the projection of lies into reality. Media masterminds work hard to get you into groupthink and subservience. If you watch media programming enough, they’re thoughts will become your thoughts and their ways will become your ways without you knowing it. Wise Ones living on earth have tried to warn humanity how this type of sorcery works, but fools won’t listen.

The movie business are putting their ‘spells’ on humankind.

Sometime in the near future we’re all in danger of losing our personal freedoms and becoming somebody’s slave in the New Global World Control.

Around 95% of the population are victims of the brainwashing and mass mind control of the corporate media establishment, and network television.

Once our physical consciousness is knowingly activated via kundalini, it will move out through our energy field, reconnecting our Sushumna with our Sutratma whilst connected to our body by our silver cord. This is when our DNA transforms its ‘junk DNA’ into working, viable DNA. It is the time we cross the Rainbow Bridge, the Antahkarana to become a multi-dimensional human being, a `soul-ar’ being, soon to become a Cosmic being.

The sushumna is the central nerve channel within the spinal cord. It flows from the base of the spine all the way up to the third eye area and then merges into an even more powerful Light ray called the sutratma, or silver cord. The sutratma extends through the crown, up through the soul and all the way to the monad. The chakras also reside in the etheric body, so the sushumna runs through and connects the seven third-dimensional chakras.

DNA activation is our link to infinity. This link is within us in every cell in our body and surrounding us in every layer of our electro-magnetic field. It is not a weak link; it exists in every part of our being waiting to be activated.

Related to the sutratma is the antahkarana. The antahkarana is also a thread that runs through our bodies and overlays the sutratma. The antahkarana acts as a communications wire or access road, allowing spiritual influences and consciousness to move in both directions. The word antahkarana is Sanskrit for “work between,” where it’s often called the “rainbow bridge” because it connects our diverse bodies together. It’s also called the “bridge between heaven and earth,” since it connects the personality to the soul and spirit, and is the channel by which one travels into spiritual Enlightenment.

Unlike the sutratma that always exists, the antahkarana must be built from the physical body up. Each soul has the task to develop or construct their antahkarana. Initially one isn’t aware of their higher bodies or principles. As one develops spiritual qualities, the antahkarana grows and expands, allowing one to receive impressions from the next higher plane, and to start using the next higher body. Early in one’s evolution the antahkarana exists only as a potential, and is like a thin thread, weak and basically unusable. Gradually the antahkarana strengthens and expands until it’s large enough to act like a wide multilane freeway.

A human being and their DNA are such disunited fields.

The Neurological – Brain System within each human being is also a disunited electro-magnetic field. Just as we think we have only two-strands of DNA, so we think our brain is the soft, moist electrical matter contained in our skull. But the reality is that just as we actually have twelve, not two strands of DNA, we also have six Neurological – Brain systems.

The disunity of these systems and our false belief that our world is the only reality is what causes us to use only 10% of our brain and our DNA. This belief prevents us from functioning in any reality other than the third dimension, the physical reality of our third and fourth-dimensional world. We cannot make contact with the other worlds until we make contact with the fourth dimension of our world. Then the non-physical dimensions where our forgotten ‘soul’ mates, our archetypal sub-personalities are stranded in limbo, will be available to us.

As we have seen, the emotion preventing us from doing this is our fear of losing our ‘self’. This fear is driven by our subconscious memory of our birth when we were separated from and lost our ‘soul’ connection. Having lost most of our ‘soul’, we’re petrified of losing the only part of it that we think remains, our ‘self’.

It is possible to re-activate our twelve-strand DNA, the 90% that scientists say is junk.

Yogis possess a higher state of consciousness known as super-consciousness. It is cultivated, and beyond the ordinary human range: It is said that one has to go beyond reason, and beyond consciousness, because that knowledge is beyond hearing, beyond what is heard, and beyond thought; it is revealed wisdom. By this super-consciousness, man becomes divine and free; he gains immortality, and his bondage is torn asunder. Instinct matures into reason and reason matures into Superconsciousness in the yogi. It is also known as Samadhi.

Being free from all knots of the heart, he attains immortality.

When all desires that dwell within the human heart are cast away, then a mortal becomes immortal. When all the knots that fetter the heart are cut asunder then a mortal becomes immortal.” . Liberated from the knots of the heart, he becomes immortal.”

The soul being freed from the grievous sojourn through the world of illusion attains infinite bliss. It wakes up from the “long dream” of the world-process to realize its identity as Divine being.

When all the knots that strangle the heart Are loosened, the mortal becomes immortal, Here in this very life.

It is being taught here that loosening the knots of the heart lotus will loosen the channel knots of the navel and secret place. “Having opened the brow center with the winds” refers to the opening of the channel knots at the wind chakra. Therefore all other channel knots are opened by this process also. If the channel knots are loosened, the life-sustaining wind and evacuative wind are halted from flowing in other channels and remain only. By this the great bliss of nonconceptualization arises constantly.

The knot of the Heart – this is the knot which must be loosened in order to achieve salvation: When the knot of the Heart is loosened, all doubts are cut off, and one’s deeds cease when he is seen—both the higher and the lower.

Christ Consciounsess is located at the heart chakra.

We should meditate single-pointedly On the indestructible drop that always abides at our heart. Those who are familiar with this meditation Will definitely develop exalted wisdom.

Here ‘exalted wisdom’ means the wisdom of the clear light of bliss experienced when the knots at the heart channel wheel are loosened. Of all .the knots in the central channel these are the most difficult to loosen; but if from the begin-ning of our completion stage practice we concentrate on our heart channel wheel this will help us to loosen these knots.

This meditation, therefore, is a powerful method for gaining qualified completion stage realizations. Why is this meditation called ‘blessing the self with seed’? ‘Self’ here refers to the indestructible wind and mind, which are our actual body and mind and therefore the basis for imputing our actual self.

Through this meditation our very subtle wind and mind are blessed, and as a result our very subtle mind transforms into the clear light of bliss. Seed’ here refers to the letter HUM, the seed-letter of Heruka. Until we receive signs that our five winds are actually entering, abiding, and dissolving within our central channel, we simply imagine that this is happening. We imagine that we perceive the eight signs from the mirage-like appearance up to the clear light, and then fix our mind single-pointedly on this imagined clear light.

Once we have completely loosened the central channel knots at our heart through the power of relying upon the action mudra, when we subsequently meditate on inner fire we shall generate powerful spontaneous great bliss. Because for us the phenomenon of inner fire meditation performs a function similar to that of a consort it is called the ‘phenom-enon mudra’. The realization of the union of great bliss and emptiness is called ‘Mahamudra’, or ‘great seal’, which means ‘great indestructible truth’.

When our continuously residing mind transforms into spontaneous great bliss that realizes emptiness through a generic image it is called ‘ultimate example clear light’. The term ‘ultimate’ reveals that it is a fully qualified clear light, and ‘example’ means that we can use this realization as an example to understand how we can accomplish the actual meaning clear light, the union of great bliss and emptiness.

Through meditating continually on ultimate example clear light it will transform into meaning clear light. Ultimate example clear light is therefore an example that illustrates its meaning, namely meaning dear light. Meaning clear light is a continuously residing mind that is the nature of spontaneous great bliss realizing emptiness directly.

Then Man is freed from all sense of reality of sense objects.

So even within our self there exit forces that can prevent an idea from attaining consciousness These forces constitute the veil of ignorance. From what we can learn about such ideas, it becomes easy to see that even the so-called external objects may be within the self and yet may not be always perceived. It is only when th antagonistic forces are removed and the veil of ignorant ‘s lifted that a particular object floats up to the surface of consciousness. It is held, therefore, that the activity o antahkarana in the case of perception consists in rending the veil of ignorance

In spite of the cit underlying all this diversified objective world which is but the transformation of ignorance, the former cannot manifest itself by itself, for the creations being of ignorance they are but sustained by modifications of ignorance. The diversified objects of the world are but transformations of the principle of which is neither real nor unreal. It is the nature that it veils its own creations. Thus on each of the objects created by the by its creating capacity there is a veil by its veiling capacity. But when any object comes in direct touch with antahkarana through the senses the antatikarana becomes transformed into the form of the object, and this leads to the removal of the veil on that particular form—the object, and as the self-shining cit is shining through the particular state, we have what is called the perception of the thing.

The antahkarana, like a lamp, serves as a transparent transmitter of the light of consciousness which,” projecting it on the object, removes the veil (the ignorance.

The sushumna path is not used correctly and safely until the antahkarana has been built and the Monad and Personality are thereby related, even if it is only by the most tenuous thread.

The final intuition which dispels the veil of ignorance and brings self-knowledge is a function, a vrtti of the antahkarana

It is antahkarana that limits a man who is in reality identical with the Supreme Soul. This identity is realised when the veil of ignorance is removed.

Ignorance veils the nature of the self-luminous

Meditation tears out all veils.

Duality is caused by the effects of antahkarana; knowledge breaks the bond of objectivity and illusory appearances.

it is also declared that there is a false veil (of ignorance)

Mind veils reality, mind also unveils. Lower knowledge is deceptive only in the sense that it veils reality.

When the veil of ignorance is lifted, the “many” are perceived as the “One. For when the veil of mere Appearances has been lifted we are no longer deceived into accepting what Seems for what Is.

A veil divides Mind and Supermind

Waking up

Spinoza asks us to wake up from our conditioned mind, to go deeper into ourselves and discover a new understanding of reality. He knows this will take time and patience as we gain a growing awareness of how we’ve evolved to our present conditioned state. Eventually, we start to allow the deeper process of our intuition to hold greater sway over our lives.

Our intuition, after all, is that part of our mind connected to something bigger than just our brain! For Spinoza and mystics from many traditions over many millennia, our return to pure consciousness is understood as an enlightened state, a higher state of our being. Beyond our logical minds is our rich, deep, intuitional nature, intimately connected to the mind of God, to the one substance. Our mind and God’s mind are one mind. We’ll continue discussing this in greater depth, but, for now, allow the possibility that the weather will be changing—big time—and prepare yourself for it. Fog and low-visibility will be giving way to clear-seeing and deeper understanding! Our journey with Spinoza is still in its early stages. Many are the obstacles that can pull us back from progressing on the path to a full experience of his highest form of knowledge.

Spinoza points us toward a life of joy, wisdom, and blessedness that, deep inside, we have been longing and searching for over many years. This is not a journey for the faint of heart or for those wishing for instant gratification, even in the form of enlightenment. Spinoza is giving us the keys to unlock the realization of a higher knowledge within us. Once we step through the doorway to that new awareness, we’ll no longer need the keys he’s generously supplied.

“I must become aware of the total field of my own self, which is the consciousness of the individual. It is only then, when the mind goes beyond this individual, that I can become a light to myself that never goes out”.

Spinoza has much more to teach about our nature, showing us how, if we practice and assimilate what we have learned, we can operate at more potent levels of awareness. As we understand our intuitive nature more completely, we will begin trusting it as a bird trusts its wings to carry it through the air. Our awareness of the different gradations of human knowledge and our learning to use our intuition will carry us to the highest pinnacles where we discover our true nature and our greatest potential.

Therefore, Overmind is a veil and a principle of Ignorance. It veils because it creates discord. The global consciousness splits the Reality into different cosmic consciousness. Evolution must, therefore, ascend to a further step in order that it may obtain complete freedom from Ignorance.

The transition to Supermind through Overmind is a passage from Nature as we know it into Supernature.

If we wish to change the human being for the better , this veil has to be removed so that the Supermind can operate upon the human being .

Mind proceeds by division and distinction. It distorts the reality. It expresses only relative truth. It does not reveal the omniscient knowledge. It always creates distinction and has no vision of true unity; it has no vision of creation of many out of the one.

It is only after the veil is lifted and the dividing mind is overpowered that the mind gets back to the truth of things. Mind is really a subordinate instrumentation of the truth-consciousness. The fundamental error of the mind is “this fall from self-knowledge”. If it returns back to truth from which it has fallen, it becomes the final action of truth-consciousness. Mind cannot see the things as a whole. The difference between mind and supermind lies in their manner of apprehending reality.

The rending of the veil is the condition of the Life Divine.

The mind is antahkarana, inner instrument, and it is essentially a dividing or polarizing consciousness.

Mind – it is merely limited to a partial knowledge, not an integral knowledge of the truth.

The word ‘unconscious’ in this context does not mean the total absence of all consciousness. It rather implies the presence of consciousness in a veiled, self-alienated form, in a state of involution, in a state of involution, in a somnambulistic mode of operation. Integral knowledge of Being bridges the gulf, and resolves the dichotomy postulated by the dualistic thinking of the divided mind.

All beings are united in that One Self and Spirit but divided by a certain separativity of consciousness, an ignorance of their true Self and Reality in the mind, life and body. It is possible by a certain psychological discipline to remove this veil of separative consciousness and become aware of the true Self, the Divinity within us and all.

‘The mind is incapable of realizing this higher unity because it operates in terms of isolated concepts and dichotomies, that divide up the essential unity of the reality into separate and conflicting bits that cannot again be reunited. Hence it cannot also lcok beyond the ego and its separate existence to the underlying unity.

A thin veil separates Mind from Supermind, and when that veil is removed, through the descent of the one the ascent of the other is achieved.

When God reveals or inspires there is a psychological event in the minds of those affected, a visio prophetica of some sort, an awareness of what is commonly hidden from human perception. *It is not God who is wrapped in veils; the veils are the ignorance and darkness, the unconsciousness which normally envelops our own minds.

There is cosmic ignorance as well as individual ignorance. We come in touch with cosmic ignorance in deep sleep. But when we awake, we have a thicker veil of untruth, of unreality, hiding Truth, in spite of our waking consciousness. Our individualized personality is a product of this Maya that veils the Truth and at the same time creates this whole phenomenon out of it.

The Divine descends from pure existence through the play of Consciousness-Force and Bliss and the creative medium of Supermind into cosmic being; we ascend from Matter through a developing life, soul and mind and the illuminating medium of supermind towards the divine being. The knot of the two, the higher and the lower hemisphere, is where mind and supermind meet with a veil between them.

The rending of the veil is the condition of the divine life in humanity; for by that rending, by the illumining descent of the higher into the nature of the lower being and the forceful ascent of the lower being into the nature of the higher, mind can recover its divine light in the all-comprehending supermind, the soul realise its divine self in the all-possessing all-blissful Ananda, life repossess its divine power in the play of omnipotent Conscious-Force and Matter open to its divine liberty as a form of the divine Existence.

And if there be any goal to the evolution which finds here its present crown and head in the human being, other than an aimless circling and an individual escape from the circling, if the infinite potentiality of this creature, who alone here stands between Spirit and Matter with the power to mediate between them, has any meaning other than an ultimate awakening from the delusion of life by despair and disgust of the cosmic effort and its complete rejection, then even such a luminous and puissant transfiguration and emergence of the Divine in the creature must be that high-uplifted goal and that supreme significance.

Meditation has been compared to sending a missile into outer space….We are literally shooting off from our earthbound station when we direct the consciousness upwards in meditation. Like a satellite leaving the launching pad, we are probing out to areas not yet sign-posted, to regions far beyond those that are known….It is truly a science of “inner space”

There is a metaphor that can be used to describe the journey from nonabiding to abiding awakening: that of a rocket ship. A rocket ship takes a tremendous amount of thrust and a tremendous amount of energy both to get off the ground and then to break the gravitational field as it travels through the sky and ultimately into space.

If there is enough fuel in the rocket and it gets far enough away from the Earth, it can eventually get beyond the gravitational field of the planet. Once the rocket is beyond the gravitational field of the Earth, the Earth no longer has the power to pull it back down.

As a metaphor, we can think of the egoic structure, or the dream state, as the Earth. The dream state has a gravitational force; it has the tendency to pull consciousness into itself. This gravitational force is really what one is dealing with throughout the entirety of the spiritual journey. Awakening is breaking free of this gravitational force. Initially, it may simply be leaving the dream state, awakening from the dream state of “me” and separation and isolation. But because we’ve awakened does not mean that consciousness has gotten past the gravitational pull of the dream state. If we haven’t gone completely beyond this gravitational field, we’re going to be pulled back toward the experience of “me” and the perception of separateness.

Using the metaphor of the rocket ship is a way of thinking about the process of awakening. The dissolution of the ego takes time. While the moment of awakening is a process that unfolds thereafter – the process of getting beyond the gravitional force of the dream state. This process, this greater individualization can override and shed one´s ego, and become a kind of superself that has the ability extend the individual consciousness beyond the constraints, into a form of communication with the Divine Consciousness or Universal Consciousness.

Yoga is a science of the soul, a method through which one can liberate oneself from the cycle of birth and death

Yoga is actually science, a method to realise and unite with the divine. It teaches one how to be free from the cycle of birth and rebirth (or birth and death), and be liberated from the three dimensional plane of existence.

Yoga teaches us how the will to attain freedom can be strengthened.
Yoga teaching that true freedom is known only when one gives up all ego activity.
Yoga teaches The Science of Self-Realization

The practice of Yoga as Science enable one to merge with the Divine Universal Self. This merging of individual consciousness with universal consciousness creates a “divine union” called “yoga”. The practice that leads to this state of self-mastery is also called “yoga”. So the royal road and the destination have the same name, “yoga”. Those who practice yoga are called yogis and those who master yoga are also called yogis. Yoga teaches self-mastery and how to stilling of all “thought waves” (brain waves) or mental modifications, thereby making the mind fit for concentration and meditation. science of yoga teaches; self-control, religious observances, physical postures, control of breath, withdrawel of the five senses, concentration, meditation, and wisdom state.

The word “yoga” means “to join”. The science of “yoga” teaches of the individual consciousness can “join” with universal consciousness. Yoga teaches the methods of merging the individual will with the cosmic will by controlling the mind and its modifications, thereby attaining liberation. On the physical plane, yoga bestows good health and physical efficiency; on the mental plane concentration, balance of mind, and peace. On the spiritual plane, it guarantees liberation from the chain of birth and death, and offers eternal bliss, immortality, perfection, and everlasting peace. The ultimate objective of yoga is not only individual liberation, but the transformation of the entire human race. It aims to instill a divine nature and life into the physical, mental, and spiritual life of humanity.

Yoga provides a technology, a method by which anyone who practices it can experience that divine identity within. To fully appreciate the value of the great gift of “yoga” can provide, e need to understand why, for thousends of years, the Yogis kept in secret. Then “yoga” provides “spiritual technology” and with this follows power, because knowledge gives power, and power can be corrupt, so they kept this knowledge secret. The Matrix using science in a corrupt way that binds, captivates and imprison humankind into The matrix, and same “yoga technology” or ” quantum spiritual technology” can be used to free and liberate oneself from the Matrix. If the Matrix entangles (scientific materialism), the science of yoga disentangles (scientific yoga). When the ego becomes God, the scientist, at least some, consider themselves Gods as they manipulate nature applying technology.

The soul thus transfigured becomes the light body. … feelings we build the rainbow bridge of light that unites our physical brain to our immortal self, the divine presence within us

Bridges were an important alchemical symbol of the conjunction of opposites. Bridges neutralies opposites and its structures of duality.

Building spiritual bridges; alchemy, synthesis, union, transformations, re-wiring, re-connect, merging, fusion of opposites, meditation and integration all symbolize bridges or integration of energies.

Each time we reach a stage where we are raising our consciousness, our inner knowing, this is when we cross a Bridge. This is called the Antahkarana. It happens when the Soul has reached a new level of understanding, then we are ready to move forward, to another level. There will come a point, after the Initiation when there will no longer be a need for the Soul, as it will have done its work guiding the personality forward to its highest conclusion. Then we shall be pure Spirit.

Energy is the natural bridge that connects the body, mind, and spirit. It is the perfect bridge to allow people to truly experience the universality of their existence. You no longer have to enter a monastery in high, secluded mountains to reach enlightenment. Consciousnes then create a bridge of light.

Christ Consciousness is the Bridge across a gaping abyss. Its though faith and meditation one builidng this bridge.

The physical bridge is the bridge of the physical body that connects man to God and Earth. The bridge of the mind is the bridge that connects the mind of man to the Universal Knowledge. This bridge of the mind is indeed the memories of the soul of man that transcends with the spirit through eternity. The bridge of the spirit is the bridge that connects the heart of man to God. The Christ Consciousness is the path, across all the bridges to God, for man.

These bridges are the electromagnetic energy streams that weave a web of consciousness through the trilocular being of man.

These spiritual builders of our time will be called the bridge builders. They are not destined to build a physical bridge over a body of water, but rather they will build a bridge from our current level of awareness to kingdom consciousness. By taking our hands, they will gently lead us to a life engulfed in Christ consciousness.

The bridge builders will develop a new language to shift our consciousness; while at the same time they are firmly anchored in the new reality. By standing on one side of the bridge with extended arms, we who are just opening our eyes can be guided step by step across the river of doubt to the safety of our higher potential. These steps will initiate a seismic shift in our worldview and rattle our bones to the core. Jesus predicted that once you discover the truth, you will be deeply disturbed, and ultimately amazed. When we begin to see the world through the eyes of God, we will be disturbed.

The shackles of restraint will dissolve, leaving us free to live a life beyond what we can even begin to imagine today. The disturbance emerges from the dissolution of our current worldview as it slips into the past, allowing for the birth of our expanded and evolved existence. The amazement arises from seeing reality from an omniscient perspective. The opening of new senses coupled with an understanding of our full potential culminates into a golden key that unlocks the door to kingdom consciousness. As the key turns in the lock, the click activates within us the dormant DNA that has been waiting for this moment. Science has told us that we only use a small portion of our brains, and that we have DNA that does not appear to have a purpose.

We have been equipped with everything that we need to take this step into Christ consciousness, to understand that we already have the ability to live in kingdom consciousness and only need to step forward to claim our divine inheritance? It is our birthright to live a divine life. It is our destiny to live in kingdom consciousness. It is our natural evolutionary path to allow the full potential of the physical body and mind to merge with our soul as our Christed nature is born. Christ consciousness is nothing more than the ability to embrace our fullest potential as we emerge onto a new plane of existence. It is nothing less than our commitment to use every God-given gift to propel ourselves forth into birthing the kingdom of God on earth.

In the lower state of mind humans is disconnected from their divine source, and fears keeps the aplha-bridge down within the corpus callosum.

Building bridges within mind or consciousness is the work when one raising from one level to another. These bridges can also been seen as the ladder one need to able to climbing upwards.

Through visualization, three expressions of the human con-sciousness will become possible:

1.The antahkarana can be built and the shining of the Triad be definitely seen. Such will be the new vision—an outcome of the development of the sense of vision.

  1. Groups, large wholes and major syntheses will also be visualized, and this will lead to a definite expansion of consciousness. Thus the sense of synthesis will be unfolded.
  2. All creative an will be fostered by this training, and the new art of the future in all departments of creativity will be rapidly developed as the training proceeds. The unfoldment of the sense of vision and of the sense of synthesis, through visualization, will lead to a sense of livingness in form.”

We could look at this in terms of the three aspects:

  1. The antahkarana and the sense of vision.
  2. Groups, large wholes and the sense of synthesis.
  3. All creative art and a sense of livingness in form.

The will of the first aspect is a key factor in building the antahkarana (the rainbow bridge), leading one to the new vision. The unity of the second aspect leads to a sense of synthesis. The third aspect deals with a new creative activity, a new creative living, and in a sense is the form aspect of the higher consciousness. That third or form aspect will be expressive of the “livingness in form” rather than expressive of form as a separate and somewhat isolated thing unto itself. The next two quotes shed additional light on visualization and seeing the livingness in form: “Through the practice of the power of visualisation, the third eye is developed. The forms visualised, and the ideas and abstractions which are, in the process, mentally clothed and vehicled, are pictured a few inches from the third eye.

Take place between God and man, between the divine pneuma and the ground of the human soul.

The art of alchemy allows one to build a conscious bridge or “Anthakarna’ to the innermost higher self

Building the Antahkarana: The Bridge between the Higher and Lower Selves,”

The awakening to the other takes place in antahkarana, the ‘bridge’ which links the lower mental to the Spiritual Soul. Awakening to Oneself is accomplished when that ‘bridge’, which is the materialization of the duality between the other and oneself, is destroyed. Henceforth the person is identified with the spiritual Soul, identical to the Universal Soul

The golden key for ascension is to build the antahkarana, or rainbow bridge. The antahkarana is the bridge of light you create between your personality, soul, monad and God. This basic spiritual work is crucial. The antahkarana is, first, the key to connecting your personality with your higher self. Then it connects you to your monad or mighty Divine Presence. Finally it serves as the bridge to help create the integration of these three aspects of self.

Once this bridge of light is complete, finish building your antahkarana all the way back to God. This is your cosmic antahkarana. This light bridge allows more light to come into the four-body system, which is healing on all of these levels. Building the antahkarana is a key aspect of the ascension process.

Another golden key has been the use of meditations to widen and clear out the antahkarana and the central canal. In The Complete Ascension meditations on how to do this using the spiritual vortex meditation and the corkscrew meditation. It is important to widen the central canal, the planetary antahkarana and the cosmic antahkarana, for then a greater amount of spiritual current can flow through. The more spiritual current that flows through, the faster your light quotient will build and the greater your physical health will be.

In the Christian tradition, the bridge is symbolized by the cross: the vertical beam represents our link with the higher worlds.

In the Ageless Wisdom teachings, the bridge is called the Rainbow Bridge, or the Bridge of Light. In the Hindu texts, the bridge is called the Antahkarana, a Sanskrit word derived from antah, or “inner,” and karana, or “instrument.” This etheric bridge is our link between heaven and earth, our individual Jacob’s Ladder. It links the lower mind with the higher, our individual consciousness with the universal consciousness of the soul. It is through this bridge that we bring creative ideas and spiritual wisdom down to earth. In the Christian tradition, the bridge is symbolized by the cross: the vertical beam represents our link with the higher worlds. In the New Testament, Jesus refers to this bridge as the “strait” or “narrow” gate (Matt. 7:13).

How do we construct this bridge? The well-known esoteric saying, “Before we can tread the spiritual path we must become that path.


The threads that link us to our subtle bodies—the etheric, the emotional, and the lower mental—are created automatically through the evolutionary process. We now have to duplicate what God has done and consciously build a bridge to span the gaps that exist between the three aspects of the mind. The Rainbow Bridge is built in two sections. The lower span is built between the rational mind, the highest aspect of the personality, and the soul.

The higher span is built between the soul and the higher mind. The threads that connect us to the soul include the life thread, anchored through the heart, and the consciousness thread, anchored in the head. These threads extend downward from the soul to the personality.

There is a third thread that we ourselves generate: the creative thread, anchored in the throat center. This thread begins to form when the throat center becomes active. Together, these three threads make up the Rainbow Bridge. This bridge is built as we project our attention upward from the personality to the soul.

Creative meditation is the tool we use to build this bridge. Many meditation practices focus only on quieting the mind. In creative meditation, we go a step further and actively train our minds to transmit information from the soul to the brain. How to learn to refine and raise the vibration of your physical, emotional, and mental bodies. The practice of creative meditation will help you to further refine and “weld” these bodies into a cohesive whole. You will then have a clear, unobstructed channel for the free flow of information from the soul to the brain. Over time, this type meditation will also result in the transfer of energy from the lower centers to the higher.

Meditation has been compared to sending a missile into outer space….We are literally shooting off from our earthbound station when we direct the consciousness upwards in meditation. Like a satellite leaving the launching pad, we are probing out to areas not yet sign-posted, to regions far beyond those that are known….It is truly a science of “inner space” [in the same way that] astrophysics is the science of the outer cosmic realm….In line with all scientific procedure, it is a deliberate, controlled, step by step process…a method of progressing in consciousness through various states or stages

It is the thought apparatus which is involved in Meditation and which must be trained to add to this first function of the mind an ability to turn in another direction, and to register with equal facility the inner or intangible world. This ability to re-orient itself will enable the mind to register the world of subjective realities, of intuitive perception and of abstract ideas. This is the high heritage of the mystic, but seems as yet not to be within the grasp of the average man.

Those gifted seekers with intuitive perception has the ability to pierce the veil.

“Man is a bridge. Even the superman, once we perceive that he is only the symbol of the strenuous ideal, turns out to be a bridge too. Our only assurance is that the gates of the future are always open.” Man is but a bridge on the road to Superman.

You have within yourself tremendous powers and latent faculties of which you have really never had any conception. You must awaken these dormant powers and faculties by the practice of meditation and Yoga. You must develop your will and control your senses and mind. You must purify yourself and practice regular meditation. Then only you can become a Superman or God-man.

Spiritual Alchemy – Transmuting Our Inner Matrix

Alchemy can be defined as any magical power or process of transmuting a common substance, usually of little value, into a substance of great value.’ Early alchemists are best remembered for their attempts to transmute lead into gold. Over the centuries, the concept of alchemy has grown from its foundation in metallurgy to encompass psychological and spiritual transmutation. Dr. Carl Jung’s work, for example, focused on the alchemical transmutation of shadow into light, or the transformation of leaden aspects of the self into enlightened, golden aspects of the self. And modern spiritual traditions invoke the power of alchemy in the transmutation of the self from a singular inward-turning consciousness to one that is awakened, dynamic, and open to the subtle energies around us.

Traditions of energy healing—that is, activating, supporting, or unblocking the body’s own subtle energy fields to facilitate healing and well-being—can be seen as a form of spiritual alchemy. In restoring a balanced flow of energy through the body, energy healing brings us back into alignment with universal energies, or the Source from which all form and energy emanate. Thus aligned, our consciousness opens; our inner matrix meshes with the world around us, and we are drawn to the path toward our highest self. If we intend to undertake the spiritual alchemy of our own inner matrix, we must begin by exploring what that matrix is made of. That conversation begins with the concept of vibration.

There is no political alchemy by which you can get golden conduct out of leaden instincts. (Spencer 1969: 669–70). For individuals, then, the path of progress is always open; steep and difficult, especially at first. There will never be a crowd gathered round this gate; “few there be that find it.

The alchemical steps which lead to the making of gold were processes in their own bodies and built up and vitalized organs. This body of gold was to be transmuted out of the ordinary body, which is like lead. The symbols of transmutation: Both the body and the psyche can be transmuted, or refined and perfected, by means of a regenerative transformation which is psycho-spiritual alchemy.

Alchemy— The science of alchemy is the philosopher’s stone, the key to the mystery of life. Mystical” refers to revelations of supra-rational character concerning the origin, activity and destiny of the soul.

Those who have read something about alchemy will know that the fabled Philosopher’s Stone (believed to be capable of prolonging life indefinitely and transmuting lead to gold) was said to appear in three stages. The initial dark phase (nigredo) signified unenlightened matter, and could refer to most of the Earth’s dormant rocks, which are spiritually asleep. The second or white phase (albedo), signified a state of spiritually awakened matter, capable of attuning to spiritual Light and awakening the alchemist to his or her higher destiny.The third and final phase of the development of the Philosopher’s Stone is the red phase (rubedo), in which the Stone has fully developed all of its powers. In its red phase, the Philosopher’s Stone is believed to supply the alchemist with power over his or her own longevity, and the ability to heal others and transmute matter from one state to another.

Man’s inner self hides various latent and active abilities which expand his being, his consciousness, beyond the physical. It has also been pointed out that the familiar reference of turning base metal into gold is a metaphor referring to the psychological transmutation of turning the leaden aspects of our mind into the golden strands of consciousness.

The art of alchemy is shrouded in mystery and intrigue. In a historical sense, the chemical reactions and mathematics explored by early alchemists gave rise to the modern science of chemistry. But even amidst the birth of a hard science, alchemy followed a spiritual directive. Today the notion of alchemy has mostly been reduced to the search for the philosopher’s stone. It has been veiled as a romanticized treasure hunt, one that possibly yields unimaginable wealth and eternal life. The true work of the alchemist, however, isn’t oriented around the physical world; it is a spiritual journey that uplifts and refines the heart.

Literature has favored a technical approach to alchemy. Obscure tomes are littered with arcane symbols and complex rites and formulas depicting the Great Work of the alchemists. However, alchemy could also be seen as an art so simple that it could be written on an emerald. Alchemy is not a process to be explored with reason alone, for it is the process of reuniting our heart with the divine mind. Thus, the master alchemist is our own heart. Listening to our heart and actively working to remember its union with Source are the only tasks we need to perfect.

When we stay engaged in spiritual practice, our life begins to change. These shifts may be small at first—almost imperceptible—but will grow exponentially with diligence. The outcome of healing the heart center is a return to Source, the source of all love, and this change is so radical that it empowers the heart to transfigure our entire life to become congruent with this spiritual perspective. As ego dissolves, the conventional separation between heart and mind yields to a state of perfect heart-mind unity, and, similarly, other tokens of duality or conflict in the material world are reworked into the truth of unity.

The process of raising consciousness beyond the limits of duality and into oneness is a lesson in alchemy. Historically, alchemy focused on the processes by which we might transform base metals into precious metals, such as lead into gold. Although many historical alchemists pursued the literal transmutation of one substance into another, the core principles of alchemy reflect spiritual transfiguration, with physical changes being a secondary manifestation of the inner changes taking place. In healing the heart center, we are brought to the cusp of this evolutionary process. Once we arrive at this plateau, we must make a concerted effort to rise to the next level in growth. This is where we stop identifying with the world of the material plane altogether and find our awareness moved into the realm of the unseen. Even the word spirit denotes an invisible essence, something that is just out of reach or comprehension in the physical world. The heart recognizes this quality, and embracing it yields dynamic change in our life.

Spirit is the basis for inspiration. It is literally the act of being filled by spirit, and it applies equally as well to the breath as it does to creative pursuits. In both instances we empty ourselves in order to receive the blessings of life itself. Medieval texts describe “spirits” as vapors or energy fields originating from the heart, not unlike how the heart center, or Anahata, of ayurvedic tradition is closely linked to the air element and to the breath. Whichever view you choose, the heart orchestrates our existence, as it is at the center of our physical and nonphysical anatomy.

The very hollowness of our physical heart reminds us to become empty as the alchemical crucible. By focusing on a spiritually oriented paradigm of the heart, we start to lose our attachment to the mundane, dualistic world. The leaden consciousness of the slumbering mind is transmuted into its golden, luminous state of perfection: the heart-mind that identifies with its own holiness. In this awakening, we cultivate a direct, continuous relationship with Creator, and through this relationship, unconditional love transforms everything that it touches in our lives.

The stones that support the process of heart-centered alchemy have uplifting, opening, and evolutionary energy. These crystals are often described as “high-frequency” stones, for they have tangible effects that border on becoming overwhelming, especially when we are not quite ready for them. Use them with respect and a modicum of caution, as it is easy to overload the energy field when being introduced to these alchemical gemstones. These Stones for Alchemy of the Heart accelerate our spiritual growth. They clarify and strengthen our connection to Source and speed up our processes of manifestation, growth, and healing. As they broadcast their energies into our aura, these gems fine-tune and elevate the consciousness of the heart, assisting it in broadening and strengthening its influence. When the heart is fully awakened, it can be harnessed to transmute any aspect of our existence into its highest potential. Thus, the pinnacle of healing the heart can be considered the noblest form of alchemy.

The individual frustrations and social tragedies of our time are leading men of conscience and goodwill to search for some alembic that will transmute our leaden instincts into golden conduct.

For alchemy truly was a profound marriage of science and spirituality. Its actual aim was for the alchemist to transmute from a state of “leaden” earthly awareness to one of “golden” spiritual perfection. And its core philosophy is that an underlying and all-pervasive energy or consciousness connects everyone with everything, all with all, mind with body, and biology with psychology.

Within the individual, it is coming into true wholeness. In an interior alchemy, our leaden, fragmented self is transmuted into gold, its true nature and highest expression. Whether we then are immortal, as the alchemists predicted, is a mystery beyond knowing.

⦁ The esoteric alchemist’s aim was to transmute the base metals of ignorance into the gold of awareness.
⦁ Turning base metal into gold is a metaphor referring to the psychological transmutation of turning the leaden aspects of our mind into the golden strands of consciousness.
⦁ The objective was to transmute leaden consciousness into golden consciousness. It was to transmute bondage into freedom and poverty into prosperity through a direct rapport with the Higher Self.
⦁ The Philosopher’s Stone – the latter was said to be the catalyst for the transmutation of lead to gold. In alchemical writings, this was often viewed as a metaphor for the transmutation of the self from the crude ego-bound person to the awakened spiritual human.
⦁ “This resonates with the old alchemical assertions that the lipid” is inherent within the lead; and that the processes of transmutation will “free” the gold within the lead.
⦁ The alchemical steps which lead to the making of gold were processes in their own bodies and built up and vitalized organs. This body of gold was to be transmuted out of the ordinary body, which is like lead. The symbols of transmutation: Both the body and the psyche can be transmuted, or refined and perfected, by means of a regenerative transformation which is psycho-spiritual alchemy.
⦁ For alchemy truly was a profound marriage of science and spirituality. Its actual aim was for the alchemist to transmute from a state of “leaden” earthly awareness to one of “golden” spiritual perfection.
⦁ The very hollowness of our physical heart reminds us to become empty as the alchemical crucible. By focusing on a spiritually oriented paradigm of the heart, we start to lose our attachment to the mundane, dualistic world. The leaden consciousness of the slumbering mind is transmuted into its golden, luminous state of perfection: the heart-mind that identifies with its own holiness.
⦁ The master alchemist is our own heart. Listening to our heart and actively working to remember its union with Source are the only tasks we need to perfect.
⦁ The process of raising consciousness beyond the limits of duality and into oneness is a lesson in alchemy. Historically, alchemy focused on the processes by which we might transform base metals into precious metals, such as lead into gold.
⦁ The soul in its chaotic, unregenerate state is lead.
⦁ The leaden consciousness of the slumbering mind is transmuted into its golden, luminous state of perfection: the heart-mind that identifies with its own holiness.
⦁ Hermeticism could have to do with transmuling the “lead” of ordinary experience into the “gold” of consciousness.
⦁ We can learn the art of transmutation, that process philosophers and alchemists dreamed of long ago by means of which we might turn the lead of ordinary consciousness into the gold of self-realization. Transmutation of the human identity into lasting awareness of the Self cannot take place unless it is preceded by a process of individuation.

The true alchemical trnasformation is the true gold of conscious realization of the Self, redeemed from the leaden matter of its unconscious existence – a emergent evolution, an alchemical vessel that takes our leaden thoughts and turns them into gold- a flame burning and purifying the ignoble leaden condition until it reaches the sublime golden state

The ordinary state of the body and ego is the slumbering state of leaden consciousness, so civilisation has been kept in this state of mind for eons, thosuends of years, generation after generation by the controllers of this planet.

The slumbering state of the veil of ignorance may be the leaden consciounsess that´s keeping humankind trapped and imprisoned within matter, and prevents the spark of life to become enlighten. “This resonates with the old alchemical assertions that the lipid” is inherent within the lead; and that the processes of transmutation will “free” the gold within the lead.

Man’s inner self hides various latent and active abilities which expand his being, his consciousness, beyond the physical. An alchemical process can occur whereby the leaden ego is transmuted into the gold of the Self.

0 thoughts on “Only when we understand the Immortal Being that we really are, exists the possibility of escaping the fishbowl. And once we discover who we are as divine beings, we will also understand the purpose for our journey in this world of illusion: of duality and time. Playing the Master Game reveals that almost all humans live their lives in a sleeping state from which few will ever escape. Playing the Master Game provides the opportunity for freeing our self from this ‘waking-sleep’ by making us aware that our lower self consciousness is not the highest level of consciousness possible”

Leave a Reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *